PBD Nia 2024

PHILIPPINE BIDDING DOCUMENTS
Procurement of
INFRASTRUCTURE
PROJECT
TUNGAWAN PIS CY 2024
(Installation of Distribution Tanks and Pipelines,
Construction of Solar Pump System)
Tungawan, Zamboanga Sibugay
Opening of Bids Date: February 7, 2024

Time: 9:00 A.M.
Venue: NATIONAL IRRIGATION ADMINISTRATION
Zamboanga Sibugay Irrigation Management Office
DA-RFOIX Research Division Compound, Sanito, Ipil, Zamboanga Sibugay
FUND: REPAIR PIS CY 2024

ABC: Php 1,871,072.75
Reference No.: NIAREG9-01102024-REPAIR-PISCY2024-937
Sixth Edition
10 January 2024
Preface
1
These Philippine Bidding Documents (PBDs) for the procurement of Infrastructure
Projects (hereinafter referred to also as the “Works”) through Competitive Bidding have been
prepared by the Government of the Philippines for use by all branches, agencies,
departments, bureaus, offices, or instrumentalities of the government, including government-
owned and/or -controlled corporations, government financial institutions, state universities
and colleges, local government units, and autonomous regional government. The procedures
and practices presented in this document have been developed through broad experience, and
are for mandatory use in projects that are financed in whole or in part by the Government of
the Philippines or any foreign government/foreign or international financing institution in
accordance with the provisions of the 2016 revised Implementing Rules and Regulations
(IRR) of Republic Act (RA) No. 9184.
The PBDs are intended as a model for admeasurements (unit prices or unit rates in a
bill of quantities) types of contract, which are the most common in Works contracting.
The Bidding Documents shall clearly and adequately define, among others: (i) the
objectives, scope, and expected outputs and/or results of the proposed contract; (ii) the
eligibility requirements of Bidders; (iii) the expected contract duration; and (iv) the
obligations, duties, and/or functions of the winning Bidder.
Care should be taken to check the relevance of the provisions of the PBDs against the
requirements of the specific Works to be procured. If duplication of a subject is inevitable in
other sections of the document prepared by the Procuring Entity, care must be exercised to
avoid contradictions between clauses dealing with the same matter.
Moreover, each section is prepared with notes intended only as information for the
Procuring Entity or the person drafting the Bidding Documents. They shall not be included in
the final documents. The following general directions should be observed when using the
documents:
a. All the documents listed in the Table of Contents are normally required for the
procurement of Infrastructure Projects. However, they should be adapted as
necessary to the circumstances of the particular Project.
b. Specific details, such as the “name of the Procuring Entity” and “address for
bid submission,” should be furnished in the Instructions to Bidders, Bid Data
Sheet, and Special Conditions of Contract. The final documents should
contain neither blank spaces nor options.
c. This Preface and the footnotes or notes in italics included in the Invitation to
Bid, BDS, General Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions of Contract,
Specifications, Drawings, and Bill of Quantities are not part of the text of the
final document, although they contain instructions that the Procuring Entity
should strictly follow.
d. The cover should be modified as required to identify the Bidding Documents

as to the names of the Project, Contract, and Procuring Entity, in addition to
date of issue.
e. Modifications for specific Procurement Project details should be provided in

the Special Conditions of Contract as amendments to the Conditions of
Contract. For easy completion, whenever reference has to be made to specific
clauses in the Bid Data Sheet or Special Conditions of Contract, these terms
shall be printed in bold typeface on Sections I (Instructions to Bidders) and III
(General Conditions of Contract), respectively.
f. For guidelines on the use of Bidding Forms and the procurement of Foreign-
Assisted Projects, these will be covered by a separate issuance of the
Government Procurement Policy Board.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GLOSSARY OF..................................................................................................... 16
TERMS, ABBREVIATIONS, AND ACRONYMS ...................................................... 16
SECTION I. INVITATION TO BID ......................................................................... 19
BAC CHAIRPERSON........................................................................................... 24
SECTION II. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS .......................................................... 25
1. Scope of Bid ............................................................................................................25
2. Funding Information ...............................................................................................25
3. Bidding Requirements.............................................................................................25
4. Corrupt, Fraudulent, Collusive, Coercive, and Obstructive Practices ....................25
5. Eligible Bidders.......................................................................................................26
6. Origin of Associated Goods ....................................................................................26
7. Subcontracts ............................................................................................................26
8. Pre-Bid Conference .................................................................................................27
9. Clarification and Amendment of Bidding Documents............................................27
10. Documents Comprising the Bid: Eligibility and Technical Components ...............27
11. Documents Comprising the Bid: Financial Component .........................................28
12. Alternative Bids ......................................................................................................28
13. Bid Prices ................................................................................................................28
14. Bid and Payment Currencies ...................................................................................28
15. Bid Security.............................................................................................................29
16. Sealing and Marking of Bids...................................................................................29
17. Deadline for Submission of Bids ............................................................................29
18. Opening and Preliminary Examination of Bids ......................................................29
19. Detailed Evaluation and Comparison of Bids .........................................................30
20. Post Qualification ....................................................................................................30
21. Signing of the Contract ...........................................................................................30
SECTION III. BID DATA SHEET ......................................................................... 31
SECTION IV. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT ....................................... 34
1. Scope of Contract ....................................................................................................34
2. Sectional Completion of Works ..............................................................................34
3. Possession of Site ....................................................................................................34
4. The Contractor’s Obligations ..................................................................................34
4
5. Performance Security ..............................................................................................35
6. Site Investigation Reports .......................................................................................35
7. Warranty ..................................................................................................................35
8. Liability of the Contractor .......................................................................................35
9. Termination for Other Causes .................................................................................35
10. Dayworks ................................................................................................................36
11. Program of Work.....................................................................................................36
12. Instructions, Inspections and Audits .......................................................................36
13. Advance Payment....................................................................................................36
14. Progress Payments ..................................................................................................36
15. Operating and Maintenance Manuals......................................................................36
SECTION V. SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT ........................................... 38
SECTION VI. SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................... 40
SECTION I. TEMPORARY WORKS, CONSTRUCTION PLANT,
MOBILIZATION OF CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT AND
DEMOBILIZATION WORK ................................................................... 43
101. SCOPE ...................................................................................................................43
102. BASIS OF PAYMENT .........................................................................................44
SECTION II. CLEARING AND GRUBBING ............................................. 45
201. SCOPE ...................................................................................................................45
202. METHOD OF CONSTRUCTIONS ....................................................................45
203. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT .......................................................................46
204. BASIS OF PAYMENT .........................................................................................46
SECTION III. DIVERSION AND CARE OF RIVER DURING
CONSTRUCTION AND UNWATERING FOUNDATION ............... 46
301. GENERAL .............................................................................................................46
302. METHOD OF CONSTRUCTION ......................................................................47
303. BASIS OF PAYMENT .........................................................................................47
SECTION IV. CANAL EXCAVATION ....................................................... 48
401. SCOPE ...................................................................................................................48
402. CLASSIFICATION ..............................................................................................48
403. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................49
405. FINISHING CANAL AND ROADWAYS ..........................................................51
5
407. BASIS OF PAYMENT .........................................................................................52
SECTION V. CHANNEL EXCAVATION ................................................... 53
501. SCOPE ...................................................................................................................53
502. CLASSIFICATION ..............................................................................................53
506. BASIS OF PAYMENT .........................................................................................53
SECTION VI. STRUCTURE EXCAVATION ............................................. 53
601. SCOPE ...................................................................................................................53
602. CLASSIFICATION ..............................................................................................53
606. BASIS OF PAYMENT .........................................................................................55
SECTION VII. DRILLING AND GROUTING .......................................... 56
701. SCOPE ...................................................................................................................56
702. DEFINITION OF TERMS ...................................................................................56
703. EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................................57
704. GROUT MATERIAL ...........................................................................................58
705. DRILLING OPERATIONS .................................................................................59
706. METHODS OF GROUTING ..............................................................................61
707. TYPES OF GROUTING ......................................................................................62
708. WATER PRESSURE TESTING .........................................................................62
709. MIXTURE COMPOSITION ...............................................................................63
710. GROUTING PRESSURES ..................................................................................64
711. GROUT PROCEDURES......................................................................................65
712. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ..................................................................67
SECTION VIII. FARM AND DRAINAGE DITCH CONSTRUCTION ... 68
801. SCOPE ...................................................................................................................68
802. METHOD OF CONSTRUCTION .....................................................................68
803. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT ......................................................................69
804. BASIS OF PAYMENT .........................................................................................69
SECTION IX. OVERHAUL........................................................................... 70
6
901. SCOPE ...................................................................................................................70
902. DISPOSALOF EXCAVATED MATERIALS....................................................70
904. BASIS OF PAYMENT .........................................................................................71
SECTION X. SIDE BORROW ...................................................................... 72
1001. SCOPE ............................................................................................................72
1002. METHOD OF OPERATION ...............................................................................72
1101. SCOPE ...................................................................................................................73
1102. METHOD OF OPERATION ...............................................................................73
SECTION XII. STRUCTURE BACKFILL .................................................. 74
1201. SCOPE ..................................................................................................................74
1204. BASIS OF PAYMENT .........................................................................................74
SECTION XIII. EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION AND
COMPACTION ......................................................................................... 75
1301. SCOPE ...................................................................................................................75
1302. SOURCES OF MATERIALS ..............................................................................75
1303. COMPACTION EQUIPMENT ...........................................................................75
1306. BASIS OF PAYMENT .........................................................................................77
SECTION XIV. R O A D S ............................................................................. 78
1401. SCOPE ...................................................................................................................78
1402. MATERIALS ........................................................................................................78
1403. MAINTAINING PUBLIC TRAFFIC .................................................................78
1406. BASIS OF PAYMENT .........................................................................................80
SECTION XV. CONCRETE ......................................................................... 80
1501. SCOPE ................................................................................................ 80
1502. CONCRETE COMPOSITION ............................................................................81
7
1503. CEMENT ...............................................................................................................81
1504. ADMIXTURES .....................................................................................................81
1505. WATER..................................................................................................................83
1506. FINE AGGREGATES ..........................................................................................83
1507. COARSE AGGREGATES ...................................................................................85
1508. PRODUCTION OF FINE AND COARSE AGGREGATES ............................87
1509. AGGREGATE SAMPLING AND TESTING ....................................................88
1510. CLASSIFICATION AND PROPORTIONING OF CONCRETE
MIXTURES ...........................................................................................................89
1511. MEASUREMENT OF MATERIALS .................................................................90
1512. MIXING AND DELIVERY .................................................................................90
1513. RE-TEMPERING .................................................................................................92
1514. SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONCRETE ................................................92
1515. CONVEYING AND PLACING CONCRETE ...................................................92
1516. FORMS ..................................................................................................................94
1517. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS.................................................................................98
1518. REPAIR OF CONCRETE ...................................................................................99
1519. FINISHES AND FINISHING ..............................................................................99
1520. CURING ..............................................................................................................102
1521. TOLERANCES FOR CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION ................................104
1522. FAILURE TO CURE..........................................................................................106
1523. FAILURE TO MEET CONCRETE REQUIREMENTS................................107
1524. PROTECTION OF CONCRETE WORKS .....................................................107
SECTION XVI. CONCRETE DEMOLITION WORK............................ 107
1601. SCOPE .................................................................................................................107
1602. METHOD OF CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................107
1603. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT .....................................................................108
1604. BASIS OF PAYMENT .......................................................................................108
SECTION XVII. CONCRETE STRUCTURES ......................................... 108
1701. SCOPE .................................................................................................................108
1702. CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION ......................................................................108
1704. BASIS OF PAYMENT .......................................................................................109
1705. CONCRETE FOR ALL STRUCTURES .........................................................109
1706. PRE CAST CONSTRUCTION .........................................................................110
8
1707. LEAN CONCRETE ............................................................................................110
1708. STAFF GAGES ...................................................................................................111
SECTION XVIII. SHOTCRETE ................................................................. 111
1801. SCOPE .................................................................................................................111
1802. GENERAL ...........................................................................................................111
1803. MATERIALS ......................................................................................................111
1804. PROPORTIONING AND TESTING................................................................112
1805. PREPARATION OF SURFACES .....................................................................113
1806. EQUIPMENT ......................................................................................................113
1807 BATCHING AND MIXING ..............................................................................114
1808. PLACING ............................................................................................................114
1809. CURING ..............................................................................................................114
1810. DRAINAGE HOLES ..........................................................................................114
1811. WELDED WIRE/CHAIN-LINK FABRIC.......................................................114
1812. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ................................................................115
SECTION XIX. RUBBLE MASONRY ...................................................... 116
1901. SCOPE .................................................................................................................116
1902. MATERIALS ......................................................................................................116
1905. BASIS OF PAYMENT .......................................................................................117
SECTION XX. CONCRETE CANAL LINING ........................................ 117
2001. SCOPE .................................................................................................................117
2004. BASIS OF PAYMENT .......................................................................................118
SECTION XXI. CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT MATERIALS ...... 118
2101. SCOPE .................................................................................................................118
2102. JOINTS IN CONCRETE ...................................................................................118
2103. JOINTING AND COATING MATERIALS ....................................................119
2104. JOINT IN BRIDGE DECK ................................................................................122
2105. GROUT ................................................................................................................122
SECTION XXII. DOWELS .......................................................................... 123
2201. SCOPE .................................................................................................................123
9
2202. MATERIALS ......................................................................................................123
2205. BASIS OF PAYMENT .......................................................................................124
2301. SCOPE .................................................................................................................124
2302. MATERIALS ......................................................................................................124
2303. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENT ..............................................................125
2304. PREPARATION OF REINFORCEMENT DRAWINGS ..............................126
2305. SAMPLING FOR TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE OF MATERIALS
THAT FAIL TO MEET CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS (FOR
STEEL BARS FURNISHED BY CONTRACTOR) ........................................126
2307. BASIS OF PAYMENT .......................................................................................127
SECTION XXIV. REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPES .......................... 128
2401. SCOPE .................................................................................................................128
2402. TYPES OF R.C. PIPES ......................................................................................128
2403. MATERIALS ......................................................................................................128
2404. MANUFACTURE OF R.C. PIPES ...................................................................128
2405. INSPECTION, SAMPLING AND TESTING ..................................................129
2406. REJECTION .......................................................................................................129
2407. MARKING ..........................................................................................................129
2408. CURING ..............................................................................................................129
2409. TRANSPORTATION AND DELIVERY OF R. C. PIPES ............................129
2410. EXCAVATION ...................................................................................................130
2411. LAYING OR INSTALLATION OF R.C. PIPES ............................................130
2412. BACKFILLING ..................................................................................................130
2414. BASIS OF PAYMENT .......................................................................................131
SECTION XXV. BOULDER RIPRAP ........................................................ 131
2501. SCOPE .................................................................................................................131
2502. MATERIALS ......................................................................................................131
2505. BASIS 0F PAYMENT ........................................................................................132
SECTION XXVI. GABION-TYPE RIPRAP .............................................. 132
10
2601. SCOPE .................................................................................................................132
2604. BASIS OF PAYMENT ......................................................................................133
SECTION XXVII. GROUTED RIPRAP ................................................... 133
2701. SCOPE .................................................................................................................133
2702. MATERIALS ......................................................................................................133
2705. BASIS OF PAYMENT .......................................................................................134
SECTION XXVIII. GRAVEL BLANKET ................................................. 135
2801. SCOPE .................................................................................................................135
2802. MATERIALS ......................................................................................................135
2803. PLACING ............................................................................................................135
2805. BASIS OF PAYMENT .......................................................................................135
2901. SCOPE .................................................................................................................135
2902. MATERIALS ......................................................................................................136
2905. BASIS OF PAYMENT .......................................................................................136
SECTION XXX. PLAIN CONCRETE DRAIN PIPES ............................ 137
3001. SCOPE .................................................................................................................137
3002. MATERIALS ......................................................................................................137
3003. LAYING OR INSTALLATION OF PIPES .....................................................137
3005. BASIS OF PAYMENT .......................................................................................137
SECTION XXXI. REINFORCED CONCRETE PILES .......................... 138
3101. SCOPE .................................................................................................................138
3102. FABRICATION ..................................................................................................138
3103. LOCATION AND SITE PREPARATION .......................................................139
3104. TESTING .............................................................................................................139
3105. DRIVING CONCRETE PILES .........................................................................139
3106. TEST PILE ..........................................................................................................140
11
3107. SPLICING OF FILES ........................................................................................140
3108. CUTTING OFF AND CAPPING PILES ..........................................................140
3110. BASIS OF PAYMENT .......................................................................................141
SECTION XXXII. STEEL SHEET PILES ................................................ 141
3201. SCOPE .................................................................................................................141
3202. DRIVING STEEL SHEET PILES ....................................................................141
3204. BASIS OF PAYMENT .......................................................................................142
SECTION XXXIII. STEEL GATES AND LIFTING MECHANISM ..... 142
3301. SCOPE .................................................................................................................142
3302. STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS..........................................................142
3303. MATERIALS ......................................................................................................143
3304. WORKMANSHIP ...............................................................................................148
3305. PROTECTION OF MACHINED SURFACES ...............................................150
3306. FABRICATION ..................................................................................................151
3307. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE INSTALLATION AND
OPERATING ARRANGEMENT .....................................................................152
3308. STRUCTURAL DESIGN CRITERIA FOR GATES ......................................153
3309. HOISTS ................................................................................................................155
3310. LIFTING MECHANISM INSTALLATION, TESTS AND
ADJUSTMENTS .................................................................................................159
3311. EMBEDDED PARTS .........................................................................................159
3312. ANTI-CORROSION MEASURES AND PAINTING .....................................159
3313. PREPARING FOR TRANSPORTATION .......................................................161
3314. ACCEPTANCE OF WORKS ............................................................................162
3315. MANUALS ..........................................................................................................163
3317. BASIS OF PAYMENT .......................................................................................163
SECTION XXXIV. STEEL PIPE MANHOLE, BLOW-OFF VALVE AND
MANHOLE COVER .............................................................................. 164
3401. SCOPE .................................................................................................................164
3402. CONTRACTOR'S DRAWINGS, AND OTHER DATA .................................164
3403. MATERIALS ......................................................................................................164
3404. FABRICATION OR MANUFACTURE ..........................................................165
12
3405. DESIGN AND TEST PRESSURE.....................................................................167
3406. INSTALLATION ................................................................................................167
3407. TEST AND ADJUSTMENTS ............................................................................167
3408. PAINTING ...........................................................................................................167
3409. PROTECTION COATING ................................................................................167
3410. CLEANING AND SHIPPING ...........................................................................168
3412. BASIS OF PAYMENT .......................................................................................168
3501. SCOPE .................................................................................................................168
3502. FABRICATION ..................................................................................................169
3503. INSTALLATION ................................................................................................170
3504. TRASHRACKS OR SCREENS.........................................................................171
3505. STEEL LADDER RUNGS .................................................................................171
3506. STEEL GRATINGS ...........................................................................................171
3507. GALVANIZED IRON PIPE GUARDRAILS AND HANDRAILS ...............171
3508. BEARING PLATES FOR BRIDGES ...............................................................172
3509. BEARING PADS AND FILLER BOARDS .....................................................172
3510. PERFORATED DRAIN PIPES .........................................................................172
3511. BOLTS, ANCHORS, ANGLES, NUTS, WASHERS AND OTHER
METALS ..............................................................................................................172
3512. GROUT AND MORTAR ...................................................................................173
3513. TIMBER ..............................................................................................................173
3515. BASIS OF PAYMENT .......................................................................................174
SECTION XXXVI. PAINTING METALWORK...................................... 174
3601. GENERAL ..........................................................................................................174
3602. CLEANING AND PAINTING SCHEDULE ...................................................175
3603. PREPARATION OF SURFACES .....................................................................178
3604. APPLICATION ...................................................................................................178
3605. MATERIALS ......................................................................................................180
3606. COSTS..................................................................................................................181
SECTION XXXVII. ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACING - PLANT
MIX ........................................................................................................... 181
3701. DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................................181
3702. MATERIAL_REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................181
13
3703. CONSTRUCTION_REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................183
3704. ASPHALT CEMENT ........................................................................................190
3705. CUT BACK ASPHALT ......................................................................................192
3706. MIXING TEMPERATURE FOR ASPHALT CEMENT ...............................192
3707. APPLICATION TEMPERATURE FOR CUT-BACK ASPHALT ...............192
3708. BITUMINOUS PRIME COAT..........................................................................193
3710. BASIS OF PAYMENT .......................................................................................194
SECTION XXXVIII. PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE ................................ 194
3801. SCOPE .................................................................................................................194
3802. FABRICATION ..................................................................................................194
3803. METHOD OF INSTALLATION ......................................................................195
3805 BASIS OF PAYMENT .......................................................................................195
SECTION XXXIX. GATE VALVE AND BUTTERFLY VALVE .......... 195
3901. SCOPE .................................................................................................................195
3902. CONTRACTOR’S DRAWINGS AND OTHER DATA .................................195
3903. MATERIALS ......................................................................................................195
3904. FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE ........................................................196
3905. PROTECTIVE COATINGS ..............................................................................196
3906. INSTALLATION ................................................................................................196
3907. TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS ..........................................................................196
3909. BASIS OF PAYMENT .......................................................................................197
SECTION XL. SODDING ............................................................................ 197
4001. SCOPE .................................................................................................................197
4003. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ......................................198
SECTION XLI. MASONRY WORKS ........................................................ 198
4101. SCOPE .................................................................................................................198
4102 MORTAR ...........................................................................................................198
4103. CHB WALLS AND PARTITIONS ...................................................................198
4104. R.C. PIPES (8" 0/ and below) ...........................................................................200
4105. PLASTERING ....................................................................................................200
14
4107. BASIS OF PAYMENT .......................................................................................201
SECTION VII. DRAWINGS ................................................................................ 203
SECTION VIII. BILL OF QUANTITIES .............................................................. 204
SECTION IX. CHECKLIST OF TECHNICAL AND FINANCIAL DOCUMENTS ...... 206
SECTION X. BIDDING FORMS .......................................................................... 209
Bid Form .......................................................................................................... 210
Form of Contract Agreement ........................................................................... 212
Omnibus Sworn Statement .............................................................................. 214
Bid-Securing Declaration................................................................................. 217
15
Glossary of
Terms, Abbreviations, and Acronyms
ABC – Approved Budget for the Contract.
ARCC – Allowable Range of Contract Cost.
BAC – Bids and Awards Committee.
Bid – A signed offer or proposal to undertake a contract submitted by a bidder in response to

and in consonance with the requirements of the bidding documents. Also referred to as
Proposal and Tender. (2016 revised IRR, Section 5[c])
Bidder – Refers to a contractor, manufacturer, supplier, distributor and/or consultant who

submits a bid in response to the requirements of the Bidding Documents. (2016 revised IRR,
Section 5[d])
Bidding Documents – The documents issued by the Procuring Entity as the bases for bids,
furnishing all information necessary for a prospective bidder to prepare a bid for the Goods,
Infrastructure Projects, and/or Consulting Services required by the Procuring Entity. (2016
revised IRR, Section 5[e])
BIR – Bureau of Internal Revenue.
BSP – Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas.
CDA – Cooperative Development Authority.
Consulting Services – Refer to services for Infrastructure Projects and other types of projects
or activities of the GOP requiring adequate external technical and professional expertise that
are beyond the capability and/or capacity of the GOP to undertake such as, but not limited to:
(i) advisory and review services; (ii) pre-investment or feasibility studies; (iii) design; (iv)
construction supervision; (v) management and related services; and (vi) other technical
services or special studies. (2016 revised IRR, Section 5[i])
Contract – Refers to the agreement entered into between the Procuring Entity and the
Supplier or Manufacturer or Distributor or Service Provider for procurement of Goods and
Services; Contractor for Procurement of Infrastructure Projects; or Consultant or Consulting
Firm for Procurement of Consulting Services; as the case may be, as recorded in the Contract
Form signed by the parties, including all attachments and appendices thereto and all
documents incorporated by reference therein.
Contractor – is a natural or juridical entity whose proposal was accepted by the Procuring
Entity and to whom the Contract to execute the Work was awarded. Contractor as used in
these Bidding Documents may likewise refer to a supplier, distributor, manufacturer, or
consultant.
CPI – Consumer Price Index.
16
DOLE – Department of Labor and Employment.
DTI – Department of Trade and Industry.
Foreign-funded Procurement or Foreign-Assisted Project – Refers to procurement whose

funding source is from a foreign government, foreign or international financing institution as
specified in the Treaty or International or Executive Agreement. (2016 revised IRR, Section
5[b]).
GFI – Government Financial Institution.
GOCC – Government-owned and/or –controlled corporation.
Goods – Refer to all items, supplies, materials and general support services, except
Consulting Services and Infrastructure Projects, which may be needed in the transaction of
public businesses or in the pursuit of any government undertaking, project or activity,
whether in the nature of equipment, furniture, stationery, materials for construction, or
personal property of any kind, including non-personal or contractual services such as the
repair and maintenance of equipment and furniture, as well as trucking, hauling, janitorial,
security, and related or analogous services, as well as procurement of materials and supplies
provided by the Procuring Entity for such services. The term “related” or “analogous
services” shall include, but is not limited to, lease or purchase of office space, media
advertisements, health maintenance services, and other services essential to the operation of
the Procuring Entity. (2016 revised IRR, Section 5[r])
GOP – Government of the Philippines.
Infrastructure Projects – Include the construction, improvement, rehabilitation, demolition,

repair, restoration or maintenance of roads and bridges, railways, airports, seaports,
communication facilities, civil works components of information technology projects,
irrigation, flood control and drainage, water supply, sanitation, sewerage and solid waste
management systems, shore protection, energy/power and electrification facilities, national
buildings, school buildings, hospital buildings, and other related construction projects of the
government. Also referred to as civil works or works. (2016 revised IRR, Section 5[u])
LGUs – Local Government Units.
NFCC – Net Financial Contracting Capacity.
NGA – National Government Agency.
PCAB – Philippine Contractors Accreditation Board.
PhilGEPS - Philippine Government Electronic Procurement System.
Procurement Project – refers to a specific or identified procurement covering goods,

infrastructure project or consulting services. A Procurement Project shall be described,
detailed, and scheduled in the Project Procurement Management Plan prepared by the agency
which shall be consolidated in the procuring entity's Annual Procurement Plan. (GPPB
Circular No. 06-2019 dated 17 July 2019)
PSA – Philippine Statistics Authority.

17
SEC – Securities and Exchange Commission.
SLCC – Single Largest Completed Contract.
UN – United Nations.
18
Section I. Invitation to Bid
19
Invitation to Bid for
TUNGAWAN PIS CY 2024

(Installation of Distribution Tanks and Pipelines,
Construction of Solar Pump System)
Tungawan, Zamboanga Sibugay
1. The National Irrigation Administration – Zamboanga Sibugay Irrigation

Management Office through the REPAIR PIS CY 2024 intends to apply the sum of
One Million Eight Hundred Seventy One Thousand Seventy Two Pesos and 75/100
Only (Php 1,871,072.75) being the Approved Budget for the Contract (ABC) to
payments under the contract for NIAREG9-01102024-REPAIR-PISCY2024-937. Bids
received in excess of the ABC shall be automatically rejected at bid opening.

Management Office now invites bids for:
ITEM
NO. DESCRIPTION QUANTITY UNIT
Delivery and Installation of Distribution Tanks and Pipelines,

I. 1.00 l.s
Construction of Pump House and Solar PV House
II. Construction Safety and Health

Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) 1.00 l.s
III PIPELINES
a Common Excavation 241.70 cu.m
b Common Backfill 276.80 cu.m
c Miscellaneous Pipes & Materials
c.1 2” Ø HDPE (SDR 17) w/ accessories: 12pcs of 30 °
elbow @50.8 mm nominal diameter & 8 pcs of 45° elbow @
50.80 mm nominal diameter 340.00 mtrs.
IV. DISTRIBUTION TANK
a Concrete
a.1. 3000 Psi Plain Concrete 1.40 cu.m
b Reinforcing Steel Bars 89.60 Kgs.
c Stainless Steel Tank
c.1. 2000 liters Stainless Steel Tank 2 .00 units
c.2. 1 ½” ø G.I. Pipe 2.00 Lengths
c.3. 1 ½” ø G.I. 90° Elbow 16.00 Pcs
c.4. 1 ½” ø C.I. Adapter 2.00 pcs
20
c.5. 2” ø Gate Valve 2.00 pcs
c.6. 110mm ø Brass Type Gate Valve 2.00 pcs
c.7. Saddle Clamp (3” x 1 ½”) 2.00 pcs
V. PUMP HOUSE
A Structure Excavation (Manual) 10.00 cu.m
B Structure Backfill (Manual) 4.80 cu.m
C Gravel Blanket
c.1. Gravel Bedding 6.20 cu.m
d Concrete
d.1 3000 Psi Plain Concrete 5.70 cu.m
e. Masonry Works
e.1 4” Concrete Hollow Blocks 29.60 sq.m.
e.2 Mortar & Plastering 74.70 sq.m
f Roofing and Metal Works 1 l.s
g Doors and Windows 1 l.s
h Reinforcing Steel Bars 1,068.20 kgs
VI Solar PV House
a Structure Excavation (Manual) 7.80 cu.m
b Structure Backfill (Manual) 4.80 cu.m
c Gravel Blanket
c.1 Gravel Bedding 6.30 cu.m
d Concrete
e Masonry Works
e.1 Plastering 8.60 sq.m
f Roofing and Metal Works 1 ls
g Reinforcing Steel Bars 426.50 kgs.
VII SOLAR PANEL ARRAY
a. Structure Excavation (Manual) 0.50 cu.m
c. Gravel Blanket
d. Concrete
e Masonry
f. Reinforcing Steel Bars 85.40 kgs.
g Solar Panel (300-watts) (including delivery and installation) 6.00 unit
h Submersible Pump 5hp-3 phase 1.00 unit
i Solar Panel Mounting Accessories (including installation) 6.00 unit
j. 4” Ø GI Pipe 18.00 mtrs.
TOTAL 1,871,072.75
21
the above Procurement Project. Completion of the Works is required 150 Calendar
Days. Bidders should have completed a contract similar to the Project. The
description of an eligible bidder is contained in the Bidding Documents, particularly,
in Section II (Instructions to Bidders).
3. Bidding will be conducted through open competitive bidding procedures using non-
discretionary “pass/fail” criterion as specified in the 2016 revised Implementing Rules
and Regulations (IRR) of Republic Act (RA) No. 9184.
a.) Bidding is restricted to Filipino citizens/sole proprietorships, cooperatives, and

partnerships or organizations with at least seventy five percent (75%) interest or
outstanding capital stock belonging to citizens of the Philippines.
4. Interested bidders may obtain further information from National Irrigation

Administration – Zamboanga Sibugay Irrigation Management Office and inspect the
Bidding Documents at the address given below from 8:00 A.M. to 5:00 P.M.
5. A complete set of Bidding Documents may be acquired by interested bidders on

January 18, 2024 to February 6, 2024 at 5:00 PM from given address and website/s
below National Irrigation Administration – Zamboanga Sibugay Irrigation
Management Office, https://notices.philgeps.gov.ph,
https://region9.nia.gov.ph/content/invitation-bid and upon payment of the
applicable fee for the Bidding Documents, pursuant to the latest Guidelines issued by
the GPPB, in the amount of Five Thousand Pesos (Php 5,000.00 ).The Procuring
Entity shall allow the bidder to present its proof of payment for the fees will be
presented in person, by facsimile, or through electronic means.
However, the interested Bidder can purchase the Bidding Documents only upon
presentation of an Original Copy of Sworn Affidavit of Site Inspection, and an
Original Copy of a Certificate of Site Inspection signed by the NIA authorized
personnel or the Irrigators Association President certifying that the Bidder has
actually inspected the Project Site (prescribe forms can be availed from this office).
Photocopy is not acceptable. Such Affidavit/s and Certificate/s must be submitted
for verification to the BAC Secretariat.

Management Office will hold a Pre-Bid Conference1 on January 25, 2024 at 9:00 AM.
at National Irrigation Administration – Zamboanga Sibugay Irrigation Management
Office , DA-RFOIX Research Division Compound, Sanito, Ipil, Zamboanga Sibugay
and/or through videoconferencing/webcasting via, Google Meet, which shall be open
to prospective bidders.
7. Bids must be duly received by the BAC Secretariat through (i) manual submission at
the office address as indicated below, on or before February 7, 2024 at 9:00 A.M.
Late bids shall not be accepted.
1
May be deleted in case the ABC is less than One Million Pesos (PhP1,000,000) where the Procuring Entity may not hold a
pre-bid conference.
22
8. All bids must be accompanied by a bid security in any of the acceptable forms and in
the amount stated in ITB Clause 16.
9. Bid opening shall be on February 7, 2024 at 9:00 A.M. Zamboanga Sibugay

Irrigation Management Office, DA-RFOIX Research Division Compound, Sanito, Ipil,
Zamboanga Sibugay and/or through Google Meet, Bids will be opened in the
presence of the bidders’ representatives who choose to attend the activity. Late Bids
shall not be accepted
Bidders authorized representative to this procurement process must present a Special

Power of Attorney (SPA) which shall be good for one (1) specific project by
indicating the name/title of the project.
10. The Minimum Equipment and Manpower requirement will be the following:
Equipment:
Equipment Type Unit Capacity

Bagger Mixer 1 unit 1 Bagger
Survey Instrument 1 set
Testing cylinder (3 cylinder per set) 1 set
Concrete vibrator 1 unit
Welding Machine 1 unit 300A
Dumptruck (6-wheeler) 1 unit 5-6 cu.m
Manpower:
MANPOWER
1 Project Manager
1 Project Engineer
1 Electrical Engineer
1 Materials Laboratory Technician
1 Safety Officer
1 Office Engineer
1 Survey Team
1 Construction Foreman
3 Skilled Workers
1 Driver with NC II

Management Office reserves the right to reject any and all bids, declare a failure of
bidding, or not award the contract at any time prior to contract award in accordance
with Sections 35.6 and 41 of the 2016 revised Implementing Rules and Regulations
(IRR) of RA No. 9184, without thereby incurring any liability to the affected bidder
or bidders.
12. For further information, please refer to:
MARIA GERTRUDES P. GANIA
23
National Irrigation Administration
DA-RFOIX Research Division Compound, Sanito, Ipil, Zamboanga Sibugay
zsimobac2020@yahoo.com/niazamboangasibugaysvisimo@yahoo.com
09488713237
www.region9.nia.gov.ph
13. You may visit the following websites:
For downloading of Bidding Documents: https://notices.philgeps.gov.ph or

https://region9.nia.gov.ph/content/invitation-bid
MARIA GERTRUDES P. GANIA (sgd)

BAC Chairperson
24
Section II. Instructions to Bidders
1. Scope of Bid
The Procuring Entity, National Irrigation Administration – Zamboanga Sibugay Irrigation
Management Office invites Bids for the Infrastructure Project Tungawan PIS CY 2024
(Installation of Distribution Tanks and Pipelines, Construction of Solar Pump Sytem -
Siay, Zamboanga Sibugay with Project Identification Number NIAREG9-01102024-
REPAIRPISCY2024-937.
The Procurement Project (referred to herein as “Project”) is for the construction of_
Installation of Distribution Tanks and Pipelines, Construction of Solar Pump System, as
described in Section VI (Specifications).
2. Funding Information
The GOP through the source of funding as indicated below for REPAIR PIS CY 2024 in the
amount of Php 1,871,145.22
2.1. The source of funding is:
a. GOCC and GFIs, the proposed Corporate Operating Budget.
3. Bidding Requirements
The Bidding for the Project shall be governed by all the provisions of RA No. 9184
and its 2016 revised IRR, including its Generic Procurement Manual and associated
policies, rules and regulations as the primary source thereof, while the herein clauses
shall serve as the secondary source thereof.
Any amendments made to the IRR and other GPPB issuances shall be applicable only
to the ongoing posting, advertisement, or invitation to bid by the BAC through the
issuance of a supplemental or bid bulletin.
The Bidder, by the act of submitting its Bid, shall be deemed to have inspected the
site, determined the general characteristics of the contracted Works and the conditions
for this Project, such as the location and the nature of the work; (b) climatic
conditions; (c) transportation facilities; (c) nature and condition of the terrain,
geological conditions at the site communication facilities, requirements, location and
availability of construction aggregates and other materials, labor, water, electric
power and access roads; and (d) other factors that may affect the cost, duration and
execution or implementation of the contract, project, or work and examine all
instructions, forms, terms, and project requirements in the Bidding Documents.
4. Corrupt, Fraudulent, Collusive, Coercive, and Obstructive Practices
25
The Procuring Entity, as well as the Bidders and Contractors, shall observe the
highest standard of ethics during the procurement and execution of the contract. They
or through an agent shall not engage in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, coercive, and
obstructive practices defined under Annex “I” of the 2016 revised IRR of RA No.
9184 or other integrity violations in competing for the Project.
5. Eligible Bidders
5.1. Only Bids of Bidders found to be legally, technically, and financially capable
will be evaluated.
5.2. The Bidder must have an experience of having completed a Single Largest
Completed Contract (SLCC) that is similar to this Project, equivalent to at
least fifty percent (50%) of the ABC adjusted, if necessary, by the Bidder to
current prices using the PSA’s CPI, except under conditions provided for in
Section 23.4.2.4 of the 2016 revised IRR of RA No. 9184.
A contract is considered to be “similar” to the contract to be bid if it has the

major categories of work stated in the BDS.
5.3. For Foreign-funded Procurement, the Procuring Entity and the foreign
government/foreign or international financing institution may agree on another
track record requirement, as specified in the Bidding Document prepared for
this purpose.
5.4. The Bidders shall comply with the eligibility criteria under Section 23.4.2 of
the 2016 IRR of RA No. 9184.
6. Origin of Associated Goods

There is no restriction on the origin of Goods other than those prohibited by a
decision of the UN Security Council taken under Chapter VII of the Charter of the
UN.
7. Subcontracts
7.1. The Bidder may subcontract portions of the Project to the extent allowed by
the Procuring Entity as stated herein, but in no case more than fifty percent
(50%) of the Project.
The Procuring Entity has prescribed that:
a. Subcontracting is not allowed.
7.1. [If Procuring Entity has determined that subcontracting is allowed during the
bidding , state:] The Bidder must submit together with its Bid the
documentary requirements of the subcontractor(s) complying with the
eligibility criterial stated in ITB Clause 5 in accordance with Section 23.4 of
the 2016 revised IRR of RA No. 9184 pursuant to Section 23.1 thereof.
26
7.2. [If subcontracting is allowed during the contract implementation stage, state:]
The Supplier may identify its subcontractor during the contract
implementation stage. Subcontractors identified during the bidding may be
changed during the implementation of this Contract. Subcontractors must
submit the documentary requirements under Section 23.1 of the 2016 revised
IRR of RA No. 9184 and comply with the eligibility criteria specified in ITB
Clause 5 to the implementing or end-user unit.
7.3. Subcontracting of any portion of the Project does not relieve the Contractor of
any liability or obligation under the Contract. The Supplier will be responsible
for the acts, defaults, and negligence of any subcontractor, its agents, servants,
or workmen as fully as if these were the Contractor’s own acts, defaults, or
negligence, or those of its agents, servants, or workmen.
8. Pre-Bid Conference
The Procuring Entity will hold a pre-bid conference for this Project on the January 25,
2024 at 9:00 AM and either at its physical address National Irrigation Administration
– Zamboanga Sibugay Irrigation Management Office, DA-RFOIX Research Division
Compound, Sanito, Ipil, Zamboanga Sibugay as indicated in paragraph 6 of the IB.
9. Clarification and Amendment of Bidding Documents

Prospective bidders may request for clarification on and/or interpretation of any part
of the Bidding Documents. Such requests must be in writing and received by the
Procuring Entity, either at its given address or through electronic mail indicated in the
IB, at least ten (10) calendar days before the deadline set for the submission and
receipt of Bids.
10. Documents Comprising the Bid: Eligibility and Technical

Components
10.1. The first envelope shall contain the eligibility and technical documents of the
Bid as specified in Section IX. Checklist of Technical and Financial
Documents.
10.2. If the eligibility requirements or statements, the bids, and all other documents
for submission to the BAC are in foreign language other than English, it must
be accompanied by a translation in English, which shall be authenticated by
the appropriate Philippine foreign service establishment, post, or the
equivalent office having jurisdiction over the foreign bidder’s affairs in the
Philippines. For Contracting Parties to the Apostille Convention, only the
translated documents shall be authenticated through an apostille pursuant to
GPPB Resolution No. 13-2019 dated 23 May 2019. The English translation
shall govern, for purposes of interpretation of the bid.
10.3. A valid PCAB License is required, and in case of joint ventures, a valid
special PCAB License, and registration for the type and cost of the contract for
this Project. Any additional type of Contractor license or permit shall be
indicated in the BDS.
27
10.4. A List of Contractor’s key personnel (e.g., Project Manager, Project
Engineers, Materials Engineers, and Foremen) assigned to the contract to be
bid, with their complete qualification and experience data shall be provided.
These key personnel must meet the required minimum years of experience set
in the BDS.
10.5. A List of Contractor’s major equipment units, which are owned, leased, and/or
under purchase agreements, supported by proof of ownership, certification of
availability of equipment from the equipment lessor/vendor for the duration of
the project, as the case may be, must meet the minimum requirements for the
contract set in the BDS.
11. Documents Comprising the Bid: Financial Component

11.1. The second bid envelope shall contain the financial documents for the Bid as
specified in Section IX. Checklist of Technical and Financial Documents.
11.2. Any bid exceeding the ABC indicated in paragraph 1 of the IB shall not be
accepted.
11.3. For Foreign-funded procurement, a ceiling may be applied to bid prices

provided the conditions are met under Section 31.2 of the 2016 revised IRR of
RA No. 9184.
12. Alternative Bids

Bidders shall submit offers that comply with the requirements of the Bidding
Documents, including the basic technical design as indicated in the drawings and
specifications. Unless there is a value engineering clause in the BDS, alternative Bids
shall not be accepted.
13. Bid Prices

All bid prices for the given scope of work in the Project as awarded shall be
considered as fixed prices, and therefore not subject to price escalation during
contract implementation, except under extraordinary circumstances as determined by
the NEDA and approved by the GPPB pursuant to the revised Guidelines for Contract
Price Escalation guidelines.
14. Bid and Payment Currencies

14.1. Bid prices may be quoted in the local currency or tradeable currency accepted
by the BSP at the discretion of the Bidder. However, for purposes of bid
evaluation, Bids denominated in foreign currencies shall be converted to
Philippine currency based on the exchange rate as published in the BSP
reference rate bulletin on the day of the bid opening.
14.2. Payment of the contract price shall be made in:
28
a. Philippine Pesos.
15. Bid Security

15.1. The Bidder shall submit a Bid Securing Declaration or any form of Bid
Security in the amount indicated in the BDS, which shall be not less than the
percentage of the ABC in accordance with the schedule in the BDS.
15.2. The Bid and bid security shall be valid until June 6, 2024. Any bid not
accompanied by an acceptable bid security shall be rejected by the Procuring
Entity as non-responsive.
16. Sealing and Marking of Bids

Each Bidder shall submit one original and two additional copies of the first and
second components of its Bid.
The Procuring Entity may request additional hard copies and/or electronic copies of
the Bid. However, failure of the Bidders to comply with the said request shall not be a
ground for disqualification.
If the Procuring Entity allows the submission of bids through online submission to the
given website or any other electronic means, the Bidder shall submit an electronic
copy of its Bid, which must be digitally signed. An electronic copy that cannot be
opened or is corrupted shall be considered non-responsive and, thus, automatically
disqualified.
17. Deadline for Submission of Bids

The Bidders shall submit on the specified date and time and either at its physical
address or through online submission as indicated in paragraph 7 of the IB.
18. Opening and Preliminary Examination of Bids

18.1. The BAC shall open the Bids in public at the time, on the date, and at the
place specified in paragraph 9 of the IB. The Bidders’ representatives who are
present shall sign a register evidencing their attendance. In case
videoconferencing, webcasting or other similar technologies will be used,
attendance of participants shall likewise be recorded by the BAC Secretariat.
In case the Bids cannot be opened as scheduled due to justifiable reasons, the
rescheduling requirements under Section 29 of the 2016 revised IRR of RA
No. 9184 shall prevail.
18.2. The preliminary examination of Bids shall be governed by Section 30 of the

2016 revised IRR of RA No. 9184.
29
19. Detailed Evaluation and Comparison of Bids
19.1. The Procuring Entity’s BAC shall immediately conduct a detailed evaluation
of all Bids rated “passed” using non-discretionary pass/fail criteria. The BAC
shall consider the conditions in the evaluation of Bids under Section 32.2 of
2016 revised IRR of RA No. 9184.
19.2. If the Project allows partial bids, all Bids and combinations of Bids as
indicated in the BDS shall be received by the same deadline and opened and
evaluated simultaneously so as to determine the Bid or combination of Bids
offering the lowest calculated cost to the Procuring Entity. Bid Security as
required by ITB Clause 16 shall be submitted for each contract (lot)
separately.
19.3. In all cases, the NFCC computation pursuant to Section 23.4.2.6 of the 2016
revised IRR of RA No. 9184 must be sufficient for the total of the ABCs for
all the lots participated in by the prospective Bidder.
20. Post Qualification

Within a non-extendible period of five (5) calendar days from receipt by the Bidder of
the notice from the BAC that it submitted the Lowest Calculated Bid, the Bidder shall
submit its latest income and business tax returns filed and paid through the BIR
Electronic Filing and Payment System (eFPS), and other appropriate licenses and
permits required by law and stated in the BDS.
21. Signing of the Contract

The documents required in Section 37.2 of the 2016 revised IRR of RA No. 9184
shall form part of the Contract. Additional Contract documents are indicated in the
BDS.
30
Section III. Bid Data Sheet
Bid Data Sheet

ITB Clause
5.2 For this purpose, contracts similar to the Project refer to contracts which have the same major
categories of work, which shall be at least 50% (fifty percent):
Construction of Solar Pump System

7.1 The Funding Source is:
The Government of the Philippines (GoP) through REPAIR PIS CY 2024 in the amount of Php
1,871,072.75
Infrastructure – Tungawan PIS CY 2024 Tungawan, Zamboanga Sibugay
a.) Identification Number of the Contract is NIAREG9-01102024-REPAIRPISCY2024-937
10.3 [Specify if another Contractor license or permit is required. ]
10.4 The key personnel must meet the required minimum years of experience set below:
Manpower General Experience Years of Experience
1 Project Manager General Construction 2 to 3 Year
Construction of Canalization and Canal

1 Project Engineer (Licensed Civil Engineer) Structures
2 to 3 Year
1 Electrical Engineer Electrical Works 2 to 3 Year
Sampling Testing of Construction

1 Materials Laboratory Technician 2 to 3 Year
Materials
Safety Officer with Construction
1 Occupational Safety and Health Construction Safety 2 to 3 Year
Certificate
1 Office Engineer Graduate of Civil Engineering 1 year
1 Survey Team Construction Survey 1 year
Construction of Canalization and Canal

1 Construction Foreman 2 to 3 Year
Structures
3 Skilled Workers General Construction 1 Year
1 Drivers with NC II Hauling and Dumping 2 to 3 Year
10.5 The minimum major equipment requirements are the following:

Equipment Type Unit Capacity
Bagger Mixer unit 1 bagger
Survey Instrument 1 set
Testing cylinder (3 cylinder per set) 3 sets
Concrete vibrator 1 unit 5-6 cu.m
Welding Machine 1 unit 300A
Dumptruck (6-wheeler) 1 unit
31
15.1 The bid security shall be in the form of a Bid Securing Declaration or any of the following
forms and amounts:
a. The amount of not less than Php 37,421.46 (2%) of ABC, if bid security is in cash,
cashier’s/manager’s check, bank draft/guarantee or irrevocable letter of credit;
b. The amount of not less than Php 93,553.64 (5%) of ABC if bid security is in Surety
Bond.
19.2 ITEM
DESCRIPTION
QUANTIT
UNIT
NO. Y
Delivery and Installation of Distribution Tanks and Pipelines,

I. l.s
Construction of Pump House and Solar PV House 1.00

III PIPELINES
a Common Excavation 241.70 cu.m
b Common Backfill 276.80 cu.m
c Miscellaneous Pipes & Materials
c.1 2” Ø HDPE (SDR 17) w/ accessories: 12pcs of 30 °
elbow @50.8 mm nominal diameter & 8 pcs of 45°
elbow @ 50.80 mm nominal diameter 340.00 mtrs.
IV. DISTRIBUTION TANK
a Concrete
a.1. 3000 Psi Plain Concrete 1.40 cu.m
b Reinforcing Steel Bars 89.60 Kgs.
c Stainless Steel Tank
c.1. 2000 liters Stainless Steel Tank 2 .00 units
Length
c.2. 1 ½” ø G.I. Pipe 2.00 s
c.3. 1 ½” ø G.I. 90° Elbow 16.00 Pcs

V. PUMP HOUSE
A Structure Excavation (Manual) 10.00 cu.m
B Structure Backfill (Manual) 4.80 cu.m
C Gravel Blanket
c.1. Gravel Bedding 6.20 cu.m
d Concrete
e. Masonry Works
e.1 4” Concrete Hollow Blocks 29.60 sq.m.
e.2 Mortar & Plastering 74.70 sq.m
f Roofing and Metal Works 1 l.s
g Doors and Windows 1 l.s
32
h Reinforcing Steel Bars 1,068.20 kgs
VI Solar PV House
a Structure Excavation (Manual) 7.80 cu.m
b Structure Backfill (Manual) 4.80 cu.m
c Gravel Blanket
d Concrete
e Masonry Works
f Roofing and Metal Works 1 ls
g Reinforcing Steel Bars 426.50 kgs.
a. Structure Excavation (Manual) 0.50 cu.m
c. Gravel Blanket
d. Concrete
e Masonry
f. Reinforcing Steel Bars 85.40 kgs.
Solar Panel (300-watts) (including delivery and
g installation) 6.00 unit
h Submersible Pump 5hp-3 phase 1.00 unit
Solar Panel Mounting Accessories (including
i installation) 6.00 unit
j. 4” Ø GI Pipe 18.00 mtrs.
TOTAL 1,871,072.75
20 Environmental Compliance Certificate, Certification that the project site is not within a
geohazard zone and other licenses and permits relevant to the Project and the corresponding
law as required.
21 Additional contract documents relevant to the Project that may be required by existing laws
and/or the Procuring Entity, such as construction schedule and S-curve, manpower
schedule, construction methods, equipment utilization schedule, construction safety and
health program approved by the DOLE, and other acceptable tools of project
scheduling.
33
Section IV. General Conditions of Contract
1. Scope of Contract
This Contract shall include all such items, although not specifically mentioned, that
can be reasonably inferred as being required for its completion as if such items were
expressly mentioned herein. All the provisions of RA No. 9184 and its 2016 revised
IRR, including the Generic Procurement Manual, and associated issuances, constitute
the primary source for the terms and conditions of the Contract, and thus, applicable
in contract implementation. Herein clauses shall serve as the secondary source for
the terms and conditions of the Contract.
This is without prejudice to Sections 74.1 and 74.2 of the 2016 revised IRR of RA
No. 9184 allowing the GPPB to amend the IRR, which shall be applied to all
procurement activities, the advertisement, posting, or invitation of which were issued
after the effectivity of the said amendment.
2. Sectional Completion of Works

If sectional completion is specified in the Special Conditions of Contract (SCC),
references in the Conditions of Contract to the Works, the Completion Date, and the
Intended Completion Date shall apply to any Section of the Works (other than
references to the Completion Date and Intended Completion Date for the whole of the
Works).
3. Possession of Site
4.1. The Procuring Entity shall give possession of all or parts of the Site to the
Contractor based on the schedule of delivery indicated in the SCC, which
corresponds to the execution of the Works. If the Contractor suffers delay or
incurs cost from failure on the part of the Procuring Entity to give possession
in accordance with the terms of this clause, the Procuring Entity’s
Representative shall give the Contractor a Contract Time Extension and certify
such sum as fair to cover the cost incurred, which sum shall be paid by
Procuring Entity.
4.2. If possession of a portion is not given by the above date, the Procuring Entity
will be deemed to have delayed the start of the relevant activities. The
resulting adjustments in contract time to address such delay may be addressed
through contract extension provided under Annex “E” of the 2016 revised IRR
of RA No. 9184.
4. The Contractor’s Obligations

The Contractor shall employ the key personnel named in the Schedule of Key
Personnel indicating their designation, in accordance with ITB Clause 10.3 and
specified in the BDS, to carry out the supervision of the Works.
34
The Procuring Entity will approve any proposed replacement of key personnel only if
their relevant qualifications and abilities are equal to or better than those of the
personnel listed in the Schedule.
5. Performance Security
5.1. Within ten (10) calendar days from receipt of the Notice of Award from the
Procuring Entity but in no case later than the signing of the contract by both
parties, the successful Bidder shall furnish the performance security in any of
the forms prescribed in Section 39 of the 2016 revised IRR.
5.2. The Contractor, by entering into the Contract with the Procuring Entity,
acknowledges the right of the Procuring Entity to institute action pursuant to
RA No. 3688 against any subcontractor be they an individual, firm,
partnership, corporation, or association supplying the Contractor with labor,
materials and/or equipment for the performance of this Contract.
6. Site Investigation Reports

The Contractor, in preparing the Bid, shall rely on any Site Investigation Reports
referred to in the SCC supplemented by any information obtained by the Contractor.
7. Warranty
7.1. In case the Contractor fails to undertake the repair works under Section 62.2.2
of the 2016 revised IRR, the Procuring Entity shall forfeit its performance
security, subject its property(ies) to attachment or garnishment proceedings,
and perpetually disqualify it from participating in any public bidding. All
payables of the GOP in his favor shall be offset to recover the costs.
7.2. The warranty against Structural Defects/Failures, except that occasioned-on

force majeure, shall cover the period from the date of issuance of the
Certificate of Final Acceptance by the Procuring Entity. Specific duration of
the warranty is found in the SCC.
8. Liability of the Contractor

Subject to additional provisions, if any, set forth in the SCC, the Contractor’s liability
under this Contract shall be as provided by the laws of the Republic of the
Philippines.
If the Contractor is a joint venture, all partners to the joint venture shall be jointly and
severally liable to the Procuring Entity.
9. Termination for Other Causes

Contract termination shall be initiated in case it is determined prima facie by the
Procuring Entity that the Contractor has engaged, before, or during the
implementation of the contract, in unlawful deeds and behaviors relative to contract
acquisition and implementation, such as, but not limited to corrupt, fraudulent,
collusive, coercive, and obstructive practices as stated in ITB Clause 4.
35
10. Dayworks
Subject to the guidelines on Variation Order in Annex “E” of the 2016 revised IRR of
RA No. 9184, and if applicable as indicated in the SCC, the Dayworks rates in the
Contractor’s Bid shall be used for small additional amounts of work only when the
Procuring Entity’s Representative has given written instructions in advance for
additional work to be paid for in that way.
11. Program of Work

11.1. The Contractor shall submit to the Procuring Entity’s Representative for
approval the said Program of Work showing the general methods,
arrangements, order, and timing for all the activities in the Works. The
submissions of the Program of Work are indicated in the SCC.
11.2. The Contractor shall submit to the Procuring Entity’s Representative for
approval an updated Program of Work at intervals no longer than the period
stated in the SCC. If the Contractor does not submit an updated Program of
Work within this period, the Procuring Entity’s Representative may withhold
the amount stated in the SCC from the next payment certificate and continue
to withhold this amount until the next payment after the date on which the
overdue Program of Work has been submitted.
12. Instructions, Inspections and Audits

The Contractor shall permit the GOP or the Procuring Entity to inspect the
Contractor’s accounts and records relating to the performance of the Contractor and to
have them audited by auditors of the GOP or the Procuring Entity, as may be
required.
13. Advance Payment

The Procuring Entity shall, upon a written request of the Contractor which shall be
submitted as a Contract document, make an advance payment to the Contractor in an
amount not exceeding fifteen percent (15%) of the total contract price, to be made in
lump sum, or at the most two installments according to a schedule specified in the
SCC, subject to the requirements in Annex “E” of the 2016 revised IRR of RA No.
9184.
14. Progress Payments

The Contractor may submit a request for payment for Work accomplished. Such
requests for payment shall be verified and certified by the Procuring Entity’s
Representative/Project Engineer. Except as otherwise stipulated in the SCC,
materials and equipment delivered on the site but not completely put in place shall not
be included for payment.
15. Operating and Maintenance Manuals

36
15.1. If required, the Contractor will provide “as built” Drawings and/or operating
and maintenance manuals as specified in the SCC.
15.2. If the Contractor does not provide the Drawings and/or manuals by the dates
stated above, or they do not receive the Procuring Entity’s Representative’s
approval, the Procuring Entity’s Representative may withhold the amount
stated in the SCC from payments due to the Contractor.
37
Section V. Special Conditions of Contract
38
Special Conditions of Contract
GCC Clause
2 The Intended Completion Date is ________________________.
NOTE: The contract duration shall be reckoned from the start date and
not from contract effectivity date.
4.1 The Procuring Entity is NIA-Zamboanga Sibugay Irrigation
Management Office.
6 The site investigation reports are: [list here the required site investigation
reports.]
7.2
[In case of permanent structures, such as buildings of types 4 and 5 as
classified under the National Building Code of the Philippines and other
structures made of steel, iron, or concrete which comply with relevant
structural codes (e.g., DPWH Standard Specifications), such as, but not
limited to, steel/concrete bridges, flyovers, aircraft movement areas,
ports, dams, tunnels, filtration and treatment plants, sewerage systems,
power plants, transmission and communication towers, railway system,
and other similar permanent structures:] Fifteen (15) years.
10
Dayworks are applicable at the rate shown in the Contractor’s original
Bid.
11.1 The Contractor shall submit the Program of Work to the Procuring
Entity’s Representative within _________________ days of delivery of
the Notice of Award.
11.2 The amount to be withheld for late submission of an updated Program of
Work is _____________
13 The amount of the advance payment is [insert amount as percentage of
the contract price that shall not exceed 15% of the total contract price
and schedule of payment].
14 [If allowed by the Procuring Entity, state:] Materials and equipment
delivered on the site but not completely put in place shall be included for
payment.
15.1 The date by which operating and maintenance manuals are required is
________________
The date by which “as built” drawings are required is

___________________
15.2 The amount to be withheld for failing to produce “as built” drawings
and/or operating and maintenance manuals by the date required is
_____________________________
39
Section VI. Specifications
40
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION I. TEMPORARY WORKS, CONSTRUCTION PLANT, MOBILIZATION

OF CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT AND DEMOBILIZATION WORK .......79
SECTION II. CLEARING AND GRUBBING ...................................................................45
SECTION III. DIVERSION AND CARE OF RIVER DURING CONSTRUCTION AND
UNWATERING FOUNDATION ............................................................................46
SECTION IV. CANAL EXCAVATION .............................................................................48
SECTION V. CHANNEL EXCAVATION ........................................................................52
SECTION VI. STRUCTURE EXCAVATION ..................................................................53
SECTION VII. DRILLING AND GROUTING .................................................................56
SECTION VIII. FARM AND DRAINAGE DITCH CONSTRUCTION ........................68
SECTION IX. OVERHAUL................................................................................................ 70
SECTION X. SIDE BORROW ............................................................................................72
SECTION XI. BORROW HAUL ........................................................................................73
SECTION XII. STRUCTURE BACKFILL .......................................................................74
SECTION XIII. EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION AND COMPACTION ..............75
SECTION XIV. R O A D S ...................................................................................................78
SECTION XV. CONCRETE ...............................................................................................80
SECTION XVI. CONCRETE DEMOLITION WORK.................................................. 107
SECTION XVII. CONCRETE STRUCTURES ..............................................................108
SECTION XVIII. SHOTCRETE ......................................................................................111
SECTION XIX. RUBBLE MASONRY ............................................................................116
SECTION XX. CONCRETE CANAL LINING ..............................................................117
SECTION XXI. CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT MATERIALS .............................118
SECTION XXII. DOWELS ...............................................................................................123
SECTION XXIII. REINFORCING STEEL BARS .........................................................124
SECTION XXIV. REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPES .................................................128
SECTION XXV. BOULDER RIPRAP .............................................................................131
SECTION XXVI. GABION-TYPE RIPRAP ...................................................................132
SECTION XXVII. GROUTED RIPRAP .........................................................................133
SECTION XXVIII. GRAVEL BLANKET .......................................................................134
SECTION XXIX. FILTER DRAIN ..................................................................................135
SECTION XXX. PLAIN CONCRETE DRAIN PIPES ...................................................137
SECTION XXXI. REINFORCED CONCRETE PILES ................................................138
41
SECTION XXXII. STEEL SHEET PILES ......................................................................141
SECTION XXXIII. STEEL GATES AND LIFTING MECHANISM ...........................142
SECTION XXXIV. STEEL PIPE MANHOLE, BLOW-OFF VALVE AND MANHOLE
COVER ....................................................................................................................164
SECTION XXXV. MISCELLANEOUS METALWORKS AND MATERIALS .........168
SECTION XXXVI. PAINTING METALWORK 174
SECTION XXXVII. ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACING - PLANT MIX ..............181
SECTION XXXVIII. PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE ......................................................194
SECTION XXXIX. GATE VALVE AND BUTTERFLY VALVE ................................ 195
SECTION XL. SODDING .................................................................................................197
SECTION XLI. MASONRY WORKS .............................................................................198
42
SECTION I. TEMPORARY WORKS, CONSTRUCTION PLANT, CONSTRUCTION
& INSTALLATION OF PROJECT BILLBOARD,
MOBILIZATION OF CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT AND
DEMOBILIZATION
101. SCOPE
(a) Temporary Works

The Contractor shall furnish all materials, labor, equipment, tools and install such
temporary works as are necessary for the successful completion of the Contract Work. The
Contractor shall negotiate the site for his construction camp, office and work areas.
These temporary works and construction plant shall include but will not be limited to
the following:
1) Construction camp for housing, feeding and accommodating of all the Contractor's
employees. The Contractor shall also, within close proximity of his camp, provide an office
and sleeping quarter for NIA employees, complete with facilities (specified in item 2 below)
and shall have a minimum floor area of 80 square meters.
2) Facilities such as potable water, drainage, lighting, sewage, disposal, sanitation,
first aid and fire protection facilities.
3) Workshops, warehouses, site offices, stockpile areas, storage areas for materials,
equipment, spare parts, fuel and oil.
4) All other temporary facilities not specifically listed but nevertheless required for
the proper functioning of the camp set-up and construction activities.
Temporary works shall conform to all government standards and codes and shall meet
the sanitary requirements of the Department of Health.
Contractor shall submit to the Assistant Administrator for Project Development and
Implementation for approval layout drawings, program of erection and specifications for the
Temporary Works within 30 calendar days following the date of receipt of the Notice to
Proceed. No construction or erection of Temporary Works shall be started without the
approved layout drawings, program of erections & specifications.
(b) Mobilization of Equipment
The Contractor shall mobilize and move into the Project Temp. Works, Const. Plant,
Mob. of Const. Equip. and Demobilization Work Site within 20 calendar days after receipt of
Notice to Proceed the required initial equipment requirement as listed under Item 7 of
Appendix I, Volume II of the Bid Documents.
Notwithstanding the mobilization of the initial equipment requirements, the
Contractor shall mobilize to the Site the additional equipment requirement within 20 calendar
days upon receipt of the approved Equipment Moving-in and Utilization Schedule.
If for the reasons or causes other than "major calamities", the Contractor fails to
mobilize fully the initial equipment required within said period, and all other equipment listed
in his approved Equipment Moving-in and Utilization Schedule, at the discretion of the
Administrator, he may be given an extension of time to mobilize them fully but in no case
shall it exceed 30 calendar days. Failure to fully mobilize the required construction
equipment within said period will be a ground for contract rescission. During said extension
43
period liquidated damages equivalent to the daily operated ACEL rental rate of eight hours of
the undelivered equipment per day of delay shall be imposed and collectible from any
subsequent payment due the Contractor. If delays are caused by "major calamities', the
corresponding number of calendar days caused by such calamities will not be counted.
Delays shall be reckoned starting at 12:00 o'clock noon of the succeeding day after the date
scheduled for the mobilization of the programmed equipment. The Engineer shall certify to
the date of actual mobilization of the programmed equipment to the site.
The Engineer shall check and verify the number, type and actual condition of the
equipment moved into the Project Site. The NIA reserves the right to order the removal of
such equipment that are not in good working condition from the Project Site at the
Contractor's expense and said equipment are not to be counted for as mobilized.
Construction equipment once moved into the Project Site, checked and accounted for
by the Engineer shall not be permitted, prior to the completion of the Contract Work, to be
moved out or transferred by the Contractor to another Project Site without the written
approval of the Engineer. Periodic check-up of the Contractor's equipment moved-in for the
Contract Work shall be conducted by NIA. The Contractor will pay to NIA the amount
equivalent to the ACEL Rental Rate of any equipment not accounted for during said check-up
for the number of calendar days the equipment have been removed (without the written
consent of the Engineer) from the Project Site until said equipment have been returned. Such
cases are grounds for disapproval of claims by the Contractor for time extensions.
(c) Demobilization
Demobilization shall include dismantling and removal from the site of Contractor's
Construction Plant, materials and equipment and all Temporary Facilities with the exception
of some facilities which NIA shall consider to remain and which shall be handed over to NIA
at the time of demobilization in a fully operational condition. Demobilization shall also
include clean up of the site after completion of the Contract
Work as approved and accepted by NIA and transportation of Contractor's employees from
the site.
102. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment for furnishing of all materials, equipment and labor for the temporary works,
mobilization of construction equipment including demobilization work, shall be made at the
fixed lump sum price or lump sum bid price whichever is stated in the Bill of Quantities
which shall not be subject to price escalation and adjustment, in accordance with the
following:
1. Twenty percent (20%) of the lump sum price will be paid upon complete
mobilization of the initial equipment requirement and submission of certificate of
joint inspection conducted by Central Office and Field Office personnel.
2. Ten percent (10%) of the lump sum price will be paid upon submittal and
approval by the NIA of the Contractor's plan for the temporary works including
list of equipment requirement based on his work schedule as approved by NIA.
3. Twenty percent (20%) of the lump sum price will be paid upon completion of the
Contractor's temporary Works.
4. Thirty percent (30%) of the lump sum price will be paid upon completion of
moving-in of all the construction equipment approved under Equipment Moving-
44
in and Utilization Schedule, duly certified by the Engineer, Project Auditor or
their duly authorized representatives. Partial payment of this 30% may be given
on a pro-rata basis after fifty percent (50%) of the approved equipment has been
moved-in to the Project Site.
For purposes of computing the percentage of equipment moved-in,
corresponding number of points for each equipment listed in the Equipment
Moving-In Utilization Schedule shall be provided by NIA to serve as the basis
for any partial payment.
5.
The remaining twenty percent (20%) of the lump sum price will be paid to the
Contractor upon final acceptance of the Contract Work.
SECTION II. CLEARING AND GRUBBING
201. SCOPE
The work under this Section shall include clearing, grubbing and disposal, in a
manner approved by the Engineer of all vegetation such as trees, stumps, roots, brush;
rubbish and all objectionable matters within the entire right-of-way for canals,
farmditches, drainage ditches,
diversion work and over borrow areas, road surfacing materials sources, stockpile areas and
elsewhere mutually agreed upon by the Engineer and the Contractor all in accordance with
the Drawings and these Specifications.
202. METHOD OF CONSTRUCTIONS
(a) Clearing on Lightly Vegetated Areas

The areas over which diversion works shall be constructed, the entire right-of-way for
canals, farmditches and drainage ditches, side borrow areas, borrow haul areas, aggregate
sources and stockpile areas shall be cleared of all vegetation, trees and all other matters,
except such trees or shrubs which the Engineer may order to be preserved. All trees and
shrubs ordered to be preserved including all existing adjacent facilities, properties and
utilities, if any, shall be protected from injury or damage resulting from the Contractor's
operations. All combustible materials from clearing operations shall be burned thoroughly or
removed from the site of work or otherwise disposed to designated areas as directed by the
Engineer.
All materials to be burned shall be piled neatly and when in a suitable condition shall
be burned thoroughly. Piling for burning shall be done in such a manner and in such locations
as to cause the least fire risk. The Contractor shall at all times take special precautions to
prevent fire from spreading and shall have available at all times suitable equipment and
supplies for use in preventing and fighting fires. In this connection, the Contractor shall be
liable for all costs and damages resulting from such incidents.
No clearing shall be done on any areas where there are standing crops until such crops
have been harvested or unless the Contractor shall have secured written permission from
NIA.
(b) Clearing on Swampy Areas and/or Second Growth Forested Areas
Clearing on swampy areas and/or second growth forested areas where canals are
passing thru shall only be started when said areas are suitably dry or when directed by the
45
Engineer. Clearing includes felling and bucking of trees using chain saws and cutting of tree
branches extending over the entire right-of-way. Felled trees shall be cut into the longest
usable lengths and shall be hauled and neatly stocked at designated stockpile areas. Small
trees and stumps, branches, grass and litters shall be burned in accordance with the preceding
paragraph (a).
(c) Grubbing
Grubbing shall consist of the removal of all trees, stumps, roots, brush and rubbish
from the above mentioned work areas. No roots shall be left within 50 cm. from the ground
surface. It shall include necessary stripping of the natural ground surface to a depth not more
than 10 centimeters by effective means to remove all objectionable materials or organic
matters from the said work areas, except for damsite where stripping shall be in accordance
with sub-section 403(b) of Section IV of these Technical Specifications. Stripping beyond the
limit of 10 centimeters shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and payment thereof
shall be considered included under Section IV, Canal Excavation.
If required by the Engineer, stripped top soil shall be temporarily stored at the edges
of the right-of-way for subsequent use on slopes to encourage vegetative growth and
minimize erosion.
203. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
The area to be measured for payment shall be within the limit of the entire right-of-
way as shown on the Drawings or as staked by the Engineer during Construction Operations.
All clearing and grubbing operations for side borrow areas, borrow haul areas,
aggregate sources, stockpile areas and elsewhere are considered subsidiary works required for
other pay items in the Bill of Quantities and will not be measured for payment under this
Section. The costs of such works shall be considered included in the contract unit price for
the various items in the Bill of Quantities where clearing and grubbing are required.
The cleared and grubbed areas measured as provided above shall be paid at the contract unit
price per square meter in the Bill of Quantities which price and payment shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing all labor, tools, equipment, supplies and all incidentals or
subsidiary works (including stripping within the 10 centimeters limit) necessary for the
successful completion of the work. No payment shall be made on cleared and grubbed areas
where no excavation or embankment construction have been undertaken.
SECTION III. DIVERSION AND CARE OF RIVER DURING CONSTRUCTION

AND UNWATERING FOUNDATION
301. GENERAL
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the successful diversion and care of the
river and dewatering of all excavations, foundations and elsewhere as required to undertake
construction works in the dry.
46
The Contractor shall construct and maintain all necessary cofferdams, channels,
flumes, drains and sumps and/or temporary diversion and protective works during
construction operations. The Contractor shall furnish, install, maintain and operate all
necessary pumping and other equipment for the diversion and care of river and the removal
of water from excavations, foundations and the various parts of the works as required for
construction. After having served their purpose, all cofferdams or other protective works,
unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, shall be removed or leveled to give a sightly
appearance and so as not to interfere in any way with the operation of the Project.
If materials removed from "structure excavation" are used by the Contractor for the
construction of cofferdams and other temporary protective works and are washed out and
carried away by floods, or rendered unsuitable for "structure backfill" by virtue of such use
by the Contractor, these materials shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own
expenditures.
302. METHOD OF CONSTRUCTION
a) Diversion and Care of River

The Contractor shall submit to NIA for approval any amendment to his proposed
schemes for handling the river during construction within 30 calendar days after the date of
receipt of the Notice to Proceed.
The arrangement of the cofferdams and the materials used for their construction, the
height of these structures, and the decision for scheduling diversion and care of the river shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor. However, the location of the cofferdams, the materials
used in these structures and the procedure of placing and compacting the fill materials shall
be subject to the approval of the NIA. If steel sheet piles are necessary in the construction of
the cofferdams, same shall be furnished and installed or driven by the Contractor and all
expenses incurred thereof shall be considered included in the fixed lump sum price or lump
sum bid price whichever is stated in the Bill of Quantities for the Diversion & Care of River
during construction and unwatering foundation.
The Contractor's method of dewatering excavations and foundations shall be subject
to the approval of the NIA. Where foundation excavation extend below the water table in
common materials, the portion below the water table shall be dewatered in advance of
excavation. The dewatering shall be accomplished in a manner that will maintain stability of
the excavated slopes and bottom of the excavation and will result in all construction
operations being performed in the dry. The Contractor will also be required to control
seepage along the bottom of the excavation.
The cost of furnishing all labor, equipment and materials for construction of
cofferdams, dikes, channels, flumes, sumps and other diversion and protective works, where
required; maintaining the work free from water as required or removal of water from
excavations and foundations; disposing of materials in cofferdams; and all other works
required by this Section shall be included in the fixed lump sum price or lump sum bid price
whichever is stated in the Bill of Quantities for the Diversion and Care of River during
Construction and Unwatering Foundation. These items of work are not subject to price
adjustment due to variation in quantities.
47
In order to have a working basis for making progress payments, the Contractor shall
submit a detailed drawings of their proposed cofferdams covering several stages
corresponding to the number of dry season period to enable computation of cofferdam fill
volume. Payment for the construction of cofferdams for a certain stage can be made to the
Contractor on a pro-rata basis using the cofferdam fill volume for that particular stage as
proportioned against the total cofferdam fill volume for all stages and shall further be made
on the following basis:
1. Fifty percent (50%) of the corresponding lump sum price will be paid after
completion of the cofferdamming work.
2. Thirty percent (30%) of the corresponding lump sum price will be paid for
maintenance after all works within the said enclosing cofferdam have been
satisfactorily completed.
3. The remaining twenty percent (20%) of the corresponding lump sum price will
be paid after the removal of all cofferdams and/or temporary diversion and
protection works and corresponding clean-up operations shall have been
satisfactorily undertaken by the Contractor.
All dewatering in excavations and foundations for structures along canals other than
bridges and siphons which may pass across rivers are considered subsidiary works for the
construction of said canal structures and will not be included for payment under this Section.
The cost of such work shall be considered included under Section VI, Structure Excavation,
in the Bill of Quantities.
SECTION IV. CANAL EXCAVATION
401. SCOPE
The work under this Section shall consist of excavating and removal of all classes of
materials in canal prism including placing into canal embankments with excavated suitable
materials, stockpiling of excavated materials suitable for embankment and backfilling, and
trimming of side slopes inside canal prism and canal beds except on portion of the canal
where concrete lining is required (trimming of the foundation bed will be considered included
under Section XX, Concrete Canal Lining) all in accordance with the Drawings and these
Specifications or as directed by the Engineer.
All excavations shall be true to lines, grades, slopes and profiles shown on the
Drawings or as required by the Engineer.
402. CLASSIFICATION
All excavated materials under this Section will be classified as follows:

1. Rock Excavation - For purposes of classification of excavation, rock is defined as
sound and solid masses or formation, layers or ledges of mineral matter in place of such
hardness and texture that:
a) Cannot be effectively loosened or broken down by ripping in a single pass
with a latest model tractor mounted hydraulic ripper equipped with one
48
digging point of standard manufacturer's design adequately sized for use with
and propelled by a crawler-type tractor above 300 HP.
b) In the areas where it is impracticable to classify the use of the ripper described
above, rock is defined as sound and solid material of such hardness and texture
which cannot be loosened or broken by a 2.72 kg. (6 pound) drifting pick.
c) Can only be loosened or broken by a special equipment such as jack hammer
and pencil hammer attached to an excavator
All formation of materials as defined above whose volume is one (1) cubic meter or
more will be classified as rock.
2. Common Excavation - Excavation of any materials and boulders (whose volume
is less than one cubic meter) that can be ripped to be loosened by, a dozer of equal or below
180 HP capacity.
3. Hard Excavation - Excavation of any materials and boulders (whose volume is at
least one cubic meter) that can only be ripped to be loosened by a dozer of above 180 HP to
300 HP.
403. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
(a) Explosives and Blasting

1) Explosives
Caps or other exploders or fuses shall in no case be stored in the same place
in which dynamite or other explosives are stored, transported or kept. The location
and design of powder magazines, the methods of transporting explosives and the
precautions taken to prevent accidents shall be in accordance with the provisions of
all laws, orders, regulations and decrees that are in force in the Philippines or may
be issued from time to time by the Government.
The Contractor shall maintain an inventory for storage and withdrawal of
powder stocks and detonators. The NIA shall be notified immediately of any loss
or theft of explosives. The Contractor shall provide such reasonable and adequate
protective subversive action or sabotage to any property. Only reliable personnel
shall be permitted to store and handle explosives.
Explosives, if used, shall be of such quantity and power and shall be used in
such locations so as to minimize opening of seams and disturbing of material
outside the prescribed limits of excavation. As excavation approaches its final
limits, the depth of holes for blasting and the quantity of explosives used for each
hole shall be reduced so that the underlying or adjacent material will not be
disturbed or shattered. Whenever further blasting might injure the surface of the
final excavation, as determined by the Engineer, the use of explosives shall be
discontinued.
The cost of furnishing, hauling, storing and handling all explosives shall be
included in the contract unit price of the work for which they are required.
2) Blasting
Blasting will be permitted only when proper precautions are taken for the
protection of persons, the works, and public or private property. The Contractor
shall satisfactorily cover all shots in deep cut excavations and shall take extra
49
precautions on all blasting work as maybe required by the NIA. The Contractor
shall blast to the extent necessary and in such a manner that the excavation will not
be unduly large or irregular, nor unduly disturb the ground and make it unstable,
nor shatter the rock, if encountered, upon or against which concrete is to be placed,
nor injure concrete already placed or existing structures at the site or in the vicinity
thereof. Whenever, in NIA's opinion, the Contractor's operations are liable to result
in unduly large excavations or unstable ground, as to injure the rock, concrete or
structures, the Contractor shall drill shorter holes and use lighter charges. Approval
by the NIA of any of the Contractor's blasting operations shall not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibility under this paragraph.
The Contractor shall submit his drilling and blasting operations for approval
of the Engineer before commencing with his blasting works. No blasting operations
shall be undertaken without the approval of the Engineer.
When concrete is to be placed upon or against rock, the excavation shall be
of sufficient depth to provide for the minimum thickness of concrete at all points
and any deviation from the required minimum thickness of concrete shall be
avoided as much as possible. The surface on which concrete will be laid shall be
trimmed and thoroughly cleaned as directed by the Engineer.
When excavation of rock materials reaches the surface upon or against
which concrete is to be placed, blasting shall be stopped and the remaining mass of
rock shall be carefully removed by means of jack-hammer or any appropriate hand
tool. The point beyond which blasting will not be allowed shall be determined by
the Engineer. All damages to the rock foundation caused by improper blasting
operation shall be repaired by the Contractor at his own expense in a manner
acceptable to the Engineer.
(b) Sections and Slopes
Excavation sections, profiles and slopes shall be cut true and straight in conformity
with the lines and grades shown on the Drawings within the following tolerances, measured
normal to the excavated surfaces:
Item Tolerances
1. Side slopes above minimum elevation of + 30 cms.

operating roads
2. Profile of operating roads, access roads + 9 cms

and protection dike
3. Profile of invert of canals + 3 cms
50
4. Side slopes inside canal prism for. canals + 15 cms
and laterals
5. Side slopes outside canal prism for canals + 15 cms

and laterals
The extreme of the above tolerances shall not be continuous over a distance of 40
meters measured at any place, in any direction, parallel to the excavated surface.
(c) Excavation Beyond Established Lines
Precautions shall be taken to preserve, in an undisturbed condition, materials beyond
the designated limits of excavations as shown on the Drawings except unsuitable materials
ordered removed by the Engineer. Materials loosened beyond the excavation limits as a result
of excavation operations shall be considered defective work and shall be compacted or
removed and replaced with compacted embankment at the Contractor's expense, as directed
by the Engineer.
Canal excavation shall include all excavation works in the canal prism whether
common, indurated or rock materials, except additional excavations at structure sites which is
specified to be done and measured for payment under excavation for structure.
The Contractor shall only excavate after the area of operation is acceptably cleared
and grubbed in accordance with Section II, "Clearing and Grubbing". Excavation of all canals
shall be in accordance with the cross section, lines and grades shown on the Drawings. On
portion of the canal where concrete lining is required, canal excavation shall not extend
beyond the neat lines of the underside face of the canal lining as shown on the Drawings. The
Contractor must exercise care not to extend his excavation beyond the limits called for in the
Drawings. Excavation operations shall be such that all materials suitable for embankment or
back filling and filling shall be separated from objectionable materials which are to be
wasted. All surfaces from excavation shall be trimmed to the required slopes and grades
within the specified tolerances under paragraph 403 (b). Blasting if permitted by the NIA,
shall be in accordance with paragraph 403 (a), "Explosives and Blasting".
In sections of deep cut in which the canal section is continuous with the roadway
section and its side slopes, excavation for roadway shall be included under this Section. If
slides occur on excavated slopes or if run-off flows deposit additional materials in
excavations before acceptance of the works, the removal of said slides and/or deposits shall
be at the expense of the Contractor.
Large canals like main canals should preferably be excavated with the use of
motorized scrapers, excavating in successive layers of about 30 centimeters followed
subsequently by trimming of the side slopes using a Grader. Medium sized canals like laterals
should preferably be excavated by initially using a D-6 or D-7 Bulldozer for the upper layers
and then excavating the bottom layers and side slopes with the use of a Backhoe. Should the
Contractor proposes to do excavation works by some other means, prior approval of the
Engineer must be secured.
405. FINISHING CANAL AND ROADWAYS
51
Upon completion of all construction operations, the canal section, including slopes of
canal embankments, and roadway embankments, shall be finished as specified and shown on
the Drawings. Canal beds, canal embankments and side slopes shall be trimmed and shaped
to the finished cross-section to produce smooth surfaces and slopes, and uniform cross-
sections.
Stockpiling of materials on finished canal sections, roadways and embankments shall
not be permitted. All finished works and surfaces shall be cleaned of all dirt and foreign
materials.
The Contractor shall also be required to clear the entire right-of-way and areas outside
the limits of the right-of-way for all excess of objectionable materials, if such excess or
objectionable materials are the result of the Contractor's operation as determined by the
Engineer.
All weeds and other objectionable growth, roots, excess earth, debris, loosened rock
larger than 7.5 centimeters shall be removed and disposed off in approved sites outside the
right-of-way as specified or directed by the Engineer.
The entire canal sections including roadways, side slopes and structure approaches
shall be left in a neat and presentable condition.
Canal Excavation will be measured for every cubic meter of material excavated from
the canal prism. Measurement shall be made in its original position after undertaking clearing
and grubbing including stripping operations and computed by the Average-End Area method
for every 20-meter section of finished canal within the paylines or neat lines shown on the
Drawings, acceptably excavated and formed into embankments or used for structure backfill,
or wasted as directed.
Hauling of excavated materials within the free haul distance of 200 meters for
disposal to waste areas and trimming of side slopes in canal prism and canal beds except on
portion of the canal where concrete lining is required, are considered subsidiary works under
canal excavation, thus, shall be paid under this Section and the cost thereof shall be
considered included in the contract unit price for Canal Excavation. Hauling beyond the free
haul distance of 200 meters (for waste materials only) and spreading of excavated materials
into canal and roadway embankments and structure backfill shall be paid under Sections IX
& XII, respectively. Hauling or overhauling for disposal of excavated materials into canal
embankments is a subsidiary work for Embankment Construction and Compaction, thus, it
will not be measured for payment and the cost thereof is considered included in the contract
unit price for Embankment Construction and Compaction.
The volume measured as provided above shall be paid per cubic meter, which price
and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, supplies, labor,
equipment, tools and all incidentals necessary for the successful completion of the work
described under this Section and for all subsidiary works except for hauling of excavated
materials beyond the free haul distance of 200 meters for disposal to waste areas which shall
be paid under Section IX, OVERHAUL, and except for trimming of side slopes on portion of
canals where concrete lining is required which shall be considered as a subsidiary work under
Section XX, Concrete Canal Lining.
52
SECTION V. CHANNEL EXCAVATION
501. SCOPE
The work under this Section shall consist of excavating and removal of all classes of
materials in channel prism including placing into embankments excavated suitable materials,
disposal of unsuitable or surplus materials to designated waste disposal areas, stockpiling of
excavated materials suitable for embankment and backfilling in accordance with the
Drawings and these Specifications or as directed by the Engineer.
502. CLASSIFICATION
All excavated materials under this Section will be classified in accordance with
paragraph 402.
Construction requirements shall be in accordance with paragraphs 403(a.1) and (a.2).
Channel excavation shall include all excavation works, in the channel prism whether
common or rock materials, except additional excavations at structure sites which is specified
to be done and measured for payment under excavation for structure.
Channel Excavation will be measured for every cubic meter of material excavated
from the channel prism. Measurement shall be made in its original position and computed by
the Average-End Area method for every 20-meter section of finished channel within the
paylines or neat lines shown on the Drawings, acceptably excavated and formed into
embankments or used for structure backfill, or wasted as directed.
The volume measured as provided above shall be paid at the contract unit price per
cubic meter, which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all
materials, supplies, labor, equipment, tools and all incidentals necessary for the successful
completion of the work described under this Section.
SECTION VI. STRUCTURE EXCAVATION
601. SCOPE
Structure Excavation includes the removal of all materials within the structure lines
including necessary dewatering operations not otherwise specified. It shall also include
additional excavations within the vicinity of the structure in order to shape the ground as
shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
602. CLASSIFICATION
Structure excavation shall be classified in accordance with paragraph 402.
53
All excavation requirements described in paragraph 403 are applicable under this
Section.
All structures, where practicable shall be constructed in open excavation. The method
of construction or excavations shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of
paragraph 404 and the following requirements.
Foundations shall be excavated according to the outline of the footings and floors of
structure as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer, and shall be of sufficient
size to permit free movement of workers.
On excavation of common materials the foundation bed upon which structures are to
be placed shall be finished accurately to the established lines and grades after a thorough
compaction and trimming of the foundation with the use of suitable tools and equipment. As
soon as the foundation excavations have been trimmed to their final level, it should be
protected from degradation by weathering. Should the foundation material soften through
exposure then the soft material shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. If
at any point, material is excavated beyond the lines and grades of any part of the structure,
the over-excavation shall be filled with selected materials approved by the Engineer and shall
be placed in layers of not more than 20 centimeters thick, moistened and thoroughly
compacted by special roller, mechanical tampers or by other approved methods. A density
not less than 90% of the maximum dry density determined by ASTM test D-698 is required.
The cost of filling over-excavation ordered by the Engineer shall be borne by the Contractor.
On excavation of rock materials, the bottom and side surfaces of excavated rock
excavation upon or against which concrete and weep holes are to be placed shall conform to
the required grades and dimensions as shown on the drawings or as established by the
Engineer. If at any point, materials are excavated beyond the required limits, the over-
excavation shall be filled with concrete at the expense of the Contractor including the cost of
all materials required.
When concrete is to be placed upon or against rock, the excavation shall be of
sufficient depth to provide for the minimum thickness of concrete at all points and any
deviation from the required minimum thickness of concrete shall be avoided as much as
possible. The surface on which concrete will be laid shall be trimmed and thoroughly cleaned
as directed by the Engineer.
When excavation of rock materials reaches the surface upon or against which concrete
is to be placed, blasting shall be stopped and the remaining mass of rock shall be carefully
removed by means of jack-hammer or any appropriate hand tool. The point beyond which
blasting will not be allowed shall be determined by the Engineer. All damages to the rock
foundation caused by improper blasting operation shall be repaired by the Contractor at his
own expense in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
All foundations for bridge pier footings shall be excavated to such depths as may be
necessary to secure stable bearing for the structure. Whenever the safe bearing power of the
soil as uncovered is less than that called for on the Drawings, pilings or appropriate spread
footings will be used. The elevations of the bottoms of footings, as shown in the Drawings
shall be considered as approximate, and the Engineer may order, in writing, such changes in
54
elevations and dimensions of footings as may be necessary to ensure a satisfactory
foundation. Bearing tests, upon written order of the Engineer, shall be taken to determine the
supporting power of the soil. Cost of bearing test will be paid as "Extra Work".
If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the material at the base of the excavation is
unsuitable for foundation he shall instruct the Contractor to either a) Carry out additional
excavation to a depth of 50 cm. below the proposed bottom of concrete shown on the
Drawings and to maximum depth of 60 cm. outside of the outermost lines of said base and
replace with backfill compacted to at least 90% of the maximum dry density or b) strengthen
the soft material by ramming in gravel and cobbles until a firm foundation is obtained.
Measurement and payment for the backfill shall be made under Section XII, "Structure
Backfill".
Structure Excavation shall be measured by the cubic meter in its original position
before being excavated in accordance with the Drawings, or as may be ordered by the
Engineer. No excavation beyond the paylines shown on the Drawings will be measured for
payment. For canal structures, the limit of measurement along the lines perpendicular to the
flow of water shall be the vertical planes at the outer edges of the inlet cut-off walls. The
upper limits of the solid measured for payment shall be the canal bottom for canal structures
or the original ground surface in case of diversion structures. The lower limit shall be the
bottom of the required excavation. Excavated materials not vertically above the boundaries as
specified above shall not be measured for payment. The volume measured shall not include
water and other liquids removable by pumping. Such materials as mud, muck, quagmire and
other similar semi-solids not removable by ordinary pumping shall be considered pay
quantities and shall be measured and paid for as "Structure Excavation".
However, in case structure excavation for canal structures is done before canal
excavation, the upper limit of the solid measured for payment shall be the original ground
surface in accordance with the structure excavation paylines.
The volume measured as provided above will be paid per cubic meter, which price
and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, supplies, labor,
equipment, tools and incidentals and subsidiary works necessary to complete the work
described under this Section.
For diversion works, canal siphons and bridge structure excavations, the cost of
dewatering operation unless otherwise specified in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid under a
separate item in the Bill of Quantities. For all other structure excavations, dewatering
operations involved are considered subsidiary works and the cost thereof shall be considered
included in the unit price of structure excavation.
The Contractor shall be paid sixty percent (60%) of the pay quantities of the actual
excavation acceptably accomplished in accordance with the paylines as shown on the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The remaining forty percent (40%) will be paid
upon pouring of concrete for the foundation or upon placing of riprap, gravel blanket or
grouted riprap in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications.
55
SECTION VII. DRILLING AND GROUTING
701. SCOPE
This Section covers the requirements to be applied in connection with the

performance of drilling and grouting operations for curtain grouting where shown on the
Drawings or as instructed or required by NIA.
The main works to be executed include, but are not limited to the following:
i. Drilling and redrilling of grout holes;
ii. Drilling of exploratory holes;
iii. Water pressure tests;
iv. Pressure grouting.
The general extent, locations, typical details and limits of drilling and grouting works
shall be defined by NIA after appraisal of cut-off-wall excavations and all other excavations.
702. DEFINITION OF TERMS
The meaning of the most common terms concerning drilling and grouting works is
defined as follows:
a) Section. The section is a portion of pre-established length of a hole in which
grouting or water tests may be performed;
b) Washing. The washing is the operation necessary to clean the hole of drilling
detritus, of material fallen from the walls of the boring and of other loose
materials contained in the fissure of rock by means of compressed air or water;
c) Water Pressure Test. A water pressure test consists of injecting water under
pressure in a section of a hole with the purpose of evaluating the permeability of
the rock;
d) Grout Washing. Grout washing consists of washing clean a grouted section of a
hole with water under pressure, before grout starts setting;
e) Rotary Drilling. Rotary drilling is the operation of drilling a hole by continuous
rotation of a carbide or diamond bit against the material to be drilled;
f) Percussion Drilling. Percussion drilling is the operation of drilling a hole, by
continuous hammering of a rock bit, against the material to be drilled, together
with an intermittent rotation;
g) Core Drilling. Core drilling is the operation of rotary drilling using a hollow drill
bit (coring bit) and a core barrel during which a continuous core is recovered
from the hole;
h) Plug Drilling. Plug drilling is the operation of rotary drilling with a solid
cylindrical or plug bit, during which no core is recovered from the hole;
i) Redrilling. Redrilling consists of removal of grout in a hole by drilling once the
grout is completely set;
56
j) Primary Holes. Primary holes are the first series of holes drilled and grouted at
the maximum spacing along a given curtain axis.
The spacing shall be such that grout injected into the hole does not reach the adjacent
drilled hole;
a) Secondary, Tertiary, etc. Holes. Secondary, tertiary etc. holes are series of holes
drilled and grouted in between two previously drilled and grouted series of holes.
The series will increase progressively, as deemed necessary by NIA, until
the amount of grout used indicates that the treated rock is tight;
b) Split Spacing. Split spacing is the procedure of locating the primary holes first,
and then the secondary, tertiary, etc. holes.
703. EQUIPMENT
a) Drilling Machines. Percussion type and rotary type drills are required for the
drilling operations. The machines shall be capable of easily drilling holes to the
depths and with the diameters required.
b) Grout Mixers and Agitators. Grout mixers shall be mechanical, high-speed type
capable of preparing a colloidal grout.
Grout agitators shall be of a type generally used for agitating cement grout
slurry.
Measuring tools and devices for proportioning of additives shall be
provided with each mixer.
c) Water Meters. Water meters shall be capable to withstand a service pressure up to
50 kg/cm2 where required and to deliver not less than three liters per second (3
l/s).
The dial gauge shall be equipped with an accumulative totalizer with a
reset knob. The water meter shall be capable of reading to at least five thousand
(5,000) liters with a dial graduated to one (1) liter.
A strainer with a cleaning valve shall be provided in the water supply line
ahead of the meter to prevent sand or abrasive particles from entering the
instrument.
Quick acting cut-off valves shall be mounted ahead of the water meter.
The Contractor shall test the accuracy of all water meters periodically and make
necessary corrections so that the accuracy shall be within two (2) percent.
d) Packers. Packers shall be designed so that they can easily be expanded, to seal the
drilled hole and, when expanded, shall be capable of withstanding without leakage
water pressure equal to the maximum grout pressure to be used for a period as
shorter than 10 minutes. The Contractor shall provide special type of packers if
these are required to meet adverse conditions in the grout holes.
e) Grouting Pumps. Standard grouting pumps shall be of duplex double acting,
positive displacement, slush pump, capable of operating at a pressure up to 50
57
kg/cm2 where required and to pump not less than 50 l/min of thick grout (w/c =
0.6 : 1 by weight). Some grouting pumps shall be capable to pump thick mortar
grout (w/c/s = 0.8 : 1 : 1 by weight) at a pressure up to 20 kg/cm2.
f) Pressure Testing Pumps. Pressure testing pumps shall be capable of operating at
a pressure up to 50 kg/cm2 where required and to pump not less than one hundred
and eighty (180) liters per minute.
g) Pressure Gauges. Pressure gauges indicating pressures up to a maximum one
hundred (100) kg/cm2 shall be provided. All gauges shall have dials graduated to
1 kg/cm2.
h) Automatic Pressure Recording. When requested by NIA, the Contractor shall
supply an automatic operated grout pressure recording instrument for use with
each grouting pump. This recording instrument shall be electrically operated at a
voltage variation of not more than + 10% and its accuracy shall be within 3%.
i) Central Mixing Plant. When the grout mixture is distributed to the holes by a
centralized pump station, the Contractor shall provide an automatic mixing plant.
This plant shall be composed of silos for cement and sand, of weighing units, of
water meters, of measurers for admixtures and of an automatic recorder.
This recorder shall produce a printed or autographic record on a single
visible card or tape of the weighings of each grout material.
j.) Equipment Arrangement. The arrangement of the grouting equipment
shall be such as to provide a continuous circulation of grout from the agitator and
the grout pump and to permit accurate pressure control by operation of the valve
on the grout return line.
704. GROUT MATERIAL
a. General.
Grout shall be composed of a mixture of cement and water, with the possible addition
of sand, bentonite and other admixtures. The grout mixture shall be determined by NIA in the
field to meet the requirement of the soil condition encountered in each hole.
b. Water.
The water used for any drilling washing and testing, and grout mixing shall be in
accordance with the requirements set forth in paragraph 1505 related to water for concrete.
c. Cement.
The cement shall comply with the prescriptions set forth in paragraph 1503 for
concrete works.
In the event that cement, before use, is found to contain lumps unacceptable to the
grouting operation, it will be rejected.
d. Calcium Chloride
Calcium chloride shall be in accordance with ASTM Designation 98 for type 2; when
used, it shall be proportioned to not more than 3% of cement by weight.
58
e. Bentonite
The bentonite shall be supplied in powder and shall comply with the following
requirements:
- Fineness passing 200 U.S. standard mesh 90%
- Liquid limit 200-500%
- Plastic limit 80%
- Plasticity index 120-420%
- Thixotropy 8-12%
The bentonite shall be hydrated 12 hours before being used in the grouting mixture.
f. Sand.
The quality of sand shall comply with the specifications set forth in the paragraph 906
for concrete works and its grading shall meet the following requirements:
U.S. Standard Square Mesh No. Cumulative Percentage by Weight Passing
8 100
16 95-100
30 60-85
50 30-50
100 10-30
200 0-5
The sand shall have a fineness modulus ranging from 1.5 to 2.0.
705. DRILLING OPERATIONS
a. General
The holes shall be drilled at the location, with the direction and to the depth shown in
the Drawings or directed by NIA. The use of grease or other lubricant on rods for drilling and
grouting operations will not be permitted. Each drilled hole shall be thoroughly washed under
pressure for at least 5 minutes and protected from becoming clogged or obstructed or flooded
by means of a tap or other suitable device on the collar. Any hole that becomes clogged or
obstructed shall be cleaned out in a manner satisfactory to NIA or replaced by another hole
drilled at the Contractor's cost.
59
Steel casing inserted into a borehole to allow continuation of drilling shall be at the
Contractor's cost.
The Contractor is acquainted that drilling through concrete structures can be executed
in presence of steel ribs, bolts, steel lagging and re-steel.
b. Grout Holes.
Grout holes shall be drilled both by rotary drilling equipment and by percussion
drilling equipment as required in the Drawings or instructed by NIA.
The minimum diameter of the holes measured at the point of deepest penetration shall
be:
- AX (48 mm) for rotary drilling with length up to 100 m;
- 38 mm (1 1/2") for percussion drilling with length up to 6 m;
- 63 mm (2 1/2") for percussion drilling with length up to 20 m;
The rotary drilling may be executed by core drilling or plug drilling and no core
recovery is required.
The grout holes will be drilled at any angle and at a depth not greater than 100 m
measured from the collar of the hole. Whenever the drill water is lost, or artesian flow is
encountered, the drilling operations shall be stopped and the hole grouted before drilling
operations are resumed in the hole. The grout so injected, remaining in the hole, shall be
removed therefrom by washing or other methods before it has set sufficiently to require
drilling.
Redrilling required because of the failure of the Contractor to clean out a hole before
the grout has set shall be performed at the expense of the Contractor. Exclusively where the
grout has been allowed to set by instruction of NIA, the redrilling will be paid.
c.Exploratory Holes.
The Contractor shall perform such exploratory drilling as may be required to
determine the rock conditions prior to grouting or the effectiveness of the grouting operations
after grouting.
All exploratory drilling shall be performed by rotary drilling equipment using coring
type bits. Since the maximum recovery of unpredictable soft or friable materials is of prime
importance, the Contractor shall, when such materials are encountered or when directed by
NIA, use a standard ball bearing swivel type, double-tube core barrel equipped with diamond
set core bits and standard core lifters. The holes shall range from 76 mm (NX) to 140 mm (5
1/2") in size and shall be drilled at any angle. The maximum depth of the holes, measured
from the collar, will be 100 m for 76 mm hole size and 50 m. for 140 mm hole size. All core
drilling shall be performed in a workmanlike manner, by competent and experienced
workmen and special care shall be exercised to obtain cores in as good conditions as possible
from all holes.
The Contractor shall furnish hard wooden core boxes of approximately 1.50x0.50m
and place the cores in the boxes in the correct sequence and separate them accurately by
spacers.
No box shall contain cores from more than one hole. The covers shall be fastened
securely to the core boxes and the boxes shall be delivered or transported in the area of the
60
project where directed by NIA. Exploratory holes may be grouted under pressure where
required.
d. Drilling Logs
The Contractor shall keep, in a manner satisfactory to NIA and furnish to NIA, an
accurate geological log of all exploratory holes drilled. The log shall include a detailed
description of all materials encountered in the drilling, their location in the holes and the
location of special features such as seams, open cracks, soft or broken rock, points where
abnormal loss of drill water, and water inflow occurred, and any other items of interest in
connection with the purpose for which the drilling is required.
706. METHODS OF GROUTING
a. General.
Drilling and grouting operations shall be carried out using "multiple stage" or "single
stage" grouting methods as described herein.
The method to be used for each hole or row of holes of a zone to be grouted shall be
instructed by NIA.
For single stage method the length shall not exceed five (5) meters
For multiple stage methods the length of grouting section shall not be more than three
(3) meters unless otherwise directed by NIA.
b. Multiple Stage Grouting Method.
Multiple stage grouting method will be done either in downward sequence or in
upward sequence as follows:
i. Downward Grouting Sequence. This grouting sequence will involve the following
general procedures:
• The hole shall be drilled for a section of established length, washed, pressure
tested, if required, and then grouted;
• After grouting, the grout in the hole shall be removed by washing or by other
methods before it has set to require redrilling;
• This previous operation shall be repeated in the underlying sections until grouting
has been completed down to the bottom of the hole.
ii. Upward Grouting Sequence. This grouting sequence will involve the following
general procedure:
• The hole shall be drilled to the full depth;
• A section of established length at the bottom of the hole shall be isolated by
packer, pressure tested, if required, and then grouted;
• The packer shall be relocated at a higher elevation and grouting shall be carried
out again;
61
• This operation shall be continued until grouting has been completed up to the
hole collar.
c. Single-Stage Grouting Method. In the single stage grouting method, the procedure
will involve drilling of the hole to full depth, washing, pressure testing, if required, and
grouting of the hole in one operation. This method will be limited to holes with a length not
exceeding 5 m.
707. TYPES OF GROUTING
Three types of grouting, having each a different purpose are defined, as follows:
a. Consolidation and Blanket Grouting. This grouting will be executed with the
purpose of improving the mechanical properties and decreasing the permeability of the rock
close to lining and foundations;
b. Impermeabilization Grouting. This grouting will be executed with the purpose of
filling all voids in the rock in order to make watertight curtains.
708. WATER PRESSURE TESTING
a. General
During the drilling of holes or after drilling is completed, or during or after grouting,
full holes or part of them shall be water tested when required by NIA.
If a hole is drilled to full depth, the section of the hole to be tested shall be isolated by
sealing it off with special double packers attached to a perforated steel pipe and lowered into
the hole.
If the hole is drilled in stages, a single packer shall be used to isolate the section to be
tested.
Water shall then be pumped into the test section under pressures and for the periods
specified for the different tests.
Holes shall be tested in 3 m or 5 m long sections, as it will be instructed by NIA.
The existing water level in the hole to be tested shall be established and recorded by
the Contractor before commencement of pressure testing.
Before water testing of any stage of hole is began, that stage shall be thoroughly
washed under pressure to remove rock chips, slurry and other debris.
NIA shall specify the sections to be tested, the type of test and the pressure to be used.
b. Water Pressure Test Type A.
The stage of the hole shall be tested under continuous pressure for a period of ten (10)
minutes and the effective testing shall start only when the prescribed pressure reaches a
sufficient stabilization.
Except for different instructions of NIA, this test will be executed to calculate the
Lugeon units of the ground permeability.
62
One Lugeon unit equals a water flow of one (1) liter per minute per one (1) meter
stage of a hole tested under a pressure of ten (10) kilograms per square centimeter maintained
for a period of ten (10) minutes.
The calculation and interpretation of the Lugeon units from the water pressure test
results shall be performed by NIA.
Should the leakage be too great to permit a pressure to be reached, the discharge of
the pump shall be maintained constant at the maximum output for ten (10) minutes and the
pressure recorded at minute intervals.
c. Water Pressure Test Type B.
The stage of the hole shall be tested measuring the rate of flow of water at three
pressures of increasing magnitude, each maintained constant for a period of ten (10) minutes
and the same pressures and time in decreasing order of magnitude.
The total period of a test will therefore be fifty (50) minutes plus the necessary
pressure stabilization time.
The effective testing shall start only when each stage of pressure reaches a sufficient
stabilization.
Should the leakage be too great to permit the first stage pressure to be reached, the
discharge of the pump shall be maintained constant at the maximum output for ten (10)
minutes and the pressure recorded at minute intervals. In this case the type "B" pressure test
shall be paid according to type "A" pressure test.
709. MIXTURE COMPOSITION
a. General
Mixtures shall be proportioned as directed by NIA who will, from time to time, direct
changes to suit the conditions found to exist in the particular grout hole.
b. Classes of Grout.
Two classes of grout may be required, as follows:
i. Cement Grout which shall consist of cement, water, bentonite and admixtures;
ii. Mortar Grout which shall consist of cement, sand, water, bentonite and possible
admixtures.
Grout that cannot be injected, for any reason, within two (2) hours after mixing, shall
be wasted at Contractor's cost.
The Contractor shall prepare transport to the site laboratory all the grout samples
required by NIA.
c. Water-Cement Ratio
The water cement ratio by weight will be varied to meet the characteristics of each
hole as revealed by the grouting operation and water tests, and range from 6 : 1 to 0.7 : 1.
Sand will be added to the mixture when grout takes remain high with thick water
cement ratio.
As a guide, the following water-cement ratio will be considered:
i. Impermeabilization Grouting
63
Grout Takes per Meter of Hole Lugeon Units from Water Tests
(kg of cement + Sand) Less than 5 From 5 to 10 More than 10
From To W/C & W/C/S
0 100 4:1 3:1 2:1
100 200 3:1 2:1 1:1
200 300 2:1 1:1 1:1:0.5
300 400 1:1 1:1:0.3 *
400 500 0.8:1 * -
Over 500 * - -
* According to instructions given by NIA
Grouting holes that are not pressure tested shall be grouted starting with thin cement
grout unless different instructions are given by NIA.
ii. Consolidation and Blanket Grouting

Grout Takes per Meter of Hole (kg of cement + Sand) W/C & W/C/S
From To
0 100 4:1
100 200 3:1
200 300 2:1
300 400 1:1
400 500 1:1:0.5
Over 500 *
* According to instructions given by NIA
710. GROUTING PRESSURES
Grouting pressures to be used in the work will vary with the particular conditions of
each hole such as: rock stratification, height of rock covering, structure involved and planned
work sequence. The pressures shall be directed by NIA case by case; they shall be as high as
practicable but shall be limited so as not to cause displacement of the ground or of any
structure in the vicinity of the grouting. It is anticipated that pressures may range
approximately from 1 kg/cm2 to 50 kg/cm2.
Where directed by NIA, the Contractor shall drill and grout steel pins into the rock
surface for the purpose of measuring uplift during grouting operations.
As a guide, the following grouting pressures will be considered:
Type of Grouting Pressure (kg/cm2)

Average Maximum
Impermeabilization P=4+0.3H 50
- From outdoor
Consolidation and Blanket
- From unlined rock surfaces P=2+0.3H 15
- From concrete prelining or P=4+0.3H 15
64
lining
711. GROUT PROCEDURES
a. General
Where pressure tests indicate a very tight hole, grouting shall be started with an
injection of bentonite grout with water bentonite ratio of 10:1 or as instructed by NIA
followed by a thin cement grout.
If an open condition exists, as determined by loss of drill water or inability to build up
pressure during water tests, then grouting shall be started with a thicker cement grout mix and
with the grout pump operating as nearly as practicable at constant speed; the ratio will be
decreased, if necessary, until the required pressure has been reached. If this procedure does
not produce the desired pressure, mortar grout shall be used and the mix varied as necessary
to produce the desired results.
If, due to the size of fissures, the specified pressure cannot be reached, cement and
grout at the minimum water cement ratio shall be injected for a time established by NIA
while the speed of pumping is reduced. After this time, pumping shall be stopped and the
hole be flushed out with water. Grouting shall be resumed after eight (8) hours, then start
with a thin cement grout.
If necessary to relieve premature stoppage, period applications of water under pressure shall
be made. Under no circumstances shall the pressure or rate of pumping be increased
suddenly, as either may produce a water-hammer effect which may promote stoppage. Should
grout leaks develop, the Contractor shall caulk such leaks when and as directed by NIA.
The grouting of any hole shall not be considered complete until any section or the whole hole
(in case of single stage grouting method) takes grout at a rate less than thirty (30) liters in the
time herein specified:
Grout Pressure _ Minutes
(kg/cm2
Less than 5 20
From 5 to 10 15
More than 30 5
The grouting of any contact hole shall not be considered complete until that hole takes
less than ten (10) liters in ten (10) minutes under the required pressure.
After the grouting of any stage of a hole has been finished, the pressure shall be
maintained by means of a stop-cock or other suitable device until the grout has set to the
extent that it will be retained in the hole.
b. Interruption
No interruption shall be permitted in the grouting operation of a hole once this has
been started, except as specified above or due to failure of power or breakdown of the
equipment. In this event, immediately after grouting has been interrupted, a thorough
cleaning of the borehole concerned shall take place by pumping water under pressure by
means of manual pumps, in order to make sure that when grouting is resumed the hole will
continue to take the grout.
65
c. Protection and Clean up of the Work
In case leakage of grout to the surface does occur, the Contractor shall immediately
caulk such leaks or stop the grouting operations as directed and shall remove all grout from
the area affected by washing, and no separate payment will be made for such work.
The Contractor shall, upon completion of grouting, clean up all waste resulting from
the operations.
During the work, the Contractor shall provide for adequate disposal of all wash and
waste water.
The surfaces affected by the grouting operations shall be cleaned and restored to their
original condition, as nearly as practicable, as determined by NIA.
d. Records
The Contractor shall keep records of all exploratory and grouting boreholes and
grouting operations. These records shall be submitted in the agreed form of drawings, daily
reports and a final project report as detailed below.
Drawings shall show location, size, length, inclination of holes, water pressure tests,
mixture composition, grout takes, pumping pressure and any other data considered necessary
by NIA extracted from the daily reports. These drawings shall be kept up to date and four
copies submitted monthly to NIA.
Daily reports shall record all information connected with the operations of drilling and
grouting. Separate reports shall be submitted for dayshift and nightshift and both reports shall
be submitted to NIA on the following day.
The project report shall take the form of a set of drawings and a bound written
summary of the work carried out. It shall be submitted to NIA within three months from the
completion of drilling and grouting operations.
e. Steel Pipes for Grout and Drain Holes
Standard black pipes in accordance with ASTM A 120 shall be installed in connection
with grouting operations and drain holes where shown in the Drawings or ordered by NIA.
The stand pipe at the heads of the boreholes shall be extended about 100 mm above the rock
surface or concrete and be bonded into the rock or concrete for a length of not less than 500
mm.
Steel pipes for grouting connections in tunnel lining shall be installed before pouring
operations and fixed to the formworks by proper bolts or other approved devices.
f. Grouting Trials
The Contractor shall carry out grouting trials as instructed by NIA. The trials shall
take the form of drilling, permeability testing and grouting with the object of testing the
efficiency of the Contractor's equipment and operations, comparing different methods of
working and the selection of suitable grout mixes and pressures.
The site of the trial may be either part of the grout curtain or other section of work
like the dam blanket grouting, or completely separate.
66
The Contractor shall include in his drilling and grouting rates for all costs involved in
carrying out these trials as a non-routine, low-productive operation based on the following
assumptions:
a) Payment for drilling, water pressure testing and injection of materials, etc. shall
be paid at the rates entered in the Bill of Quantities;
b) The work involved in carrying out the grout trials shall not exceed 5% of the
quantities for drilling and grouting operations estimated in the Bill of Quantities.
712. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
a. General
Drilling and redrilling, water pressure tests, pressure grouting (grouting operation)
including materials used, and steel pipes will be measured and paid for separately.
b. Drilling and Redrilling
Measurement for payment of drilling and re-drilling will be based on the length
obtained from the Drawings and/or the instructions given by NIA.
Length of steel pipes embedded in the concrete for grouting connection shall not be
measured for payment.
Payment for drilling and redrilling will be made at the unit prices stipulated per linear
meter which prices shall include all costs for labors, materials, tools, construction equipment,
incidentals and any other incidental cost necessary for doing the works as specified in this
Section, shown in the Drawings and/or directed by NIA.
Redrilling required because of the failure of the Contractor to clean out a hole before
the grout has set shall be performed at the Contractor's charge. Exclusively where the grout
has been allowed to set by instruction of NIA, the redrilling will be paid according to the
stipulated unit prices.
In case the Contractor intends to drill holes with larger diameter for his convenience,
the size must be approved by NIA and no additional payment will be made for such change.
c. Water Pressure Tests
Measurement for payment of water pressure tests will be based on the number of tests
actually performed according to the instructions of NIA.
Payment for water pressure tests will be made at the unit prices stipulated per test,
which prices will include all costs for labor, materials, tools, construction equipment,
Section and/or directed by NIA.
d. Pressure Grouting
Measurement for payment of pressure grouting, will be based on the weight of
material injected (excluding water) and computed according to the instructions given by NIA.
Wasted materials, due to carelessness of the Contractor, will not be measured for
payment.
Payment for pressure grouting will be made at the unit prices stipulated per ton ,which
prices will include all costs for labor, materials, tools, construction equipment, incidentals
and any other incidental cost necessary for doing the works as specified in this Section,
shown in the Drawings and/or directed by NIA.
67
Payment of grouting with single stage grouting method will be done according to the
unit price stipulated for the upward grouting sequence of the multiple stage grouting method.
e. Steel Pipes
Measurement for payment of steel pipes will be based on the weight obtained from
the Drawings and/or the instructions given by NIA.
Payment for steel pipes and fittings will be made at the unit prices stipulated per kilogram,
which price will include all costs for labor, materials, tools, construction equipment,
Section, shown in the Drawings and/or directed by NIA
SECTION VIII. FARM AND DRAINAGE DITCH CONSTRUCTION
801. SCOPE
The work under this section includes the excavation of all classes of materials from
the farm and drainage ditch prisms, after clearing and grubbing shall have been undertaken,
formation of the farm and drainage ditch embankments, side borrow opera-tions, disposal of
all excavated materials unsuitable for embankment formation to designated disposal areas,
and trimming of side slopes, all in accordance with the Drawings and these Specifications.
a. General
All farmditches and drainage ditches shall be constructed manually, unless otherwise
specified, and shall conform with the sections and dimensions shown on the Drawings or as
directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall only excavate and/or perform filling works
after the area of operation has been acceptably cleared and grubbed, or if necessary, stripped
of the top soil, in accordance with the provisions of Section II, Clearing and Grubbing.
On areas where there is an existing irrigation system and if during the construction of
farmditches and drainage ditches, the ground over which the ditches are to be constructed are
so dry, such that in the opinion of the Engineer, the ditch embank-ment could not be
constructed properly (due to segregation of materials), the Contractor shall be required to
saturate said areas before starting any excavation. In order to minimize wastage of irrigation
water or to avoid water from spreading over areas outside the limits of the side borrow areas,
the Contractor shall first construct a small ditch for the initial flow of water, preferably along
the center line of the farmditch and of the side borrow areas, by using carabao driven plows
or hand tractor at the Contractor's option.
In order to avoid unnecessary delays in performing the above requirement, the
Contractor shall be required to inform the Engineer at least one (1) week before intending to
undertake the saturation operation so that the release of the required amount of water will be
properly scheduled.
b. Farmditches
All excavated materials from the farmditch prism shall be used in forming the
required section of farmditch embankment. When excavated materials from the farmditch are
not enough to form the required section of the embankment or where filling works are
68
required, additional materials shall be obtained as side borrow from both adjacent sides of the
farmditch in accordance with the provisions of Section X, Side Borrow.
In the formation of the farmditch embankment, materials excavated from the ditch
prism and/or from side borrow shall be deposited directly on the embankment in 10 cm layers
which shall subsequently be thoroughly pounded using manual tampering devices (like an 8"
x 8" x 12" wood block with handle). Overfilling, by about 30%, of the embankment is
required to take care of possible future settlement.
c. Drainage Ditches
Drainage ditches shall be constructed similar to the construction of farm ditches.
However, the drainage ditch embankment may be formed without tamping and likewise
overfilling, by about 30%, of the embankment is required to take care of future settlement.
a. Farmditches
Measurement for farmditch construction will be made on the number of cubic meter
of materials excavated in its original position from the ditch prism and the number of cubic
meter of side borrow materials placed on the embankment and on fill portions of the ditch
profile, and computed by the Average-End-Area Method for every 20 meters section based
on the pay lines or neatlines shown on the Drawings.
The volume for side borrow materials is equal to the total volume of embankment
formed minus the total volume of excavation.
The quantity indicated in the Bill of Quantities is the combined total volume of
Excavation and Side Borrow.
Only farmditches that are fully completed and operational will be considered for
measurement and measurement will only be made when all farmditches for a turnout service
area are fully completed and operational. The length of the completed and operational
farmditches constructed beyond the stationing at the end as shown on the Drawings will not
be considered in the measurement for payment unless authorized in writing by the Engineer.
In cases where the farmditches will cross over big depressions such that borrow haul
operations and compacted ribbon of fill would be necessary in constructing this portion of the
farmditch, the Contractor shall perform borrow haul operations in accordance with Section
XI and construct the ribbon of fill before excavation of the ditch prism as shown on the
Drawings and as directed by the Engineer. Measurement for borrow haul, embankment
construction and compaction and excavation works involved will be made and paid for in
accordance with Section XI, XIII and IV, respectively.
b. Drainage Ditches
Measurement for drainage ditch construction will be made on the number of cubic
meter of materials excavated in its original position and computed by the Average End Area
Method for every 20 meter section of finished drainage ditch within the paylines or neatlines
as shown on the drawings, acceptably excavated.
69
a. Farmditches
1. Construction of farmditches measured (combined volume of excavation and side
borrow) as provided above will be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic meter which
price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all labor, tools and all
incidentals necessary for the complete construction of the farmditches.
b. Drainage Ditches
Construction of drainage ditches measured as provided above shall be paid at the

contract unit price per cubic meter which price and payment shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing all labor, tools and incidentals necessary to complete excavation
for drainage ditches including the formation of the required section of embankment.
In the construction of farmditches and drainage ditches, the Contractor shall as much
as possible, hire local labor. It is the desire of NIA that said workers should be paid
reasonably. Therefore before any payment shall be made to the Contractor, the Contractor
shall submit proof that all persons who were hired and rendered services in connection hereto
have been fully paid, and in no case shall a laborer receive compensation in an amount not
less than sixty-five per cent (65%) of the contract unit price with NIA nor shall he receive a
daily wage lower than that prescribed by the minimum wage law.
SECTION IX. OVERHAUL
901. SCOPE
Overhaul shall include the hauling of materials excavated from Canal Excavation or
Structure Excavation and to be disposed either for roadway embankment, normal
embankment, freeboard embankment, fill, structure backfill, or for disposal to waste disposal
areas suggested by NIA or at the Contractor's choice including acquisition of right-of ways
thereto.
902. DISPOSALOF EXCAVATED MATERIALS
a. General
NIA shall determine the suitability of all excavated materials in the various portions
of the work in accordance with the provisions specified herein.
b. Compacted Embankment
Materials from excavation which are suitable for compacted embankment (such as
canal embankments, roadway embankments, protection dikes, etc.) shall be dense and
homogeneous when compacted. The materials shall be free from all organic materials and of
all materials larger than 12 centimeters in maximum dimension.
Materials suitable for the construction of compacted embankment shall be those solid
having a classification as determined by the Engineer in the following order of preference:
GC (Clayey Gravel), SC (Clayey Sand), CL (Inorganic Clay), SM (Silty Sand) or ML
(Inorganic Silt).
All materials from excavation suitable for compacted embankment formation within
the free haul distance must be used for embankment.
c) Compacted Backfill
70
Materials from excavation which are suitable for compacted backfill shall be the same
as those which are suitable for compacted embankment, except that it shall be free of all
materials larger than 7.5 centimeters in maximum dimension and that compacted backfill
behind bridge abutments and retaining walls shall conform to the materials specified in the
Drawings.
d) Free Board Embankment
All excavated materials that are free of oversized material and of organic matter as
determined by the Engineer maybe utilized for the construction of free board embankment.
e) Waste Materials
Waste materials consisting of all excess excavated suitable materials and
objectionable materials for canal embankment and compacted backfill shall be placed in
waste disposal areas outside the NIA right-of-way chosen by the Contractor, levelled and
sloped to drain as directed.
Overhaul of waste materials will be measured by the cubic meter. The volume of
waste materials to be measured for payment shall be computed based on the Net End Area
versus Stationing Diagram and Mass diagram for each Lateral or canal which shall be
submitted by the Contractor to the Administrator for approval.
Overhaul for canal embankment is a subsidiary work under Embankment
Construction and Compaction (ECC) hence, it will not be measured for payment, as the cost
is already considered included in the contract unit price of ECC.
Payment for Overhaul for Waste Materials shall be per cubic-meter, which price and
payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all labor, supplies, tools, equipment
and all incidentals necessary for the successful completion of the work including acquisition
of right-of-way and access thereto for disposal areas chosen by the Contractor. Payment for
overhaul for waste materials shall only be made when said Net End Area versus Stationing
Diagram and Mass Diagram, where the volume measured for payment are based, has been
approved by the Administrator.
If during the implementation of the project, there are changes in disposal
area(s)/distance(s) other than those suggested by NIA, the contract unit price of any item of
work affected shall be reviewed by NIA to determine the reasonable price adjustment. The
price adjustment, either additive or deductive shall be subject to approval by the
Administrator.
The approved contract unit price resulting from the said price adjustment shall be
used in computing the amount to be paid to the Contractor.
For billing purposes, the Contractor shall submit to NIA a written certificate duly
certified correct by the Engineer the actual disposal area(s) with corresponding hauling
distance(s) as a requisite for payment.
71
SECTION X. SIDE BORROW
1001. SCOPE
When suitable materials from canal excavation are not sufficient to form the required
section of canal embankment, roadway embankment (especially at stretches of canal where
both cut and fill are encountered), additional suitable materials from the adjacent sides of the
embankment within 60 meters from the center line of the canal shall be obtained by side
borrowing as directed by the Engineer. Side borrow may also be done to form the required
section of bridge abutment approaches.
The work under this Section shall include clearing and grubbing and stripping of the
top soil on the side borrow area; excavation and placing or dumping of the side borrow
materials to canal embankment, roadway embankment or dike and returning and spreading
the stripped top soil after the side borrow operations.
1002. METHOD OF OPERATION
After having been determined that materials obtainable from side borrow areas are
suitable for embankment construction in accordance with Paragraph 902 (b), these side
borrow areas shall be cleared, grubbed and stripped to about 10 cm. thick top soil before
starting any excavation, pushing and dumping operation. The cleared and grubbed materials
and/or stripped top soil shall be placed outside the limits of the entire canal right-of-way and
side borrow areas as directed by the Engineer, all in accordance with the provisions of
Section II, Clearing and Grubbing.
Excavation of side borrow materials needed for the construction of embankments
shall be made more or less uniform in depth within the limits staked by the Engineer and
shall in no case exceed a depth of 30 cm. measured from the original ground surface; a berm
of not less than five meters in width shall be left between the outside toe of the embankment
and the edge of the borrow pit with side slope provisions not steeper than 3:1 or unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
Materials from side borrow areas shall be placed and/or spread in the canal
embankment or roadway embankment and subsequently compacted in accordance with the
applicable provisions of Section XIII, Embankment Construction and Compaction.
Before the Contractor leaves any particular work after completion of side borrow
operations, the side borrow area shall be releveled and destroyed paddy dikes restored; and
the cleared and grubbed materials or stripped top soil deposited outside work area shall be
returned and spread uniformly throughout the borrow area to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall not be allowed to shift his operation to another work area unless said
works are completed and approved by the Engineer.
Side borrow is a subsidiary work for Embankment Construction and Compaction, thus
it will not be measured for payment. The cost of which is considered included in the contract
72
unit price for Embankment Construction and Compaction or for Structure Backfill as the case
maybe.
SECTION XI. BORROW HAUL
1101. SCOPE
Borrow haul represents suitable fill materials obtained from borrow pits suggested by
the Engineer, hauled and placed to the embankments in order to fully complete the required
section of the embankment. Borrow haul materials could be obtained from sources suggested
by the Engineer or as shown on the Drawings.
When the materials excavated from the canal prism or from structure excavation and
from side borrow are sandy, said materials shall be blended with the borrow haul materials
during the embankment construction and formation before compaction operation shall be
done.
Borrow haul shall also be used in the formation and construction of roadway
embankment, protection dikes, structure backfill and fill for approaches to bridges.
1102. METHOD OF OPERATION
Borrow haul pits shall be cleared and grubbed or stripped as directed by the Engineer
to remove all unsuitable materials from the excavation area. Excavation shall be made within
the limits staked by the Engineer and to such depth as directed. The depth of excavation
throughout the borrow haul pit shall be as uniform as practicable and the side slope shall be
dressed to such slope as the Engineer may direct.
NIA shall suggest borrow areas for borrow haul materials and the Contractor shall
acquire the necessary right-of-way and access thereto.
Notwithstanding the above paragraph immediately preceding, borrow haul materials
may be obtained from any source the Contractor may propose provided, that the location are
approved by the NIA. In this case, the Contractor shall, also at his own expense secure the
necessary right-of-way and access thereto. The Contractor shall be liable for any royalty
imposed by the municipality where these borrow areas are situated.
In both cases, the Contractor shall construct and maintain the haul roads, together
with the necessary right-of-way for such roads and right of access thereto. The securing of
necessary "Permit to Enter" or "Quarrying Rights" for borrow areas chosen by the Contractor
shall be the Contractor's responsibility.
Borrow pits where practicable shall be so excavated that they will drain to the nearest
natural outlet or to such outlet as directed by the Engineer. The surface of the borrow pits
shall be left in a reasonably smooth and even condition and the stripped top soil shall be
returned and spread to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Materials from these borrow areas shall be hauled, dumped and placed either in the
canal embankments, roadway embankments, protection dikes or to structure backfill areas
and elsewhere as may be directed by the Engineer and subsequently compacted in accordance
with the applicable provisions of Section XIII.
73
Borrow haul is a subsidiary work for Embankment Construction and Compaction,

thus it will not be measured for payment. The cost for borrow haul operations which includes
clearing and grubbing of borrow areas, loading and unloading whether for canal
embankment, dikes or structure backfill, spreading and compaction shall be considered
included in the contract unit price for Embankment Construction and Compaction or
Structure Backfill, as the case maybe.
SECTION XII. STRUCTURE BACKFILL
1201. SCOPE
The work under this Section shall include hauling (if necessary) and backfilling with
suitable materials taken either from Structure Excavation, Canal Excavation, Side Borrow or
Borrow Haul all spaces excavated and not occupied by the structure and spaces between the
natural ground surface and the finish lines indicated to be filled and all other sections directed
to be filled by the Engineer, all in accordance with these specifications and in conformity
with the lines, grades and dimensions shown in the Drawings or as ordered by the Engineer.
It shall also include the dewatering and removal of all unsuitable materials as ordered by the
Engineer from the spaces to be backfilled or filled.
All spaces to be backfilled or filled shall be cleared of all rubbish and other
objectionable matter. The excavation pit to be backfilled shall be dewatered and all mud and
loose materials shall be removed before backfilling. The filling materials, with the proper
moisture content determined by the Engineer, shall be deposited loose and in layers not
exceeding 30 centimeters and then thoroughly compacted by ramming, rolling or by means of
mechanical tampers or portable vibratory compactors to obtain at least 85% compaction
behind bridge abutments, retaining walls, cut-off walls and immediately above pipes, box or
barrel conduits and gradually increasing to at least 90% compaction up to the surface of the
roadway in the case of approaches to bridges, Road Crossing or Culvert Structures. The time
when to start backfilling operation shall be determined by the Engineer.
The compacted backfill above pipes, barrels and other conduits, shall be brought at
least 60 centimeters before any compacting equipment utilized in embankment construction
shall be used or allowed to pass. Additional layers above 60 centimeters can be completed by
the use of roller type compacting equipment employed in embankment compaction.
Materials for structure backfill shall be as described in Paragraph 902 (c).
Structure backfill shall be measured in cubic meters in its final compacted and
uncompacted position within the limits of structure excavation paylines and surfaces of
concrete in contact with the backfilled material as shown on the Drawings or as directed by
the Engineer. Volumes occupied by the structure and other features will not be included.
74
Structure Backfill will be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic meter, which
price and payment shall constitute full compensation for side borrow, borrow haul and
overhaul operations and for furnishing all labor, equipment, tools and all incidentals and
subsidiary works necessary for the successful completion of the work under this Section.
For newly constructed Drainage Culvert, the volume between the original ground
surface and the top of the canal embankments is part of the embankment construction
operation and therefore shall not be included for payment under this Section (which payment
shall be included under embankment construction and compaction)
SECTION XIII. EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION AND COMPACTION
1301. SCOPE
The work under this Section shall consist of spreading materials taken from canal
excavation, structure excavation, side borrow and borrow haul into canal embankments or
protection dikes or approaches to bridges and road crossings and into all other embankments
indicated on the drawi0ngs; moisture conditioning and then compacting said materials into
the desired degree of compaction, all in accordance with the drawings and these
specifications or as directed by the Engineer. All works associated with Side Borrow and
Borrow Haul Operations, and Overhaul for canal embankment are considered subsidiary
works for Embankment Construction and Compaction.
1302. SOURCES OF MATERIALS
Materials for embankment and structure backfill for canal and diversion structures
may be taken from canal or structure excavation in accordance with Sections IV and VI. In
case where excavated materials from canal prism or from structure excavations are
insufficient or unsuitable for embankment formation, additional materials may be taken from
side borrow or borrow haul areas not necessarily designated by NIA including acquisition of
necessary right-of-way and access thereto. Likewise, materials for protection dikes and
approaches to bridges and road crossing may be taken from sources at the Contractor's choice
including acquisition of necessary right-of-way. However, possible borrow areas are
indicated in the Bid Drawings or as suggested by the Engineer.
1303. COMPACTION EQUIPMENT
Compaction of canal or roadway embankments, protection dikes or approaches to

bridges and road crossings or for backfill (if applicable) may be done by the use of the
sheepsfoot roller, pneumatic rollers, vibratory compactors or other type of compaction
equipment at the Contractor's option as approved by the Engineer. The suitability of the
proposed compaction equipment to achieve the desired degree of compaction must be
demonstrated during the initial phases of compaction operations. The Engineer shall have the
right to require the Contractor to change compaction equipment if such equipment is deemed
unsuitable in achieving the specified degree of compaction within a reasonable period of
time.
Watering equipment for moisture conditioning of the embankment materials, prior to
compaction, shall be designed to apply water uniformly at the rates required by NIA. Water
tank trucks shall be equipped with positive shut-off valves such that no leakage will result
from the nozzle when the equipment is not in used.
75
This paragraph covers the construction of all embankments designated on the

drawings as compacted embankment including the placing of embankment materials to the
low and over excavated areas in the canal. All compacted embankments shall be constructed
to the lines, grades and dimensions shown on the drawings, or established by the NIA on a
properly prepared foundations approved by the NIA. No objectionable materials shall be
placed on the embankments.
Ground surface upon which the embankment is to be constructed shall be scarified to
a depth of at least 15 cm. after clearing and grubbing, moisture conditioned, and compacted
to not less than the required degree of compaction as shown in Table A below. Materials
unsuitable for embankment foundations shall be removed as directed and replaced with
suitable materials and compacted as compacted embankment.
Where canal embankment is to be constructed across low swampy ground or where
the top soil is not satisfactory for foundation as determined by the Engineer, stripping of top
soil of the foundation area and compaction will be ordered before construction of the
embankment, stripping and disposal of the stripped material is subsidiary work and will not
be measured for payment; Provided, however, that when stripping to a depth beyond 10
centimeters from the natural ground surface is ordered by the Engineer, the stripped materials
below the 10 centimeters free stripping depth will be paid for under "Canal Excavation". In
case stripping of the top soil exceeds 10 centimeters, the Contractor should request to NIA for
a re-survey to determine the actual volume subject for payment. Verification and approval by
the Administrator should be obtained first before proceeding with the stripping operation.
Embankments shall be constructed to the lines, grades and dimensions shown on the
Drawings or as established by the Engineer. Embankments shall be constructed in horizontal
layers which extend the full width of the embankment. Thickness of the layers shall not
exceed 15 cm. after compaction. The moisture content of the material at the start of
compaction shall have plus or minus 3% of the optimum moisture content as determined by
the standard laboratory compaction test on soils (ASTM Designation D698). Embankment
material which does not contain sufficient moisture for compaction in accordance with the
above requirement shall be thoroughly mixed with additional water as directed by the
Engineer. Embankment material containing excess moisture shall be permitted to dry to the
proper consistency before being compacted. After a layer has been spread for the full width
of the cross-section and brought to a satisfactory moisture content, it shall be compacted. The
degree of compaction in each layer shall be determined by the standard field density test
ASTM D-1556. Each layer should attain the required percentage of compaction before the
succeeding layer is allowed to be placed. The compaction requirements for the different types
of soil placed in embankments are as shown in the following table:
TABLE
Soil Classification and/or Minimum Compaction Required Percent of Inplace

Proctor Maximum Dry Density with Respect to Proctor Maximum Dry Density
Density Obtained For
Roads, Dikes and Canal Normal Embankment
Embankments with (without Roadway and
roadway Intrasite or Feeder Roads
L, SM & ML, 85-89 100%
CL, SM & ML, 90-99 100% 95%
76
SC, 100-109.9 95% 90%
CG, 110-119.9 95% 85%
GC, 120-129.9 90% 80%
GC, 130-and above 90% 80%
When embankments are to be made on hillsides, whether paralleling a hillside,
abutting into a hillside or crossing over a hill, the slope of the original hillside shall be cut
horizontally as the work is brought up in layers. Material thus cut shall be recompacted along
with the new embankment material.
During construction, the Contractor shall keep the top of the embankments at such
elevation and section to provide natural surface drainage at all times. If the Contractor stops
work on any portion of the embankment on account of rain or impending rain, the surface
shall be graded to facilitate drainage and the surfaces shall be sealed by passing rubber tired
equipment or flat drum rollers over the surface. Before work is resumed on the area, the
surface shall be scarified to a minimum depth of not less than 15 cm., releveled, moisture
conditioned, and recompacted to the specified density.
Should the NIA determine that any portion of the surface of the embankment has
become so dry or glazed during construction that bond with the succeeding layer to be placed
thereon cannot be obtained, or should ruts develop on the embankment, such surface shall be
scarified to a minimum depth of 15 cm., relevelled, moisture conditioned and recompacted to
the specified density just prior to placing of the succeeding layer of the embankment.
All surfaces of the compacted embankment shall be compacted to the lines, and
grades shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer with the tolerances in
accordance with Paragraph 403 (b) for slopes and surfaces and a tolerance of + 10 cm. for
profile surfaces and shall be graded to a uniform slope. Canal embankments for roadways
shall be constructed only up to the elevation of the base of the road surfacing material. The
road shoulders shall be placed and compacted together with the road surfacing materials.
Measurement shall be done by the cubic meter of embankment in its final accepted,
compacted position less the volume for road surfacing materials if any, regardless of the
origin of materials and the required degree of compaction. Computation shall be by the
Average End Area Method for every 20 M station or by the applicable method suitable for
the work involved. The volume shall be the theoretical volume of the embankment as
computed based on the neat lines or paylines shown on the Drawings. The lower limit shall
be the elevation of the ground surface after stripping and the upper limit shall be the top of
the embankment.
The volume measured for embankment as provided above shall be paid at the contract
unit price per cubic meter, the price and payment shall constitute full compensation for any
side borrow, borrow haul and overhaul operations made, stripping of foundations (where
necessary), spreading, blending, moisture conditioning and compaction and trimming side
slopes (where necessary) including all labor, tools, equipment and all incidentals and
subsidiary works, necessary for the successful completion of the work described under this
Section. Provided, however, that payment shall only be made after presentation by the
Contractor of a certification issued by the NIA Materials Testing Engineer to the effect that
77
the constructed embankment measured and covered by such progress payment has attained
the required degree of compaction.
SECTION XIV. R O A D S
1401. SCOPE
The work under this Section shall consist of quarrying which includes clearing and
grubbing (if necessary) including acquisition of necessary right-of-way and access thereto by
the Contractor of the quarry areas he has chosen, or as suggested by the Engineer in the
project area, stockpiling, loading, hauling, dumping, spreading and compaction of road
surfacing materials into roadway including the furnishing of equipment, supplies, labor and
tools, all in accordance with these specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades, and
typical cross section shown on the Drawings.
1402. MATERIALS
Road surfacing materials for roadway shall consist of pit run gravel, talus rock,
volcanic cinders, sand collars, or other similar granular materials selected under the direction
of the Engineer. Oversized materials, if any, shall be removed at the borrow pit by screens or
handpicking except that if the material is such nature that it will break under rolling, the
Engineer may permit the breaking down to the required size in the road. If necessary to
obtain proper uniformity, additional materials shall be blended by mixing in the roadway.
The Contractor if he so chooses, may crush the oversized materials in lieu of wasting it. Road
surfacing materials shall meet the following requirements:
Sieve Designation Percent Weight Passing

(Square Mesh Sieve)
1-1/2" 100
1" 35-100
No. 4 25-45
No. 200 5-12
The portion of the filler passing the No. 40 sieve, including blending filler for top
coarse materials shall have a plasticity of 6-20 as determined by ASTM Designation D424-
39.
Sources of road surfacing materials may be those indicated on the Drawings or those
suggested by the Engineer in the project area. The Contractor shall clear and grub the sources
of road surfacing materials strip over-burdens and dispose all waste materials from said
clearing and grubbing or stripping operations as directed by the Engineer.
Road surfacing materials shall be excavated in accordance with the applicable
provisions of Section IV.
1403. MAINTAINING PUBLIC TRAFFIC
In the rehabilitation of existing roadways, the Contractor shall make necessary

provisions for the maintenance of public traffic and shall conduct his construction operations
78
for the work involved such that public traffic may pass thru the work area at all times with
minimum obstructions and inconveniences. A traffic man shall be assigned by the Contractor
to handle the smooth flow of traffic.
The safety of the travelling public shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
All barricades and obstructions shall be illuminated at night and all lights shall be kept
burning from sunset to sunrise.
1. Subgrade Preparation
a) New Roadway
Surfacing of canal embankments or protection dikes for roadway shall be performed
after operations for the construction of said embankments or protection dikes are completed.
All compacted embankments that are prepared for roadway subgrade shall be tested of
its uniformity and degrees of compaction before road surfacing materials are placed.
b) Existing Roadways
The Contractor shall prepare the subgrade of existing roadways before road surfacing
materials needed in upgrading roadways are to be placed.
2. Placing, Rolling and Grading of Road Surfacing Materials
a) Method of Placing
All road surfacing materials shall be placed simultaneously with the road shoulder
materials on the prepared subgrade for roadways as directed by the Engineer.
b) Spreading and Grubbing
Spreading shall be done manually or mechanically at the option of the Contractor, in
such a way that segregation of size will be avoided and such that the road surfacing materials
shall not be mixed with the road shoulder materials, spreading shall be performed
subsequently after every dumping. Whether to spread first the road surfacing materials within
the limits of the road bed before spreading the road shoulder materials or vice versa, or
simultaneously shall be at the option of the Contractor provided that the said materials will
not mix. If additional filler materials shall be mixed with the loosely spread road surfacing
materials by any method the Contractor may apply provided a satisfactory uniform mixture is
obtained before compaction. Quantity of filler materials shall be such that the blend of added
and original materials placed shall meet grading quality requirements in all respect.
c) Rolling
Compaction operations shall only be started when ordered by the Engineer, after the
above operations have been duly inspected and verified by the Engineers or his authorized
representative. The road surfacing and road shoulder materials shall be compacted
simultaneously. All materials shall be compacted to the full width of the roadway by rolling.
Rolling shall progress gradually from the sides to the center, parallel with the centerline of
the road lapping each preceding rolled track by one-half the width of the roller. Rolling shall
continue until the desired degree of compaction is attained. Any irregularities or depression
that develop under such rolling shall be corrected by loosening the material at these places
and adding or removing materials until such surfaces are smooth and uniform.
79
Road surfacing materials shall be compacted to achieve a relative density of 95% of
the maximum dry density as determined in the modified Proctor Test using the CBR (15 cm
mould).
Watering of the material shall be carried out prior to compaction to ensure that the
material is at or close to its optimum moisture content as required for embankment fill.
Placing, spreading, grading and compaction will not be measured for payment. Cost
of these works shall be included in the contract unit price for road surfacing materials.
Road surfacing materials will be measured in cubic meters in its final compacted
position, satisfactorily placed and accepted and computed by the Average End Area Method
for every 20 meter station. Before acceptance is to be made, the average actual thickness of
road surfacing materials compacted shall be determined by the Engineer by means of a boring
test at reasonable intervals. In no case shall the thickness of road surfacing materials at any
point be less than that specified in the Drawings.
Road surfacing materials measured as provided above shall be paid at the contract
unit price per cubic meter, which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for
furnishing, transporting and placing with the required quantity of filler and for mixing,
watering, grading and rolling, for maintenance before acceptance and for all labor,
equipment, tools and all incidentals necessary for the successful completion of the work
described under this Section, including acquisition of necessary right-of-way and access
thereto to quarry areas chosen by the Contractor and hauling cost of road surfacing materials.
Provided, however, that payment for road surfacing materials shall only be made after
presentation by the Contractor of a certificate, issued by the NIA Materials Testing Engineer,
to the effect that the road surfacing materials measured and covered by such progress
payment has attained the desired degree of compaction in accordance with the Drawings and
these Specifications.
For existing roadways, payment for reconditioning the sub-grade and shoulders shall
be considered included in the contract unit price for road surfacing materials.
If during the implementation of the project, the sources of materials differ from those
chosen by the Contractor considered in the derivation of his unit bid price for road surfacing
materials the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim for unit price adjustment as a result
of such alteration of sources.
SECTION XV. CONCRETE
1501. SCOPE
This Section covers all the materials as cement, aggregates, water, admixtures and
proportioning, mixing, transporting, placing, finishing, curing and protecting of concrete,
including supplies, equipment, tools and all other incidentals necessary for concrete works.
80
All the applicable provisions of the latest revision of the ACI Building Code (ACI-
318-63) and American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) shall govern in all cases not
specifically provided for herein.
1502. CONCRETE COMPOSITION
Concrete shall be composed of portland cement, fine and coarse aggregates, water,
and if necessary, admixtures or agents approved by NIA. The design of concrete mixtures and
consistency shall be as specified in this Section.
1503. CEMENT
a) General. The cement shall conform to the requirements of the standard

specifications for Portland Cement (ASTM: C-150 Type 1). Special Cement
may be used subject to the approval of the Engineer provided it meets the
requirements of Portland Cement with regards to strength, soundness and
setting time.
b) Storage. Contractor shall, immediately upon delivery of cement to the jobsite,
store the same in a dry, weathertight and properly ventilated structure with
adequate provisions for the prevention of absorption of moisture. All storage
facilities shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and shall be such as
to permit easy access for the inspection and identification. In order that cement
may not become unduly aged after delivery, the Contractor shall use any
cement of the same type, which has been stored at the site for 60 days or more
before using cement of lesser storage age. Any cement stored at the project
site over four months shall not be used unless retest proves it to be
satisfactory. Sacked cement shall not be stocked higher than 14 sacks for
storage for a period of not longer than 30 days and not higher than seven sacks
for longer period.
c) Payment. Payment for cement shall be considered included in the contract
unit price for the various items of concrete in the Bill of Quantities for which
cement is used.
1504. ADMIXTURES
In order to reduce the cement content and/or the amount of mixing water, and to
improve the concrete workability, the Contractor may be allowed to use Admixtures and as
such he shall submit to NIA for approval such Admixture he proposes to use. The Contractor
shall be required to submit manufacturer's brochures and data sheets for review together with
detailed proposals on how the admixtures will be used in the works. This information should
be supported with mix designs and the results of trial mixes. All admixtures shall be used
strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. However no additional
payment will be made by NIA to the Contractor in view of this as the cost thereof is
considered included in the contract unit price for the different classes of concrete.
81
The following type of admixtures will be given consideration by the NIA provided
that they conform to the provisions of this Paragraph:
1. Air entraining agent
2. Water reducing admixtures
3. Water reducing and retarding admixtures
4. Water reducing and accelerating admixtures
Admixtures shall be furnished in a powder or liquid form. If furnished in a solution it
shall contain at least 50% solids and a mold inhibitor. The admixtures effect on the properties
of Portland cement concrete mixtures shall meet the requirements of ASTM: C-494.
Admixtures will be accepted on manufacturers certification of conformance with the
specifications but permission to slip on certification shall in no way relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for furnishing an admixture not meeting specification requirements. Where the
Engineer has reason to believe that testing is necessary to prove compliance with the
requirements of these specifications, it may order these admixtures to be sampled and tested
anytime. The Contractor shall provide facilities satisfactory to the Engineer for readily
procuring samples for test.
Air Entraining Agent. Concrete produced with water reducing agents shall contain
four to six per cent of air entraining agent by volume. The air entraining agent shall conform
to the requirements of ASTM: C 260, and shall be tested in accordance with ASTM: C 233.
The total calculated air content of the concrete as discharged from the mixer shall be as
follows:
Coarse Aggregates Total Air - Per cent by
Maximum Size Volume of Concrete
2 cm 5+1
3.8 cm 3.8 cm
The agent in solution shall be maintained at uniform strength and shall be added to the
batch in a portion of the mixing water. This solution shall be batched by means of a
mechanical batcher capable of accurate measurement. When a retarder dispersing agent is
used in the concrete, the portion of the mixing water containing the air-entraining agent shall
be introduced separately into the mixer.
Water Reducing Agent or Water Reducing and Set Retarding Agent. The
Contractor may be allowed to use an approved water reducing agent, or water-reducing and
set retarding agent in concrete. The ASTM designations for these admixtures are Type A and
Type D, respectively. The agent used shall be either suitable calcium, sodium or ammonium
salts of lignosulfonic acids or of the nonlignin, hydroxylated carboxylic and acid groups. The
agent shall be of uniform consistency and quality within each container and from shipment to
shipment.
The amount of water reducing, or water reducing and set retarding agent to be used in
each concrete mix shall in general be within the following limits:
Lignosulfonic Acid Type 0.27 to 0.37 percent of solid rystalline

ligning, by weight, of cement.
82
Hydroxylated Carboxylic Acid Type 0.25 to 0.50 percent of liquid, by weight of
cement
Water Reducing and Accelerating Admixture. The ASTM designation for this
admixture is Type E. Water reducing and accelerating admixture may be used by the
Contractor for speeding up pre-casting and post-tensioning operations for precast and pre-
stressed beams, girders, slabs and bearing pads, if approved.
1505. WATER
The water used in concrete, mortar and grout shall be free from objectionable
quantities of silt, organic matter, alkali, salts and other impurities. The recommendation of
the seventh edition of the U.S. Bureau of Reclamation Concrete Manual for mixing water
shall be followed.
1506. FINE AGGREGATES
a) General. The term "Fine Aggregates" is used to designate aggregates in which the
maximum size of particles is 5 millimeters. Fine aggregates for concrete, mortar and grout
shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist of natural sand, manufactured sand, or a
combination of both. The different components shall be batched separately, or subject to the
written approval of the Engineer, or blended prior to delivery to the batching plant.
As a means of providing moisture control, the Contractor may be required to stockpile
the fine aggregates over porous storage to drain excessive water and to stabilize moisture
content.
b) Quality. Fine aggregates shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C-33 and
shall consist of hard, tough, durable, uncoated rock particles. The Contractor shall exercise
every possible precaution in transporting, washing and screening operations to prevent
contamination of sand particles. Fine aggregates shall conform to the following requirements:
1. Grading -It is assumed that the sand available in natural deposits will require
processing to provide a suitable gradation. Regardless of the source, the fine aggregates shall
be well graded from fine to coarse and the gradation as delivered to the mixers shall conform
to the following requirements unless otherwise approved:
Sieve Designation Percent by Weight
US Standard Square Passing Individual
.Mesh Sizes
3/8" (9.50mm) 100
No. 4 (4.75mm) 95-100
No. 8 (2.36mm) 85- 95
No. 16 (1.18mm) 60- 85
No. 30 (600um) 25- 60
No. 50 (300um) 10- 30
No. 100 (150um) 2- 10
In addition to the grading limits shown above, the fine aggregates as delivered to the
mixer shall have the fineness modulus of not less than 2.30 or more than 3.00. The grading of
83
the fine aggregates also shall be controlled so that the fineness moduli of at least 9 to 10 test
samples of the fine aggregates as delivered to the mixer shall not vary more than 0.10 from
the average fineness modulus of all samples previously taken. The fineness modulus shall be
determined by dividing by 100, the sum of the cumulative percentages retained on US
standard sieves No. 4, 8, 16, 30, 50 and 100. At the option of the Contractor fine aggregates
may be separated into two or more sizes or classifications, but the resulting sand when
combined before entering the concrete mixer shall be of uniform grading within the limits
specified above.
2. Particle Shape. The shape of the particles shall be generally spherical or cubical
and reasonably free from flat or elongated particles. A flat or elongated particle is defined as
a particle having a maximum dimension in excess of five times the minimum dimension.
Rocks which breaks down into such shape, regardless of the type of processing equipment
used, will not be approved for use in the production of fine aggregates.
3. Deleterious Substances. the maximum percentages of deleterious substances in the
fine aggregates as delivered to the mixer shall not exceed the following values:
Percent by
Weight
Materials passing no. 200 3
Screen (Designation 16)*
Shale(Designation 17) 1
Clay (designation 13) 1
Total of other deleterious substances (such as 2
alkali, mica, soft, flaky particles and loam)
* The designation in parenthesis refers to methods of testing described in the seventh (7th)
edition of the US Bureau of Reclamation Concrete Manual and ASTM.
The sum of the percentages of all deleterious substances shall not exceed 5% by
weight. Fine aggregates producing a color darker than the standard in the colometric test for
organic impurity (USBR designation 14 or ASTM C-40) may be rejected. Fine aggregate
having specific gravity (USBR Designation 9 or ASTM C-128, saturated surface dry basis) of
less than 2.60 may be rejected. The fine aggregate may be rejected if the portion retained on
No. 50 (300 um) screen, when subjected to five cycles of sodium sulphate test for soundness
(USBR designation 19 or ASTM C-88) shows an average loss of more than 18% by weight.
Fine aggregates delivered to the batching plant may be rejected if it contains more than
0.10% soluble sulphate for any one sample or more than 0.10 for an average of at least 9 out
of 10 consecutive test samples of finished sand, when samples are taken hourly. The percent
soluble sulphate in fine aggregates shall be determined in accordance with the method of test
prescribed in subparagraph 4. below.
4. Sampling - Sampling of fine and coarse aggregates shall be done in accordance
with paragraph 1509. The source from which fine and coarse aggregates is to be obtained
shall be selected well in advance of the time when the materials will be required in the work.
Unless otherwise specified, all test samples shall be taken under the supervision of the
Engineer in sufficient time as approved to permit adequate testing and examination of results
sufficiently in advance of the time for use in concrete. Routine control test and analysis of the
fine and coarse aggregates at various stages in the processing operation shall be made. The
approval of a source shall not be construed as containing approval of all materials from the
source, and the Contractor will be held responsible for the specified quality of all such
materials used in the work.
84
(c) Storage - Fine aggregates shall be stored in such a manner as to avoid the
inclusion of any foreign materials in the concrete. The storage or stockpile shall be
constructed so as to prevent segregation. Depositing of materials in storage and its removal
therefrom shall be done in such a manner as to result in increasing the uniformity of the
grading insofar as this is practicable. All fine aggregates shall remain in free drainage storage
for at least seventy-two (72) hours prior to use. Sufficient live storage shall be maintained at
all times to permit continuous placement of concrete.
(d) Measurement and Payment - Fine aggregates will not be measured for payment.
The cost of excavation, stockpiling, transporting, processing, blending, handling and other
costs for providing fine aggregates shall be considered included in the unit price bid for the
various items in the Bill of Quantities for which fine aggregates are used.
1507. COARSE AGGREGATES
(a) General - The term "Coarse Aggregate" is used to designate aggregates of such
sizes as to fall within the range of 0.5 cm. to 7.5 cm or any size or range of sizes within such
limits. The coarse aggregates shall be reasonably well graded within the nominal size ranges
hereinafter specified. Coarse aggregate for concrete shall be furnished by the Contractor and
shall consists of crushed rock or mixture of natural gravel and crushed rock as provided in
paragraph 1508. Coarse aggregate, as delivered to the batching plant shall have a uniform and
stable moisture content. Any rewashing found necessary to provide clean aggregates shall be
done prior to finish screening. Rewashing shall not be performed in finish screen.
(b) Quality - Coarse aggregates shall conform to the requirement of ASTM C-33 and
shall consist of hard, dense, uncoated durable rock fragments.
1. Grading - The coarse aggregates shall be well graded from fine to coarse. It shall
be separated into the following specific size groups. The grading of the aggregates within the
separated size groups as delivered to the mixer shall be as follows:
SIZEGROUPS
Sieve Sizes Per Cent by Weight Passing Individual Sizes
US Std. Sq. 12.5 mm 18 mm 37.5mm 50mm 75mm
Mesh
6" (150 mm) - - - - -
3" (75mm) - - - - 100
2-1/2" ( 63 mm) - - - 100 90-100
2" ( 50 mm) - - 100 95-100 35-70
1-1/2" - 90-100 - 0-15
(37.5mm)
1" ( 25 mm) - 100 20-55 35-7 -
3/4" ( 19 mm) 100 90-100 0-15 - 0-5
1/2" (12.5mm) 90-100 - - 10-30 -
3/8" (9.5 mm) 40-70 20-55 0-5 - -
No. 4 (4.75mm) 0-15 0-10 - 0-5 -
Coarse aggregates shall contain not more than 1.5 per cent of materials passing the
No. 200 sieve by meshing, nor more than 5% of soft fragments.
It shall have an abrasion loss of not more than 45 per cent at 500 revolutions.
Unless otherwise directed, the maximum sizes of aggregates to be used in concrete for
the various parts of the work shall be in accordance with the following:
85
Maximum Aggregate
General Use Diameter
Lean Concrete to control water Intrusion 37.5 mm

and other miscellaneous uses
Concrete for Footings, Walls, Slabs 37.5 mm

Beams, 0.22 to 0.75 meters thick
Concrete for thin walls, slabs, beams 19 mm

less than 0.22 meters thick
Concrete for reinforced concrete pipes 12.5 mm
In all cases, the diameter of the aggregate shall not exceed 1/2 the distance between
the reinforcing steel bars of the members being placed.
2. Particle Shape - The particle shape of the crushed coarse aggregate shall be
generally spherical or cubical and reasonably free from flat or elongated particles. A flat or
elongated particle is defined as a particle having a maximum dimension in excess of five
times the minimum dimensions. Rocks which breaks down into such shape will not be
approved for the production of aggregate.
3. Deleterious Substances - The deleterious substances in any size of coarse
aggregate, as delivered to the mixer, shall not exceed the following values:
Percent By Weight
Material Passing No. 200 1/2

(Screen Designation 16)*
Shale (Designation 18) 1
Clay Lumps (Designation 13) ½
Other deleterious substances 1
* The designations in parenthesis refers to methods of Testing described in the

seventh edition of the U.S. Bureau of Reclamation Concrete Manual and ASTM.
The sum of the percentages of all deleterious substances in any size, as delivered to
the mixer, shall not exceed 3% by weight. Coarse aggregate may be rejected if it fails to meet
the following requirements:
86
1) Petrographic Examination - If more than 10% of poor aggregate particles can be
identified in physical quality test and in case 20% of the particles would be
classified with respect to the chemical quality (USBR Desig. 7 or ASTM C-295).
2) Sodium-sulphate Test for soundness (USBR Desig. 9 or ASTM C-88)- If the
weighted average loss, after 5 cycles is more than 10% by weight.
3) Specific Gravity (USBR Desig. 10 or ASTM C-127) - If the specific gravity
(saturated surface-dry basis) is less than 2.60. 4) Sampling - All sampling of
coarse aggregates shall be in accordance with Paragraph 1509.
c) Storage - Coarse aggregate storage or stockpiles shall be built in such a manner as
to avoid the inclusion of any foreign materials in the concrete and to prevent segregation and
excessive breakage. Water sprayers shall be installed to keep that portion of the coarse
aggregate stockpiles saturated which is intended for immediate use in the concrete. Sufficient
live storage shall be maintained at all times to permit continuous placement of concrete.
d) Measurement and Payment - Coarse aggregates will not be measured for
payment. The cost of excavation, stockpiling, processing, blending, handling and other cost
for providing coarse aggregates shall be considered included in the unit price bid for the
various items in the Bill of Quantities for which coarse aggregates are used.
1508. PRODUCTION OF FINE AND COARSE AGGREGATES
(a) Source of Aggregates - Fine and coarse aggregates for concrete, and fine
aggregate for mortar and grout may be obtained by the Contractor from any approved source.
Approval of deposit shall not be construed as constituting approval of all materials taken
from the deposit, and the Contractor shall maintain the specified quality of all such materials
used in concrete works. If the aggregates are to be obtained from deposits or quarry sources
not previously tested and approved by NIA, Contractor shall submit, for preliminary test and
approval, a representative, 90 kilograms (approximately 200 pounds) sample of the fine
aggregate and of the 0.5 centimeters to 2 centimeter size of coarse aggregate and a 45
kilograms (approximately 100 pounds) sample of each of the other sizes of coarse aggregate
proposed for use in the work, at least 90 days before the materials are required for use.
b) Developing Aggregate Deposit. The Contractor shall carefully clear the area, from
which aggregates are to be taken, of trees, roots, brush, sod, soil, unsuitable sand and gravel
or aggregates, and other objectionable matter. The portion of the deposit used shall be located
and operated so as not to detract from the usefulness of the deposit or of any adjacent
property and so as to preserve, insofar as practicable, the future usefulness or value of the
deposit. Waste materials removed from aggregate borrow areas shall be disposed of in
approved locations.
(c) Processing Raw Materials. The Contractor shall employ processing equipment
which will ensure well-shaped particle in all aggregate sizes and a minimum of particle which
are flat or elongated. Processing of raw materials shall include screening, washing, and
blending if necessary to produce fine and coarse aggregate meeting the requirements of
Paragraphs 1506 and 1507. Processing of aggregates produced from any source shall be done
at an approved site. Water used for washing aggregates shall conform to Paragraph 1505. To
utilize the greatest practicable yield of suitable materials in the portion of the deposit being
worked, the Contractor may crush oversize material and any excess materials of the size of
coarse aggregate to be furnished, until the required quantity of each size has been secured,
provided, that the crushed aggregates shall be blended uniformly with the uncrushed
87
aggregates. Crushing and blending operations shall at all times be subject to approval by the
Engineer.
Aggregates, as delivered to the mixers, shall consist of clean, hard and uncoated
particles. When required, dust shall be removed from the coarse aggregate by adequate
washing.
(d) Moisture Control. The free moisture control of the fine aggregate and smallest
size group of coarse aggregate as delivered to the mixers shall be controlled so as not to
exceed the value of 6.0 and 1.5, respectively, expressed as a percentage by weight of the
saturated, surface dry aggregates. The percent variation of free moisture content in fine
aggregate and the smallest size of coarse aggregate shall not exceed 0.5% and 2.0%,
respectively, during any one hour of mixing plant operation. The free moisture of the other
sizes of coarse aggregates shall be the least amount when delivered to mixers and variations
shall be the least practicable under all job conditions. Sand shall have a uniform and stable
moisture content. Under no conditions shall the other sizes of coarse aggregates be delivered
to the mixing plant bins dripping wet. The Contractor may accomplish the required moisture
control by use of free drainage storage, mechanical dewatering devices, or any other
satisfactory means of dewatering.
1509. AGGREGATE SAMPLING AND TESTING
Sampling of the aggregate materials approved for use in the work shall be done by the
contractor in accordance with ASTM Sampling Method at 10 days in advance of the time
when placing of concrete is expected to begin. Aggregate studies and tests will be made by
the contractor at its own expense. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to designate
the source(s) of aggregates early enough to give NIA sufficient time to obtain the necessary
samples and have them subjected to tests.
The samples of aggregates shall be obtained and tested in accordance with the
following ASTM standard methods:
Sampling aggregate - C 75
Sieve Analysis - C 136
Amount of material finer than 200 sieve - C 117
Organic impurities - C 40
Mortar Strength - C 87
Soundness - C 88
Soft Particles - C 235
Abrasion - C 131
Clay lumps - C 142
No aggregate shall be used until official advice has been received that it has
satisfactorily passed all tests, at which time written authority shall be given for its use.
Material from source which has been previously tested and shown satisfactory compliance
88
with all the requirements given herein may be used without further testing upon written
permission of NIA. Test reports for previous tests must be available before approval can be
given.
During construction, aggregates will be sampled as delivered to the mixer to
determine compliance with specification provisions. Test shall be made in accordance with
the applicable ASTM Standards. Routine control test and analysis of aggregates at various
stages in processing, transporting, stockpiling, redraining, and batching, if used will be made
by the contractor. The Contractor shall provide such facilities as may be considered necessary
for the ready procurement of representative test samples. All test will be made by the
contractor under the supervision of NIA.
1510. CLASSIFICATION AND PROPORTIONING OF CONCRETE

MIXTURES
(a) Classification and Design Mixtures. The mixture for all classes of concrete shall
be designed by the Contractor and approved by NIA to obtain the compressive strength at the
age of 28 days as specified below:
Class Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum

Strength Aggregate Size Cement Water/Cement
(kg/cm2) (mm) (kg/m3) Ratio
X 300 19 375 0.55

Y 210 12.5 350 0.60
AA 210 19 325 0.60
A 210 37.5 300 0.60
B 170 50 250 0.70
C 170 75 225 0.70
Z 140 75 200 0.85
Blinding 70 37.5 150 No limit
(Concrete)
(b) Aggregate Content. - Concrete mixtures shall be designed to use the largest size
and the maximum amount of coarse aggregate as practicable for the intended use of the
concrete.
(c) Consistency. - The amount of water to be used in the concrete shall be regulated
as required to secure concrete of the proper consistency and to adjust for any variation in the
moisture content or grading of the aggregates as they enter the mixer.
It shall be such consistency that it will flow around reinforcing steel bar but individual
particles of the coarse aggregate when isolated shall have coating of mortar containing its
proportionate amount of sand. The consistency shall be gauged by the ability of the
equipment to properly place it and not by the difficulty in mixing or transporting. Addition of
89
water to compensate for stiffening of the concrete before placing will not be permitted.
Uniformity in concrete consistency from batch to batch will be required.
The slump of the concrete at the time of placing shall not exceed 5 centimeters in
heavy concrete sections and at top of walls, piers and parapets, 10 centimeters for pumped or
air placed concrete, and 7.5 centimeters for concrete elsewhere.
The Engineer reserves the right to require a lesser slump whenever concrete of lesser
slump can be consolidated readily into place by means of the vibration specified in Paragraph
1517.
(d) Notwithstanding the approval by NIA of the design mixtures and the above
specified minimum cement content for different classes or gradation of aggregates, the
Contractor shall be responsible that all the concrete meet the desired strength.
1511. MEASUREMENT OF MATERIALS
All materials from which the concrete will be manufactured shall be mechanically
measured by weight, except as otherwise specified and/or authorized by the Engineer and
admixture solutions which may be measured by volume.
Measuring devices shall be suitably designed and constructed for the purpose and
shall be weighing separately the cement, fine and coarse aggregates. The accuracy of all
weighing devices shall be such that successive quantities can be measured to one per cent of
the desired weights. Cement in standard bags (40 kilograms) need not be weighed. The water
measuring devices shall be of such type and make to be readily controlled to obtain an
accuracy of one-half per cent of the desired quantity of water.
Whenever volumetric proportioning and measurement is permitted due to failure or
malfunction of weighing devices the equivalent volumetric proportions of weighed
representative samples of the concrete ingredients shall be computed taking into
consideration bulking effect of cement and variations of moisture content of the aggregates.
When sack or bag cement is used, the quantities of aggregates for each batch shall be
for one or more full sack of cement. No batch requiring a fractional sack of cement will be
tolerated.
1512. MIXING AND DELIVERY
Ready-mixed concrete shall be mixed and delivered to the point designated by the
Engineer by means of one of the following combination of operations:
Mixed completely in a stationary mixer and the mixed concrete transported to the
point of delivery in a truck mixer operating at agitator speed or in nonagitating equipment
when approved by the Engineer. (Known as central-mixed concrete).
Mixed completely in a truck mixer at the batching point or while in transit. (Known as
transit-mixed concrete).
Mixed completely in a truck mixer at the point of delivery following the addition of
mixing water. (Known as truck-mixed concrete).
Truck mixers and truck agitators shall be operated within a capacity not to exceed 63
or 80 percent, respectively of the gross volume of the drum and at a speed of rotation for
mixing or agitating as designated by the manufacturer of the equipment. A truck mixer or
truck agitator used for transporting concrete that has been completely mixed in a stationary
90
mixer shall be operated within the limits of capacity and speed of rotation designated by the
manufacturer for agitating, except that the agitator capacity shall in no event exceed 80
percent of gross drum volume.
When a stationary mixer is used for the complete mixing of the concrete, the mixing
time for mixers having a capacity of 10 cubic yards (7.6 m3) or less shall be not less than 60
seconds. For mixers of more than 10 cubic yards (7.6 m3) capacity, the mixing time shall be
determined by the Engineer. The time is valid provided mixer efficiency tests prove the
concrete is satisfactory for uniformity and strength. Mixing time shall be measured from the
time all cement and aggregates are in the drum. The batch shall be so charged into the Mixer
that some water will enter in advance of cement and aggregates, and all water shall be in the
drum by the end of the first one-fourth of the specified mixing time.
When a truck mixer is used for complete mixing, each batch of concrete shall be
mixed for not less than 70 nor more than 100 revolutions of the drum or blades at the rate of
rotation designated by the manufacturer of the equipment on the metal plate on the mixer as
mixing speed. Additional mixing, if any, shall be at the speed designated by the manufacturer
of the equipment as agitating speed. All materials including mixing water shall be in the
mixer drum before actuating the revolution counter for determination of the number of
revolutions of mixing.
When a truck mixer or truck agitator is used for transporting concrete that has been
completely mixed in a stationary mixer, mixing during transport shall be at the speed
designated by the manufacturer of the equipment as agitating speed.
When a truck mixer or truck agitator is used for transporting concrete, the concrete
shall be delivered to the site of the work and discharge shall be completed within 1 hour after
the addition of the cement to the aggregates. Each batch of concrete delivered at the job site
shall be accompanied by a time slip issued at the batching plant, bearing the time of charging
of the mixer drum with cement and aggregates. In hot weather or under conditions
contributing to quick stiffening of the concrete, or when the temperature of the concrete is
30oC (85oF) or above, the time between the introduction of the cement to the aggregates and
discharge shall not exceed 45 minutes. When a truck mixer is used for the complete mixing
of the concrete, the mixing operation shall begin within 30 m minutes after the cement has
been added to the aggregate.
The concrete when discharged from truck mixers or truck agitators, shall be of the
consistency and workability required for the job. The rate of discharge of the plastic concrete
from the mixer drum shall be controlled by the speed of rotation of the drum in the discharge
direction with the discharge gate fully open. If additional mixing water is required to
maintain the specified slump and is added with the permission of the Engineer, a minimum of
20 revolutions of the truck mixer drum at mixing speed shall be required before discharge of
any concrete.
When approved by the Engineer, central-mixed concrete which is designated for the
purpose may be transported in suitable non-agitating equipment.
When non-agitating equipment is used for transportation of concrete the following
requirements shall apply.
Bodies of equipment shall be smooth, water-tight, metal containers equipped with
gates that will permit control of the discharge of the concrete. Covers meeting the approval of
the Engineer shall be provided for protection against the weather.
91
The concrete shall be delivered to the site of the work in a thoroughly mixed and
uniform mass and discharged with a satisfactory degree of uniformity. Slump tests of
representative samples taken during the discharge shall not differ by more than 2 inches (50.8
mm). Discharge shall be completed within 30 min. after introduction of the mixing water to
the cement and aggregates.
Concrete delivered in outdoor temperatures lower than 5oC (40oF) shall arrive at the
work having a temperature not less than 15.6oC (60oF) nor greater than 32.2oC (90oF).
The volume of concrete mixed or transported shall not be less than 15 percent of the
gross volume of the drum.
1513. RE-TEMPERING
Concrete, mortar and grout mixers which have developed initial set shall not be used.
Concrete, mortar and grout which have partially hardened shall not be retempered or
remixed.
1514. SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONCRETE
The Contractor shall provide the required samples of Concrete to be furnished by the
Contractor without cost to NIA. Sampling will, in all cases be performed by the contractor
under the direct supervision of the Engineer and Contractor shall provide without cost to NIA
all available tools and labor as may be required. Concrete sampling shall be carried on during
concrete operations at the rate of one standard sample for each 75 cubic meters of concrete or
fraction thereof placed during each continuous placing operations but in no case shall there be
less than one sample for each day concreting. Each standard sample shall consist of three
standard cylinders (6-inch diameter by 12-inches high.) The Contractor shall keep a record of
the samples and the portion of the structures and volume represented which shall be available
to NIA on demand. Sampling shall conform to ASTM Designations C-172, preparation,
storage and curing to ASTM Designation C-31 and testing to ASTM Designation C-39. NIA
shall have the sample tested by an approved testing laboratory at the expense of the
Contractor.
1515. CONVEYING AND PLACING CONCRETE
(a) General. Approval of the Engineer shall be obtained before starting any concrete
pour. Concrete placement will not be permitted when, in the opinion of the Engineer,
conditions prevent proper placement and consolidation. Before concrete is placed, all saw
dust, chips, and other construction debris and extraneous matters will be removed from the
interior of forms, struts, stays, and braces, serving temporarily to hold the forms in correct
shape and alignments, pending the placing of concrete at their location, shall be removed
when the concrete placing has reached an elevation rendering their services unnecessary as
may be. These temporary members shall be entirely removed from the forms and not to be
buried in concrete. Surfaces of existing concrete left after partial demolition against which
new concrete is to be placed, shall be cleared thoroughly of all loose concrete coatings or
concrete dust by brushing or other effective means followed by thorough washing or jetting.
Such surfaces shall be kept moist for at least 24 hours before pouring the new concrete.
Concrete shall be placed only in the presence of the Engineer or his duly authorized
representatives. Any and all concrete placed in the absence of the Engineer or his duly
92
authorized representatives will not be considered for measurement and payment, and shall be
removed at the discretion of the Engineer with the Contractor assuming all losses.
Concrete shall be conveyed from mixer to forms, as rapidly as practicable, by
methods which will prevent segregation, or loss of ingredients. In case of circular siphons,
pumpcrete shall be used. There shall be no vertical drop greater than 1.50 meters except
where suitable equipment is provided to prevent segregation and where specifically
authorized by the Engineer. Belt conveyors, clutch or similar continuously exposed flow, will
not be permitted.
(b) Concrete on Earth Foundation. All concrete shall be placed upon clean and
dump surfaces free from standing or running water. Prior to placing concrete, the earth
foundation shall be satisfactorily compacted in accordance with these Specifications.
(c) Concrete on Rock or Other Concrete. Rock surface or hardened concrete upon
or against which concrete is to be placed shall be clean, free from oil, standing or running
water, mud, drummy rock objectionable coatings, debris, loose and semi- detached or
unsound fragments. Fault, fissures and seams in rock shall be cleaned to a satisfactory depth
and to firm rock on the sides. Immediately before concrete is placed, all surfaces shall be
cleaned thoroughly by the use of high velocity, air water jets, wet sand blasting or other
satisfactory means. When required by the Engineer, roughening by grooving with pneumatic
tool, of existing concrete surfaces against which concrete is to be placed may be required. All
surfaces shall be wetted before placing concrete and approximately horizontal surface shall
be covered immediately, before the concrete is placed, with a layer of mortar not to exceed 15
millimeters in thickness and of the same cement-sand ratio as used in the concrete.
(d) Lift in Concrete. The permissible depth of concrete placed in one lift will be as
shown in the detailed Drawings or as directed for each structure by the Engineer. Unless
otherwise authorized or shown, lifts of mass concrete shall not exceed 1.5 meters in height,
and a minimum of 72 hours shall elapse between the placing of each successive lifts. Lifts of
three meters will be permitted in piers and walls. Height of lift specified herein will not apply
where the use of slip form has been approved. All concrete, when placed and vibrated shall
be approximately horizontal layers not to exceed 50 centimeters in thickness unless otherwise
specifically authorized. The placement of concrete surfaces shall not have reached their initial
set before additional concrete is placed thereon. Slabs shall generally be placed in one lift
unless the depth is so great that this procedure will produce objectionable results.
(e) Consolidation of Concrete. Consolidation of concrete shall be by the use of
mechanical vibratory equipment. The vibrating equipment shall be of the internal type and
shall at all times be adequate in number of units and the power of each unit shall be capable
to properly consolidate all concrete. The frequency of vibration shall not be less than 6,000
revolutions per minute. Form or surface vibrators shall not be used, unless otherwise
specified in other Sections of this Technical Specifications. The duration of vibration shall be
limited to that necessary to produce satisfactory consolidation without causing objectionable
segregation. In consolidating each layer of concrete the vibrating head shall be allowed to
penetrate under the action of its own weight and revibrate the concrete in the upper portion of
the underlying layer.
At least one spare vibrator in working order shall be available at any location where
concrete is being placed.
(f) Finishing of Concrete Lift Surfaces. The manipulation of the concrete adjacent
to the surface of the lift in connection with completing lift placement shall be the minimum
necessary to produce not only the degree of consolidation desired in the surface layer of
93
concrete but also a surface with the desired degree of roughness for bond with the next lift.
Surface vibration or excessive surface working will not be permitted. All unfinished top
surface not covered by forms and which are not to be covered by additional concrete or
backfill, shall be carried slightly above grade, as directed, and struck off by board finish.
(g) Placing Concrete Through Reinforcement. In placing concrete through
reinforcement, care shall be taken so that no segregation of the coarse aggregate occurs. On
the bottom of beams and slabs, where the congestion of steel near the forms makes placing
difficult, a layer of mortar of the same cement-sand ratio as used in the concrete shall be first
deposited to cover the surface.
(h) Depositing Concrete in Water. When specifically authorized, concrete may be
deposited in water. The methods and equipment used shall be subject to approval of the
Engineer.
1516. FORMS
(a) General. Forms shall be used wherever necessary to confine the concrete during
vibration and to shape it to the required lines. Forms shall have sufficient strength to
withstand the pressure resulting from placement and vibration of the concrete, and shall be
maintained rigidly in position. The strength and rigidity of the forms shall be such that
formed surfaces will conform to specification requirements relating to surface irregularities
and tolerances for concrete construction. Forms shall be tight to prevent loss of mortar from
the concrete.
Chamfer strips shall be placed in the corners of forms for exposed exterior corners so
as to produce beveled edges. Interior corners and edges of formed joints shall not be beveled
unless the requirement therefore is shown on the Drawings.
The tolerance limits specified in Paragraph 1521 and the surface irregularity limits
specified in Paragraph 1521 are the maximum permissive limits of misalignment or
irregularity surface which may occur despite workmanlike effort to construct and maintain
the forms to the specified surfaces. These limits pertain only to inadvertent and occasional
irregularities, even though these irregularities are within the maximum permissive limits, will
be rejected. Accordingly, these limits, shall not be construed to be tolerances for aligning
forms or determining acceptability of form materials.
Stub walls shall not be used, except that stub walls shall be used for walls having
fillets at the bottom.
Concrete in such stub walls shall be re-vibrated after adjacent floor concrete is placed.
Forms for finishes F2 and F3 shall be constructed with grade strips at the horizontal
construction joints, unless the use of groove strips is specified on the Drawings. Such forms
shall be removed and reset from lift to lift, they shall be continuous from lift to lift. Sheathing
of reset forms shall overlap the previous lift by not less than 25 mm. Forms shall be tightened
against the concrete so that the forms will not spread and permit abrupt irregularities or loss
of mortar or paste. Supplementary bolts or form ties shall be used as necessary to hold the
rested forms against the concrete.
Forms for all wall openings shall be constructed so as to facilitate loosening.
94
(b) Form Sheathing and lining. Wood sheathing or lining shall be of such kind of
quality and shall be so treated or coated that there will be no chemical deterioration or
discoloration of the formed concrete surfaces. The type and condition of form sheating and
lining, and the fabrication of forms for finishes F2, F3 and F4 shall be such that the form
surfaces will be even and uniform. The ability of forms to withstand distortion caused by
placement and vibration of concrete shall be such that formed surfaces will conform with
applicable requirements of these specifications pertaining to finish of formed surfaces. Where
finish F3 is specified, the sheathing or lining shall be placed so that the joint marks on the
concrete surfaces will be in general alignment, both horizontally and vertically.
Plywood used for sheathing or lining shall be high density overlaid plywood specially
manufactured for use in construction concrete forms as approved. Materials used for form
sheathing or lining shall conform with the following requirements, or other materials
producing equivalent results as approved by the Engineer.
Required Finish of
Formed Surface Wood Sheathing or Lining* Steel Sheathing or Lining**
F1 Any grade, surfaced on 2 edges Steel Sheathing permitted

(S2E) Steel Lining permitted
with no limits to defects except
imposed by other requirements of
these specifications
F2 Selected lumber, surfaced on side Steel Sheathing permitted

and Steel Lining permitted
two edges (SIS2E) or plywood
sheathing or lining
F3 Selected lumber, surfaced on four Steel Sheathing permitted

sides (S4S) or plywood sheathing or Steel lining not permitted
lining
F4 For plane surfaces, selected lumber Steel sheathing permitted

surfaced on four sides (S4S) T & G
or
plywood. For warped surfaces, the
lumber shall be free from knots and
other imperfections and which can
be cut and bent accurately to the
required curvatures without
95
splintering or splitting.
* The lumber shall be free from warp and knotholes and shall have no knots larger
than five centimeters in diameter. All knots shall be sound and tight. There will be
no pitch pockets, barb or lack of wood on the face of the lumber against which
concrete is to be placed.
** Steel sheathing denotes steel sheets not supported by a backing of wood boards.
(c) Form Ties. Embedded ties for holding forms shall remain embedded and, except
for F1 finish, shall terminate within the concrete approximately two diameters or twice the
minimum dimensions of the tie from the formed faces of the concrete. Embedded ties for F1
finish shall terminate within the concrete or shall be cut-off flush with the faces of the
concrete, at the Contractor's option.
The ties shall be so constructed that ends and end fasteners can be removed by
unskilled workmen without causing spalling at the faces of the concrete.
(d) Cleaning and Oiling of Forms. The surfaces of the forms in contact with the
concrete shall be free from encrustations of mortar, grout or other foreign material when the
concrete is placed. The surfaces of the forms to be in contact with the concrete shall be coated
with an approved coating which will enable the ready release of the forms and will not
contaminate the concrete surfaces. Except as provided below, forms for surfaces which are to
be painted shall be coated with straight, refined, pale, paraffin mineral oil, or other approved
coating, and the coating for steel forms shall consist of refined mineral oil suitably
compounded for the purpose.
(e) Forms of Curved Surfaces. Curved surfaces have been dimensioned at several
sections. The Contractor shall interpolate intermediate sections as necessary and shall
construct the forms so that the curvature will be continuous between sections. Where
necessary to meet requirements for curvature, the form lumber shall be built up to laminated
splines cut to make tight, smooth form surfaces. The forms shall be constructed so that the
joint marks on the concrete surfaces generally will follow the line of water flow. After the
forms have been constructed, all surface imperfections shall be corrected, and all surface
irregularities at packing faces of form materials shall be dressed to the specified curvature.
(f) Forms for Slopes or Battered Surfaces. Forms for sloped or battered surfaces
shall be built so that the sheathing can be placed board-by-board immediately ahead of
concrete placement so as to enable ready access for placement, vibration, and inspection of
the concrete. The sheathing shall be built so that the sheathing can be removed board-by-
board from the bottom to top.
(g) Forms for Open Channel Transitions. When warped surfaces of transitions are
not backformed, natural or compacted earth shall be shaped to the specified surface and
covered immediately with a plaster coat of cement-sand mortar at least 0.95 centimeter.
Forms for the warped surfaces shall be tied securely to the floor slab and braced
against spreading. In the upper surface, forms shall be butt and removed as specified in sub-
paragraph (j), so as to enable ready access for placement, vibration, inspection, and repair and
finishing of the concrete.
(h) Forms for Bridges. Forms for girders and slabs shall be cambered as specified by
the Engineer.
96
Forms shall be constructed so that form marks will conform to the general lines of the
structure. Column form marks shall be spaced symmetrically. Form bolts or clamps shall be
used to fasten forms. The use of ties consisting of twisted wire loops will not be permitted.
Bolts or clamps shall be positive in action and shall be of sufficient strength and number to
prevent displacement of the forms. They shall be of such type that they can be entirely
removed or cut back one inch or more below the finished surface of the concrete leaving no
metal within one inch of the concrete surface. All forms for the outside surfaces shall be
constructed with rigid wales at right angles to the studs and all form clamps shall extend
through and fasten such wales.
Forms for exposed surfaces shall be constructed of plywood or material which will
produce an equivalent surface. Form panels shall be furnished and placed in uniform widths
of not less than 90 centimeters and in uniform lengths of not less than 1.8 meters, except
where the dimensions of the member formed are less than the specified panel dimensions.
Plywood panels shall be placed with the grain of the outer piles perpendicular to the studding
of joists, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. Where form panels are attached directly
to the studding or joists, the panels shall not be less than 1.6 centimeters thick, and the
studding or joists, shall be spaced not more than 30 centimeters center to center. Form panels
less than 1.6 centimeters thick, which otherwise conform to the requirements specified in this
Paragraph, may be used with a continuous backing of surfaced material 1.9 centimeters thick.
Form panels more than 1.6 centimeters thick attached to studding or joists spaced at 30
centimeters center to center may be used, provided the deflection of the panel between
studding or joists does not exceed that of a 1.6 centimeters panel attached to a studding or
joists spaced at 30 centimeters center to center. All form panels shall be placed in a neat,
symmetrical pattern subject to the approval of the Engineer.
(i) Falsework for Bridges and Other Superstructures. False work for the support
of a bridge or other superstructure shall be designed and constructed to support the loads that
would be imposed where the entire structure placed at one time.
Suitable jacks, wedges or camber strips shall be used in connection with falsework or
centering to set the forms to the required grade or camber and to take up any settlement in the
formwork either before or during the placing of concrete.
(j) Forms for Large Circular Siphons. The Contractor shall submit to NIA a
detailed Drawings for a collapsible steel forms to be used as inner forms of the monolithic
barrels. The length of one section of the barrels is at every 9.15 meters bar length intervals as
shown on the Drawings. The outer forms intervals as shown on the Drawings. The outer
forms of the concrete barrels shall be made with butt joints throughout and form surfaces to
be in contact with concrete shall be smooth and true. All forms shall be sufficiently tight with
suitable gaskets provided at all form joints and gates to prevent leakage of mortar. Forms
shall be braced and sufficiently stiff to withstand, without detrimental deformation, all
operations incidental to the proper placement of concrete within the forms. All forms shall be
cleaned and oiled before pouring concrete.
(k) Removal of Forms. Forms shall be removed as soon as possible to enable the
earliest practicable repair of surface imperfections, but in no case shall they be removed
before approval of the Engineer. Any needed repair or treatment shall be performed at once,
and be followed immediately by the specified curing. Forms shall be removed with care so as
to avoid injuring of the concrete and any concrete so damage shall be repaired.
97
In field operation that are not controlled by beam or cylinder test the removal of forms
and supports shall be governed by the following:
Type of Structure Time of Removal After

the Last Pouring
Arch, beam, girders and slabs 14 days
Slab in close span of less than three meters 7 days
Side forms for beams, railings parapets Not less than 12 hours
balustrade, walls and columns and more than 48 hours
1517. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
(a) General. After the top surface of a lift is finally compacted, it shall be
immediately and carefully protected from direct rays of the sun, pedestrian traffic, materials
being placed thereon, running water, heavy rains, or any activity upon the surface that in any
manner will affect the setting of the concrete. Unless otherwise specified, vertical and
horizontal joints on exposed faces shall be chamfered as shown on standard detailed drawings
and formed to produce a uniform and neat appearance.
(b) Cleaning. Horizontal construction joints on lifts with relatively open and
accessible surfaces may be prepared for receiving the next lift by either wet sand blasting or
by cutting with an all-water jet, as specified below. If the surface of the lift is congested with
reinforcements, or is relatively inaccessible or, if for any other reason the Engineer considers
it undesirable to disturb the surface of a lift before final set has taken place, surface cutting by
means of air-water jets will not be permitted and the use of wet sand blasting or light brush
hammering will be required. After approved cleaning, the surface of the construction joints
shall be kept continuously wet for at least 12 hours immediately prior to placing concrete. A
mortar coating of approximately one centimeter in thickness shall be applied to all
approximately horizontal surfaces immediately prior to the placing of the next lift of
concrete. The mortar shall have the same cement sand ratio as the concrete. Any free water
on the joint surface shall be removed prior to placing the mortar. The Contractor shall ensure
that the surface of any horizontal joints (and the formwork in general) is completely clean of
any dust, weed, wood showings or other deleterious material prior to the placing of concrete.
1. Air-Water Cutting - Air-Water cutting of construction joint shall be performed
after initial set has taken place but before the concrete has obtained its final set. The surface
shall be cut with a high pressure air-water jet to remove all laitance and expose clean, sound
aggregate, but not to undercut the edges of the larger particles of aggregate. After cutting, the
surface shall be washed and rinsed as long as there is a trace of cloudiness of the wash water.
2. Wet Sandblasting. When employed in the preparation of construction joints, wet

sandblasting shall be performed immediately before placing the following lift. The operation
shall be continued until all unsatisfactory concrete and laitance, coatings, stain, debris, and
other foreign materials are removed. The surface of the concrete shall then be washed
thoroughly to remove all loose materials.
98
3. Cleaning Vertical Construction Joint. The vertical construction joints shall be
cleaned by wet sand blasting or by brush manner.
1518. REPAIR OF CONCRETE
No repair of work or plaster finish of formed concrete in structures will be permitted,

unless otherwise provided in these Specifications or directed by the Engineer in writing. All
defective concrete shall be removed and replaced with the Contractor assuming all expenses
and losses. Plastering without permission will be assumed as defective works. If directed, the
Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the start of the repair work at least 24 hours in
advance thereof and shall repair concrete only in the presence of the Engineer or its
authorized representative, unless inspection of such repair work is waived.
Drypack shall be used for filling holes having at least one surface dimension smaller,
if any greater than the hole depth; for narrow slots cut for repair of cracks for grout pipe
recesses; and for tie-rod fastener recesses as specified. Drypack shall not be used for filling
behind reinforcement or for filling holes that extend completely through a concrete section.
Mortar filling, placed under impost by use of a mortar gun, maybe used for repairing defects
on surfaces designated to receive F1 and F2 finishes where the defects are too wide for
drypack filling and too shallow for concrete filling and no deeper than the far side of the
reinforcement that is nearest the surface. Concrete filling shall be used for holes extending
entirely through concrete sections; for holes in which no reinforcement is encountered and
which are greater in area than 900 square centimeters and deeper than 20 cm.; and for holes
in reinforced concrete which are greater in area than 400 square centimeters and which
extends beyond reinforcement.
Workmanship methods, preparation of concrete for repair, materials, and curing shall
be as directed. Only workmen skilled in the repair of concrete shall perform such work.
Repairs of defective concrete shall be made within 48 hours after removal of forms.
Surfaces to which concrete is to be bonded shall be clean and dry when coated with
epoxy.
Surfaces of concrete to be repaired with sealing compound method shall be cured by
the water curing method for one day before application of the sealing compound. All repair
shall be sound and free from shrinkage cracks and drummy areas after they have been cured
and have dried 30 days.
Surfaces of repairs which will be exposed to view shall blend inconspicuously with
surrounding concrete surfaces.
Fins and encrustations shall be removed from surfaces which will be exposed to view.
1519. FINISHES AND FINISHING
(a) General. Allowable deviations from established lines, grades and dimensions are
set forth in Paragraph 1521. These allowable deviations are defined as "tolerance" and are to
be distinguished from surface irregularities in finish as described herein. The class of finish
and the requirements for finishing concrete shall be as specified in this Paragraph.
Finishing of concrete surfaces shall be performed only by skilled workmen. The
Contractor shall advise the Engineer as to when concrete will be finished. Unless inspection
is waived in each specific case, finishing of concrete shall be performed only in the presence
99
of the Engineer. Concrete surfaces will be tested by the Engineer to determine that surface
irregularities are within the limits hereinafter specified.
Surface irregularities are classified as "abrupt" or "gradual". Offsets caused by
displaced or misplaced form sheathing or lining or form sections or by loose knots in forms
or otherwise defective form lumber will be considered abrupt irregularities, and will be tested
by direct measurements. All other irregularities will be considered to be gradual irregularities,
and will be measured as the departure from the testing edge of an approved template held
parallel to and in contact with the surface. The template shall consist of a straight-edge or the
equivalent thereof for curved surfaces.
(b) Formed Surfaces. The classes of finish for formed concrete surfaces are referred
to by symbols F1, F2, F3 and F4 faces. Grinding will not be required on formed surfaces
except as necessary to reduce protrusions to specified limits. Recesses from removal of form
ties shall be filled with dry pack or epoxy mortar at the Contractor's option: except that filling
recesses in Finish F1 surfaces will be required only if the recesses are deeper than 2.5
centimeters in walls, less than 30 centimeters thick or if unfilled, recesses would reduce the
required cover over reinforcements.
The filled recesses shall blend inconspicuously with the surrounding concrete surfaces
or concrete that will be exposed to view.
The classes of finish and their application are as follows:

Finish F1 - Finish F1 applies to formed surfaces where fill material or concrete
is to be placed. The surfaces require no treatment after form removal except
for repair of defective concrete and specified curing. Correction of surface
irregularities will be required only for depressions which exceed 2.5
centimeters, when measured as described in sub-paragraph (a).
Abrupt irregularities on surfaces to which pre-molded joint filler is to be
applied shall not exceed 0.30 centimeter.
Finish F2 - Finish F2 applies to all formed surfaces not permanently concealed
by fill materials or concrete, or not required to receive Finish F3. Surface
irregularities, measured as described in sub-paragraph (a) shall not exceed
0.60 centimeter for abrupt irregularities and 1.20 centimeters for gradual
irregularities.
Finish F3 - Finish F3 applies to formed surfaces of the stoplog guides, exposed
faces of abutments, wing walls, girders, curbs, parapet railings, and decorative
features on bridges. Surface irregularities, measured as described in sub-
paragraph (a) above, shall not exceed 0.60 centimeter for gradual irregularities
and 0.30 centimeter for abrupt irregularities, except that abrupt irregularities
will not be permitted at construction joints.
Finish F4 - Finish F4 applies to formed surfaces for which accurate alignment

and evenness of surfaces are of paramount importance from the standpoint of
eliminating destructive effects of high velocity flows. Formed surfaces to
receive an F4 finish includes formed surfaces exposed to high velocity flowing
water.
100
Except as hereinafter provided, abrupt irregularities on surfaces to receive F4 finish,
when measured as described in sub-paragraph (a), shall not exceed 0.60 centimeter for
irregularities parallel to the direction of the flow and 0.30 centimeter for irregularities not
parallel to the direction of the flow. Gradual irregularities on surfaces to receive an F4 finish
shall not exceed 1.60 centimeters.
Abrupt irregularities on formed surfaces exposed to high velocity flows shall be
eliminated by grinding on a bevel of 1:20 ratio of height to length.
The Contractor will not be entitled to any extra payment or compensation for reducing
or eliminating irregularities on formed concrete surfaces which do not meet specification
limits.
(c) Unformed Surfaces - The classes of finish for unformed concrete surfaces are
referred to by symbols U1, U2, U3, or U4. Exterior surfaces will be sloped for drainage
where shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Exterior surfaces which
otherwise would be level shall be sloped for drainage. Unless the use of other slopes or level
surfaces is indicated on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer narrow surfaces, such as
tops of walls and burbs, shall be sloped approximately 3 centimeters per meter of width;
broader surfaces, such as walks, roadways, platforms, and decks shall be sloped
approximately 2 centimeters per meter. These classes of finish and their applications are as
follows:
Finish U1 - Finish U1 (screeded finish) applies to unformed surfaces that will
be covered by fill material or by concrete. Finish U1 is also used as the first
stage of finishes U2 and U3. Finishing shall consist of sufficient leveling and
screening to produce even uniform surfaces. Surface irregularities, measured
as described in sub- paragraph (a) shall not exceed 0.60 centimeter.
Finish U2 - Finish U2 (floated finish) applies to unformed surfaces not
permanently concealed by fill material or concrete, or not required to receive
finishes U3 and U4. Finish U2 is also used as the second stage of finish U3.
Floating may be performed by use of hand or power driven equipment.
Floating shall be started as soon as the screeded surface has stiffened
sufficiently, and shall be the minimum necessary to produce a surface that is
free from screed marks and is uniform in texture. If finish U3 is to be applied,
floating shall be continued until a small amount of mortar without excess
water is brought to the surface, so as to permit effective trowelling. Surface
irregularities measured as described in sub-paragraph (a), shall not exceed
0.60 centimeter.
Finish U3 - Finish U3 (trowelled finish) applies to inside floors of buildings.
When the floated surface has hardened sufficiently to prevent excess of fine
material from being drawn to the surface, steel trowelling shall be started.
Steel trowelling shall be performed with firm pressure, so as to flatten the
sandy texture of the floated surface and produce a dense uniform surface, free
from blemishes and trowel marks. Surface irregularities, measured as
described in sub-paragraph (a), shall not exceed 0.60 centimeter.
Finish U4 - Finish U4 applies to canal lining. The finished surface shall be
equivalent in evenness, smoothness and freedom from rock pockets and
surface voids to that obtainable by effective use of a long-handled steel trowel.
Light surface fitting and light trowel marks will not be considered
objectionable. Surface irregularities measured as described in sub-paragraph
101
(a), shall not exceed 0.60 centimeter for bottom slabs and 1.20 centimeter for
side slopes.
(d) Moisture Control for Unformed Surfaces - In warm, dry or windy weather the
moisture control measures specified herein shall be taken to inhibit loss of moisture from the
surface of the concrete. Such surfaces shall be fog-sprayed, covered completely with white
polyethylene sheet, or otherwise treated as approved. The curing specified in Paragraph 1520
shall be started as soon as the concrete hardens, however, the surface of the concrete shall be
kept wet during the change in curing methods.
If surfaces are fog sprayed, the fog spray shall maintain a sheet of moisture on the
concrete but shall not displace cement or create a wet surface during finishing operations.
Surfaces shall be fog sprayed during and immediately following finishing operations, and fog
spraying shall be interrupted only to enable finishing operations. Such interruptions shall be
of minimum duration and shall occur only in the immediate area being finished.
Plastic shrinkage cracks which occur before the concrete hardens shall be closed.
Shrinkage cracks shall be closed by working; cracks shall not be sealed by trowelling only.
1520. CURING
(a) General
All concrete except interior surfaces, shall be cured for a period of not less than 14
consecutive days.
All horizontal slabs or surfaces shall be cured by water curing in accordance with sub-
paragraph (c) and all inclined or vertical surfaces of concrete shall be applied with membrane
curing immediately after removal of forms to prevent dehydration in accordance with sub-
paragraph (b) except that membrane curing shall not be allowed for mass concrete and for
construction joints. Contractor shall have all equipment needed for adequate curing and
protection of the concrete on hand and ready for use before actual concrete placement begins.
The curing medium and method or the combination of mediums and methods used shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineers.
(i) Floors, stair threads, and horizontal construction joints shall be cured for 14 days
by a covering of damp sand or curing mats, except that curing of construction joints surfaces
may be discontinued in less than 14 days when the surfaces are to be covered with fresh
concrete. The sand or curing mats shall not be kept so wet as to allow water to drain from it
and stain concrete walls. The sand or curing mats shall be removed after the expiration of the
curing period.
(ii) Interior Surfaces

Concrete surfaces of interior walls, including ceilings and surfaces of construction
joints and vertical construction joints will require no curing other than resulting from forms
being left in place for at least two days. Interior walls shall be washed during and after
completion of concrete operations at higher elevations. The washing shall be sufficient to
keep the walls free from drips or runs of material that would cause streaking or staining of the
concrete. Stair risers and large repairs on interior walls shall be cured for at least four days by
damp mats but the mats shall not be wet enough to cause dripping of water on completed
concrete. Small repairs and filled core holes on interior walls shall be cured for at least four
days by masking tape or similar covering.
102
(b) Membrane Curing Method.
The concrete shall be sprayed uniformly with sealing compound in accordance with
the manufacturer's written recommendation, copies of which shall be furnished to the
Engineer for approval in advance of the material being used. The sealing compound shall
conform to AASHO Designation: M-148, Type II. The component shall be of uniform
consistency and quality within each container of each shipment and from shipment to
shipment. Sealing compound used in confined spaces shall not be toxic to workmen. The
Contractor shall furnish a manufacturers certificate of compliance for the compound prior to
its use on the work. The certificate shall identify the batch and include certified test results
covering all requirements of the specifications for the sealing compound material.
Sealing compound shall be applied to unformed concrete surfaces immediately upon
completion of moisture control measures taken as specified in Paragraph 1519 (d). Where
such measures are not required, sealing compound shall be applied as soon as the concrete is
hard enough to preclude damage from application of the sealing compound. The Engineer
will require that the side slopes and bottom of the canal lining be sprayed separately unless
the surfaces are ready, simultaneously, to receive the sealing compound.
Sealing compound shall be applied to formed concrete surfaces immediately upon
removal of the forms as specified in Paragraph 1516. The moisture control measures shall be
taken until the forms have been removed. Formed surfaces shall be sprayed with water
immediately after the forms have been removed until the surfaces are saturated. The sealing
compound shall be applied as soon as the surface film or water has disappeared but while the
surface is still damp.
Sealing compound shall be applied in one coat to provide a continuous uniform
membrane. Special care shall be taken to ensure coverage of edges, corners, and rough spots
of formed surfaces. The compound shall be agitated continuously in the spray pressure tank.
Concrete repair work shall be performed after the sealing compound has been applied
and is dry to touch. In the event that application of sealing compound is delayed or
interrupted, water shall be applied as approved, until application of sealing compound is
started or resumed.
Any membrane that is damaged or is determined to be defective within 28 days after
application shall be repaired or replaced without delay, as approved. If the Contractor's
operations require traffic on coated surfaces, the membrane shall be protected from damage.
Payment for membrane curing shall be included in the contract unit price for concrete
in the Bill of Quantities where they are required.
(c) Water Curing

Water curing shall start as soon as practicable after placement of the concrete and
shall continue until completion of the specified curing period or until covered with fresh
concrete. Concrete, if cured by water, shall be kept wet by ponding method or by covering
with an approved water saturated materials, or by a system of perforated pipes, mechanical
sprinklers, porous hose, or by any other methods approved by the Engineer which will keep
all surfaces to be cured continuously (not periodically) wet.
Water used for curing shall be free of chemicals which may have an adverse effect on
the concrete. For example, water containing sulfates or chlorides is not acceptable.
103
1521. TOLERANCES FOR CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
(a) General. Permissible surface irregularities for the various classes of concrete
surface finish, specified in Paragraph 1519 are defined as "finishes", and are to be
distinguished from tolerances that are consistent with modern construction practice, yet
governed by the effect that permissible deviations will have upon the structural action or
operational function of the structure. Deviations from the established lines, grades and
dimensions will be permitted to the extent set forth herein.
Where tolerances are not stated in the Specifications or Drawings for any individual
structure or feature thereof, permissible deviations will be interpreted in conformity with the
provisions of this paragraph. Concrete work that exceeds the tolerance limits specified will be
rejected and shall be corrected or removed and replaced, as ordered.
(b) Tolerance for Canal Structure
1. Concrete canal lining:
Departure from established alignment
- 5 cm. on tangents
- 10 cm. on curves
Departure from established profile grade
- 2.50 cm.
Reduction in thickness of lining:
10 per cent of the specified thickness; provided that the average of all
thickness measurements made in 40 meters of lining shall be not less than the
specified thickness, and provided further that the quantity of concrete actually
used in 40 meters of lining shall be not less than the theoretical quantity, based
on the lines shown on the Drawings.
Variation from specified width of section at any depth - 3 cm.
Variation from established depth of lining - 3.7 cm.
Variation in surface:
Invert, in 3 meter - 0.60 cm.
Side slopes, in 3 meter - 1.20 cm.
2. Bridges, inlets, chutes and structures:
Departure from established alignment - 1.20 cm.
Departure from established grades - 1.20 cm.
Variation from the plumb or the specified batter in the lines

and surfaces of columns, piers, walls and in arises:
Exposed in 3 meters - 1.20 cm.
Backfilled in 3 meters - 2.00 cm.
Variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns, walls,
104
piers, slabs, beams and similar parts
Minus - 0.60 cm.
Plus - 1.20 cm.
3. Bridge Slabs:
Variation in thickness of slab:
Minus - 0.30 cm.
Plus - 0.60 cm.
Variations from specified width over curbs - 0.60 cm.
Variations from specified grade of top of curb in
cambered position - 0.60 cm.
4. Foundations:
Variations in dimensions in plan:
Minus - 2.50 cm.
Plus - 5.00 cm.
Variations from established grade:
Minus - 1.20 cm.
Plus - 2.00 cm.
Misplacement of eccentricity:
2 percent of the footing width in the direction
of misplacement but not more than - 5.00 cm.
5. Bridge Seats:
Variation of any one bearing from established
Elevation - 0.30 cm.
Difference in elevations of bearings for
adjacent spans, maximum - 0.60 cm.
Difference in elevations of bearings for zone span
on any one pier, maximum - 0.30 cm.
Horizontal misplacement for any one bearing,
Maximum - 0.70 cm.
Variation in the sizes and locations of slabs
and wall openings - 1.20 cm.
Skills and side walls for radial gates and similar
105
watertight joints:
Variation from the plump level not greater than
0.30 cm. in 3
meters
6. Stop Log Slots:
Variation from a common plane between the sealing
surfaces of each pair of related stop log slots
shall be no greater than - 0.15 cm.
Variation of widths of stop log guides:
Minus - 0.30 cm.; Plus -0.60 cm.
(c) Tolerances for Cast-In-Place Concrete Pipe:

Departure from established alignment or from
established grade - 2.50 cm.
Variation in thickness at any point: Minus 2-1/2% or 0.60 cm. whichever
is greater
Plus 5% or 1.20 cm. whichever is
greater
Variation from inside diameter - 0.5%
Variation in surface invert - 0.60 cm.
in 3 meters
(d) Tolerances for Placing reinforcement steel:

Variation from indicated protective cover:
For 5 cm. cover - 0.60 cm.
For 7.5 cm. cover - 1.20 cm.
Variation from indicated spacing - 2.50 cm.
1522. FAILURE TO CURE
The Engineer shall have the authority to suspend the work whole or in part, by written
order, for such period as he may deem necessary for failure on the part of the Contractor to
perform proper curing of the concrete work and to withhold payment for the corresponding
work pending results of test, that shall subsequently be made on these concrete works. The
Contractor shall immediately secure core samples of such members and from parts of the
structure as shall be designated by the Engineer and shall have them tested in a Testing
Laboratory approved by the NIA. If the results of tests are found satisfactory, payment of the
concrete in question shall be made and the work ordered resumed, but if the results of test are
106
unsatisfactory to meet the structural requirements, the Contractor shall remove, wholly or
partly, the concrete work in question at the discretion and upon written order of the Engineer
and the Contractor shall replace such parts at his own expense.
1523. FAILURE TO MEET CONCRETE REQUIREMENTS
All concrete designed, prepared and placed by the Contractor for bridges that fails to
meet the specified strengths shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his own
expense. For other structures, concrete that fails to meet the specified strengths may be
accepted provided the Contractor shall pay as liquidated damages the amount based on the
following schedule:
Percent (%) lower than Reduction in Price
the specified strength per cu.m. of Concrete
Up to -5 less 10% of contract unit price
Above -5 to -10 less 20% of contract unit price
Above -10 to -20 less 30% of contract unit price
Concrete for all structures other than bridges which are more than twenty percent
(20%) lower than the specified strength shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at
his own expense.
1524. PROTECTION OF CONCRETE WORKS
The Contractor shall protect all concrete against injury until final acceptance by the
NIA. Final acceptance shall be construed to mean acceptance of the whole work after the
Contract has been completed or satisfactory terminated.
SECTION XVI. CONCRETE DEMOLITION WORK
1601. SCOPE
The work under this Section shall include demolition, removal and disposal in a
manner approved by the Engineer of all portions of the existing structures indicated to be
demolished, all in accordance with the Drawings and these Specifications. All other
objectionable materials shall be disposed off to the designated disposal areas as ordered by
the Engineer.
Contractor shall submit for approval his proposed plans and operations for
undertaking the demolition of structures. The proposed plans shall show details of the
proposed method of demolition, removal and disposal of materials, blasting, drilling, and
other devices the Contractor may propose. The work shall conform to the lines and grades as
shown on the Drawings, or as directed by the Engineer. In cases of modification or
renovation of an existing concrete structure where partial demolition or chipping on the
surfaces of existing structure may be required, Contractor shall perform his chipping or
107
demolition operation in such a manner as to avoid chipping or over demolition or damage of
the entire structure. Over chipping or over demolition or entirely damage structures shall be
restored at the expense of Contractor in a manner satisfactory to NIA.
Concrete demolition of existing structures will be measured by the number of cubic

meter in its original position before demolition. Measurement will be made only to
acceptably demolished structures with all materials disposed off to designated disposal areas.
No material demolished by Contractor beyond the lines and grades indicated on the Drawings
will be included for measurement unless additional demolition has been previously
authorized by the Engineer in writing.
Concrete demolition of existing structures measured as provided above shall be paid for at
the contract unit price per cubic meter, which price and payment shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing labor, supplies, tools and equipment and other incidentals or
subsidiary works necessary for the successful completion of the work described under this
Section.
SECTION XVII. CONCRETE STRUCTURES
1701. SCOPE
The Contractor shall construct all concrete structures shown on the Drawings.
Concrete shall be proportioned, mixed, placed, finished and cured as specified in
Section XV, Concrete, except as modified herein. The sequence of construction of the
structures shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Where the thickness of any portion
of a concrete structure is variable, it shall vary uniformly between the dimensions shown.
Cement mortar plastering is not allowed in the construction of structures, unless otherwise
specified elsewhere in these Specifications.
1702. CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
All concrete construction shall conform to the provisions of Section XV, Concrete
and the detailed requirements of the following paragraphs. Concrete finished shall conform to
Paragraph 1519 and/or shall be as noted on the Drawings.
All structures shall be built to the specified lines, grades and dimensions. The location
of all construction joints shall be shown on the Drawings or as approved by the Engineer.
Construction joints shall be constructed as shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall
place and embed or attach to each structure all timber, metal or other accessories necessary
for its completion as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
The dimensions of each structure shown on the Drawings will be subject to change as
may be found necessary by the Engineer to adopt the structures to actual field conditions and
conditions disclosed by excavation.
108
Measurement for payment of any and all classes of concrete will be made by the
number of cubic meter computed to the neat lines of the structure, unless otherwise
specifically shown on the Drawings or specified in these Specifications. In the event cavities
resulting from careless excavation or from excavation performed to facilitate the Contractor's
operations, as determined by the Engineer, are required to be filled with concrete. Such
refilling will be made by at the expense of the Contractor. In measuring concrete for
payment, the volume of all openings, embedded pipes, woodwork and metal work within the
concrete will be deducted.
Payment for any and all classes of concrete in various parts of the work will be made
at the applicable contract unit prices per cubic meter which price and payment shall include
cost for furnishing all materials, equipment and labor, and all operations required in the
construction as specified under Section XV, Concrete, except that payment for reinforcing
bars and joint materials will be made at the applicable separate contract unit prices in the Bill
of Quantities.
If during the implementation of the project, the sources of aggregates differ from
those chosen by the Contractor considered in the derivation of his unit bid price for concrete,
the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim for unit price adjustment as a result of such
alteration of sources.
1705. CONCRETE FOR ALL STRUCTURES
(a) General
The item "Concrete for All Structures" in the Bill of Quantities include all concrete in
diversion works (except Rubble Masonry), canal structures and road structures such as
siphons, bridges, drainage culverts, road crossings, pipe crossings, ungated thresher
crossings, control structures, drop structures, headgates and turnouts and all other structures
not otherwise specified elsewhere in these Specifications.
Small concrete structures, at the option of the Contractor, may be installed as precast
units provided that precast structures installed in place are equal in all respect to cast-in-place
construction as specified in these specifications.
Concrete for diversion works, canal structures and other structures will be measured
and paid for as specified in Paragraphs 1703 and 1704, respectively. Structures not fully and
acceptably completed will not be measured for payment. Precast structures installed and
acceptably completed in place shall be paid for as specified in Paragraph 1704.
All materials used like cement, admixtures, aggregates and steel reinforcing bars shall
conform to the provisions of Section XV, Concrete and Section XXIII, Reinforcing Steel
Bars, respectively. Classes of concrete to be used shall be those specified in the Drawings.
(b) Curing and Joints

All concrete shall be cured in accordance with paragraph 1522, except that concrete
for canal siphon shall be cured until the concrete test cylinders shall have attained a strength
of at least 210 kg. per square cm. (3,000 pounds per square inch).
109
The Contractor shall construct expansion and construction joints at sections specified
on the drawings all in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 1517 and Section XXI,
Concrete Joints and Joint Materials, and elsewhere in these Specifications.
1706. PRE CAST CONSTRUCTION
(a) Scope and Description

Pre-casting of reinforced concrete may be resorted to as an alternative to poured-in-
place concrete for certain structures such as headwalls and collars, parshall flumes, turnouts,
division boxes, and other structures. Should the Contractor choose to employ pre-cast
construction on these structures, he must so inform the Engineer in writing, submitting in
detail his proposed design, modifications of concrete sections, concrete specifications,
reinforcements and schemes of construction of all pre-cast units. The NIA may further
required the Contractor to submit all other additional information as may deemed necessary.
The NIA may approve the construction proposed on pre-casting of concrete with or
without correction. The approval, however, does not relieve the Contractor of any
responsibility if such work does not meet specified results.
Reinforced concrete pipes and concrete hollow blocks are not considered pre-cast
construction, hence, are excluded under this Section.
(b) Transporting and Placing
Extreme care should be observed in handling, storing, moving and erecting to avoid
cracking, twisting, or other distortions that would result to cracking or damage to the precast
concrete. Pre-cast concrete members shall be handled, transported and erected in an upright
position and the points of support and directions of the reactions with respect to the members
shall be approximately the same as when the member is in final position.
(c) Sampling and Testing
The individual components of precast concrete structures, shall conform to the
applicable provision of Section XV, Concrete and will be subject to the usual test for
reinforced concrete.
(d) Measurement and Payment
Measurement of concrete in pre-cast structures will be measured by the number of
cubic meter. It shall be computed to the neat lines as if these structures were constructed to
the details shown on the Drawings.
The Contractor will be paid for all pre-cast structures acceptably installed or
completed in place. He shall be paid for each pre-cast unit as if the units were constructed to
the details shown on the Drawings, regardless of the actual dimensions of the pre-cast unit.
1707. LEAN CONCRETE
In the construction of siphons, the bottom of the cast-in-place concrete barrels will be
exposed to high velocity flow of seepage during pouring which will absorb or wash out the
cement in the concrete poured. To minimize the effect of seepage, a blinding concrete with
minimum strength of 70 kg/sq. cm. shall first be poured to the lines, grade and dimensions on
which the barrels will be constructed as shown on the Drawings.
110
Lean concrete shall be measured and paid for as specified in paragraphs 1703 and
1704, respectively.
1708. STAFF GAGES
The Contractor shall install two vertical staff gages, one upstream and one
downstream, in all parshall flumes and turnouts with valve structures and in all check
structures in the laterals as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The
porcelain plated or enameled steel staff gages and other materials and accessories necessary
for the installation shall be supplied by the Contractor.
Installation of staff gages will not be measured for payment including all the channels,
anchors, anchor bolts and other metal materials necessary to install the staff gages at the
parshall flumes and check structures. The cost of installation and other materials supplied by
the Contractor shall be included in the contract unit price for concrete in the respective
structure where gages are required.
SECTION XVIII. SHOTCRETE
1801. SCOPE
This Section deals with the shotcrete to be used for permanent linings and fillings,
where shown on the Drawings or required by NIA.
1802. GENERAL
Shotcrete shall be composed of an admixture of cement, sand, aggregates and

accelerating mixture.
Unless specifically modified by the following specifications or otherwise approved,
the shotcrete shall conform to and be applied in accordance with the recommendations
contained in the American Concrete Institute "Recommended Practice for Shotcreting" (ACI
50666).
Where required, the shotcrete shall be reinforced with welded wire or chain-link
fabric.
1803. MATERIALS
a. Cement
Cement shall comply with the provisions set forth in paragraph 1503, Section XV,
Concrete.
b. Sand and Aggregates
The quality of sand and aggregates shall comply with the requirements set forth in
paragraph 1506 for concrete works. While the combined aggregate grading shall be as
follows:
Sieve Size Percent Passing

Square Mesh by Weight
1" 100
111
3/4" 90 - 100
3/8" 65 - 90
No. 4 45 – 75
No. 8 30 – 55
No. 16 20 – 40
No. 100 0 - 10
c. Water
Water shall comply with the requirements set forth in paragraph 1505 for concrete
works.
d. Accelerating Admixture
Accelerating admixture shall comply with the requirements set forth in paragraph
1504.
1804. PROPORTIONING AND TESTING
a. Proportioning
The Contractor shall proportion the mixture for shotcrete so that the combination of
the ingredients develop the following minimum compressive strengths:
Time Compressive Strength (kg/cm2)

Class A Class B
At 8 hours 30 -
At 72 hours 140 -
At 7 days - 180
At 28 days 300 300
The tests shall be carried out at Site laboratory.
Class "A" shotcrete shall be used when a fast support or protection of the rock is
necessary, especially in underground excavations.
Class "B" shotcrete shall be used in other cases and mainly for supports or protections
in outdoor excavation or slopes.
The laboratory mixes shall be prepared considering 500-600 kg of cement, 0.40
water-cement ratio and accelerator in quantity necessary to obtain the required compressive
strengths, but in any case not exceeding 6% by weight of the cement.
The mixture shall be submitted for approval of NIA at least sixty (60) days before
shotcrete application.
b. Pre-construction Tests
Test cylinders shall be prepared by the Contractor before the work begins, in the
amount requested by NIA, by shooting concrete vertically downwards into molds of
hardware fabric 19 mm (3/4") metal mesh to make cylinders 15 cm (6") in diameter and 30
cm (12") high. Excess material shall be trimmed off with a sharp-edged trowel. Cylinders
shall not be moved for at least eight hours after being shot, during which time they shall be
protected and treated in a manner satisfactory to NIA.
112
These cylinders shall be manufactured so as to represent as closely as possible the
quality of concrete to be placed in the works. Test cylinders shall be shot with the same
equipment, air pressure, nozzle tip, and water content as the concrete to be used in the works.
Other preconstruction tests shall be carried out, shotcreting an inclined rock surface
and then obtaining core samples, as specified in sub-paragraph 1804 c for field tests.
On the basis of the results obtained by the preconstruction tests, NIA will accept or
refuse the mixtures prepared by the Contractor.
Unaccepted mixtures cannot be utilized in permanent works and shall be substituted
with new mix proportions.
c. Field Tests
Field tests shall normally be executed as described for pre-construction tests and in
the amount established by NIA.
If the test results are unsatisfactory, NIA may refuse the payment of the defective
shotcrete.
At the request of NIA and without extra payment, test specimens shall be obtained by
core drilling from the lining. Core samples shall be 7.5 cm (3") in diameter and obtained by
diamond core bit according to ASTM Designation C42 "Method of Obtaining and Testing
Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete".
The compressive strength of an individual class of shotcrete shall be considered
satisfactory if both the following requirements are met:
- The average of three consecutive strength tests (tests composed of 2 cylinders)
equals or exceeds the required compressive strength;
- No individual strength test falls below the required compressive strength by more
than 50 kg/cm2.
1805. PREPARATION OF SURFACES
The surfaces in contact with the shotcrete shall be cleaned before laying operations, so
as to free them from unstable material or materials on which the shotcrete cannot stick such
as mud or shattered and rebound material. If necessary, the surface shall be thoroughly
cleaned with water and compressed air; remaining water shall be blown away with
compressed air.
Where concentrated or scattered water inflows occur, the Contractor will trap and
convey this water to drains by suitable means. Under no circumstances shall shotcrete be
placed on a surface covered with standing or running water; water shall be withheld from the
fresh shotcrete until it has sufficiently set.
1806. EQUIPMENT
All equipment required to perform shotcreting operations shall be subject to the

approval by NIA.
The equipment used for measuring and batching concrete ingredients, for mixing, and
for placing of the shotcrete shall be of a recognized and proven type and of sufficient capacity
to perform the work in a workmanlike and efficient manner and to maintain the placing
continuity.
113
1807 BATCHING AND MIXING
Batching equipment shall be capable of performing accurate measurement to provide

uniformity of the concrete produced.
Batching by weight shall be used unless otherwise approved.
The components of the shotcrete shall be thoroughly mixed in approved mixers.
Mixed concrete materials, excluding the admixture, which are not used within one
hour of mixing, shall be wasted.
The class of shotcrete shall be approved by NIA according to the conditions of the
work to be performed.
1808. PLACING
The shotcrete shall be placed in one or more layers to the thickness as directed by
NIA so that at no time does sloughing of the placed concrete take place. If the application of
a succeeding layer has to be delayed such that the underlying layer has started to take its
initial set, the application of that succeeding layer shall be delayed until its application will
not disturb the initial setting process.
The placing of the shotcrete shall be performed by experienced personnel in a

workmanlike and efficient manner, using proper air pressure, water pressure, and hose length.
In addition to the equipment operator and nozzle-man one or more men shall be present
during the spraying operations to remove the rebounded material which under no
circumstances shall be used again as spray material.
The thickness in place shall be in any point not less than the required values.
1809. CURING
The curing of the shotcrete shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of
paragraph 1522 for concrete works.
1810. DRAINAGE HOLES
Where water seepage may cause hydrostatic pressure between the rock and the
shotcrete layer, the Contractor shall execute drainage holes penetrating into the rock to not
less than 50 cm depth. The pattern of such holes shall be fixed by NIA.
1811. WELDED WIRE/CHAIN-LINK FABRIC
a. Materials
Welded wire fabric shall be of square mesh type and shall comply with ASTM A 185
standard specification.
Wire spacing and wire diameter shall range from 100 to 120 mm and from 4 to 6 mm,
respectively.
Chain-link fabric shall comply with ASTM A392, Class 2, zinc coating for 50 mm
mesh and no. 9 gauge wire.
114
b. Installation
Before being installed in the works, welded wire and chain-link fabric shall be
cleaned from possible scale, intensive rust, mud, grease, oil wax or other foreign matter. The
placing on rock surfaces shall be carried out by means of anchor bars/pins so that the fabric
remains stretched and steady.
When wire mesh or chain-link fabric is used for protection, it shall be fixed as close
as possible to the rock surfaces; whereas, when it is used for shotcrete, it shall be placed at
about half thickness of the layer to be applied.
The joints of the fabric shall be reduced to the least number possible, according to the
work necessities, and shall be preformed overlapping one mesh.
When the wire mesh or link fabric is used for protective purposes, the Contractor shall
immediately, prior to placing concrete against it, satisfactorily remove any loose debris
trapped between the rock and the mesh.
Shotcrete and Welded wire or Chain-link fabric shall be measured and paid for
separately under this Section.
a. Shotcrete
Measurement for payment of shotcrete will be based on the in-place volume obtained
from the following:
i. From the area, computed according to the theoretical lines shown in the Drawings,
or designated and approved by the Engineer, and the specified minimum thickness;
ii. From the survey carried out according to the Engineer's instructions in case of
dental excavation fillings or other similar works impossible to compute by area.
Payment for shotcrete will be made at the contract unit prices stipulated per cubic
meter which prices shall include full compensation for the supply of all labor, materials,
tools, construction equipment, incidentals and any other incidental cost necessary for doing
the works as specified in these Specifications, shown in the Drawings and/or directed by
NIA.
Drainage holes will be paid for separately according to the provisions set forth in
Section VII "Drilling and Grouting" of these Technical Specifications.
b. Welded Wire or Chain-link Fabric
Measurement for payment of welded wire or chain-link fabric will be based on the
covered area shown on the Drawings and/or directed by NIA.
Payment for welded wire or chain-link fabric will be made at the contract unit price
stipulated per square meter which prices shall include full compensation for the supply of all
labor, materials (including anchor bars/pins necessary to fix the welded wire), tools,
construction equipment, incidentals and any other incidental cost necessary for doing the
works as specified in these Specifications, shown in the Drawings and/or directed by NIA.
115
SECTION XIX. RUBBLE MASONRY
1901. SCOPE
The work under this Section shall include furnishing all materials, supplies, tools and
equipment; construction of all necessary form work; placing rubble stone and concrete binder
on an approved foundation and form work; the removal of forms and curing of the rubble
masonry, all in accordance with the Drawings and these Specifications or as directed by the
Engineer.
1902. MATERIALS
Rubble stones shall consist of field stones that are clean, sound, durable, resistant to
the action of water, and must have specific gravity of at least two and six tenths (2.6), and
diameters ranging from 15 centimeters to 60 centimeters, sixty per cent (60%) which
comprises the bigger sizes. Stones shall have the prior approval of the engineer before their
use. Materials for concrete binder shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of
Section XV. Concrete binder shall be Class "A" concrete with 37.50 millimeters maximum
size of aggregates.
Preparation and handling of the concrete binder shall be in accordance with Section
XV. The stones shall be thoroughly wet before they are installed in place. The entire surface
of every stone shall be thoroughly covered with concrete binder. In general, one cubic meter
of rubble masonry will require one-half cubic meter of concrete binder. Actual variation in
this proportion will not entitle the Contractor to any price adjustment. It is expected that the
whole rubble masonry especially in the case of dam and apron as well as other structures
should be well encased and covered by the concrete so that it forms the hearting of the body
of dam and apron and will act contiguous with the concrete shell. This can be achieved by
tamping the stones into the concrete using heavy wooden blocks handled by one or two
people. After the bed has been prepared as required the first layer of mortar should be laid
and rubble embedded in them. The thickness of mortar should be such that each rubble could
be embedded at least 50 % of its longest dimension in the mortar so that when the next layer
of mortar is poured the rubble which has been embedded is not disturbed. The next layer of
boulders can be arranged in the mortar now placed following the same procedure. This will
ensure that all the boulders are fully covered with mortar and they are well entrenched and
stable in the mortar so that they are not disturbed when subsequent layers of mortar stones are
poured. The stones shall be well set such that no stone will project beyond the lines indicated
on the Drawings. The concrete binder shall be properly worked into the spaces between
stones so that no void is left within the rubble masonry. In case reinforcements are placed, no
stone shall be closer than four inches (10 centimeters) to the nearest reinforcing bars. Rubble
masonry shall be cured by water for five days.
The general construction procedure should be always to start from lowest elevations
so that the sub-grade on which the concrete is laid is not disturbed by the seepage forces
when the higher layers are excavated and prepared for concrete pouring.
116
In situations where rubble masonry is directly constructed on the sub-grade, the sub-
grade should be prepared exactly as for any other concrete structures. In these cases, also the
first layer can consist of concrete of 15 centimeters thickness in the case of minor structures
and 20 centimeters in the case of major structures. The concrete manufacture etc. will be as
specified under Section XV and the strength will be as of Class "A" concrete.
"Rubble Masonry" will be measured in cubic meters in its final position based on the
neat lines of the structure as shown on the Drawings.
The volume measured as provided above will be paid at the contract unit price per
materials, supplies, labor, tools, equipment and all incidentals or subsidiary works necessary
for the successful completion of the work described under this Section.
SECTION XX. CONCRETE CANAL LINING
2001. SCOPE
The work under this Section shall include the trimming of foundations and the
construction of the canal lining with the necessary construction joints as specified herein. the
work shall also consist of furnishing and installation of asphalt impregnated building paper or
its equivalent and flap valve weeps and complete accessories, all in accordance with the
drawings and these specifications or as directed by the Engineer. The building paper shall
only be used if it is necessary to prevent concrete from penetrating into any under drainage.
1. Trimming Foundation for Canal Lining

Trimming work will consist of excavation and removal of earth materials bounded by
the exposed upper and underside surfaces of the canal lining including the portion where
gravel blanket is to be laid except on portion where filter drain is to be constructed.
The Contractor must exercise extra care in order that trimming work will not extend
beyond the neat lines of the underside of the canal lining. Over excavation or trimming work
will not be permitted. In case of slight over excavation, backfilling with soil is not
permissible but instead, the Contractor will be obliged to backfill with concrete (as part of the
lining) with no additional cost to NIA.
Any under excavation of the earthworks should not be permitted since this will result
in either the lining closing them of the canal being undersized.
Where canal lining is to be constructed over a gravel blanket, the gravel blanket
foundation shall be prepared in conformity with the applicable provisions of Section XIV,
ROADS.
2. Pouring of Concrete
117
Concrete for canal lining shall conform to the provisions of Section XV. The surface
of the lining shall be finished as specified for finish under Finish U4 in Paragraph 1519,
Section XV, Concrete.
Pouring of concrete shall only be done after finishing the installation of asphalt
impregnated building paper or equivalent as shown on the Drawings. Likewise, on portion
where flap valve weeps are to be installed, pouring of concrete shall only be done after the
installation of flap valve weeps have been completed and acceptably laid in accordance with
the Drawings and as directed by the Engineer.
When concrete lining operations are stopped for the day because of equipment
breakdown or delayed by other causes. the end of fresh concrete shall be bulkheaded to a
vertical surface and a construction joint be provided.
Construction joints in canal lining shall be provided at spaces shown on the Drawings
and shall be constructed in accordance with Paragraph 1517, Section XV, Concrete.
Concrete canal lining will be measured in cubic meters in placed and computed based
on the neat lines and dimensions shown in the Drawings, unless otherwise specified.
Payment of concrete for canal lining measured as provided above will be made on the
contract unit price per cubic meter, which price and payment shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, supplies, tools, equipment and all incidentals
and subsidiary works necessary for the successful completion of the work described under
this Section.
The price and payment for canal lining shall also include the cost incurred in the furnishing
and installation of flap valve weeps with complete accessories and asphalt impregnated
building paper or equivalent whenever shown on the Drawings
SECTION XXI. CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT MATERIALS
2101. SCOPE
This Section covers the details of construction of expansion and contraction, and
construction joints in concrete including joint materials. Concrete joints and joint materials
shall be in accordance with the Drawings and these Specifications.
2102. JOINTS IN CONCRETE
(a) Construction Joints
118
Unless otherwise specified in these Specifications or shown in the Drawings, the
location of all construction joints in concrete work shall be subject to approval by the
Engineer, and the joints shall be constructed in accordance with Paragraph 1517of Section
XV. To prevent feather-edges, construction joints which intercept surfaces at a relatively
small angle shall be sloped, adjacent to the intersection, approximately normal to such
surfaces to form a 15 to 20 centimeters offset.
Joint sealant materials and placement shall be as specified in Paragraph 1003. The
cost of constructing construction joints shall be included in the contract unit price of concrete
where they are required.
In structures requiring watertightness and in which waterstops are specified for
construction joints or as shown in the Drawings, construction joints introduced by the
Contractor, as approved by the Engineer, for the convenience of the Contractor shall be
equipped with waterstops at the expense of the Contractor.
(b) Contraction and Expansion Joints
Contraction and expansion joints of the types shown in the Drawings shall be
constructed at the locations indicated. The joints shall be made by forming the concrete on
one side of the joint and allowing it to set before the concrete is placed on the other side of
the joint. The surface of the concrete first placed at a contraction and expansion joint shall be
cleaned and coated with sealing compound before the concrete on the other side of the joint is
placed. The Contractor shall furnish the sealing compound conforming to ASTM: C309. The
cost of constructing contraction and expansion joints shall be included in the contract unit
price of concrete where they are required.
2103. JOINTING AND COATING MATERIALS
1. Waterstops
(a) General
The Contractor shall furnish and install polyvinyl chloride or waterstops in the shapes
and dimensions as specified and in the locations as shown in the Drawings or as directed by
the Engineer. For convenience of placement in forms, a waterstop utilizing a split flange may
be used; however, prior to placement of final concrete, the split flange portion shall be jointed
in an approved manner such that no concrete or mortar can enter between the two split
portions of the flange.
(b) Workmanship
The Contractor shall furnish all materials, equipment and electric energy required for
making field splices and installing the waterstops. Field splices for waterstops shall be made
by cutting the waterstops as required, heating the ends to the melting point and jointing them
to form the desired splice. The heating of the splice ends shall be made by means of the
splicing machine recommended by the waterstop manufacturer or by any other approved
electric heating device.
(c) Types of Waterstops
(1) Rubber Waterstops - shall be fabricated from natural or synthetic rubber and shall
have the following characteristics:
Tensile strength, pounds per square inch, minimum - 2,100
Elongation at break, per cent, minimum - 450
119
Shore durometer (Type A) - 60 to 70
Change in volume, water immersion percent maximum
(two days at 70 degree Centigrade) -5
Ozone resistance (four hours at 90o + 50 o Fahrenheit) - No
Cracks
Tensile strength after oxygen pressure test (48 hours,
70 o Centigrade, 300 pounds psi) percent of
tensile strength before aging, minimum . - 80
(2) Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstops - shall be manufactured by extrusions process from
an elastometric plastic compound, the basic resin of which is 100 per cent polyvinyl chloride
(PVC). The product shall be dense, homogeneous and free from holes and other
imperfections, and shall have the following physical properties:
Specific gravity - 1.33 + 0.03 at 73o Fahrenheit
ASTM:D792
Tensile Strength - 2200 to 2500 psi at 73 o Fahrenheit
ASTM:D412
Ultimate Elongation - 360% to 400% at 73o Fahrenheit
ASTM:D412
Brittleness - 55o Fahrenheit temperature ASTM:D746
Durometer - 65-75 ASTM:D676
(d) Inspection and Tests
1. Rubber waterstop shall be tested in accordance with appropriate sections of Federal
Test Method Standard No. 601. The ozone concentration when tested shall be 85 to 100 parts
per million.
2. Polyvinyl Chloride waterstop shall be tested in conformity with the requirements of
Specifications CRD-C572 of the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers. It shall conform to the
ozone resistance required for rubber waterstop.
(e) Measurement and Payment
Measurement for payment of Rubber or PVC waterstops will be made for the number
of linear meters of waterstops acceptably placed and measured along the centerline of the
waterstop.
Payment for waterstop will be made at the contract unit price per linear meter, which
price and payment shall include all costs of furnishing, placing and testing of the Rubber or
PVC waterstop as described above.
2. PREFORMED JOINT FILLER (Bituminous type)
Preformed joint filler 25 millimeters in thickness shall be furnished and placed by the
Contractor in the joints where shown in the Drawings or as described by the Engineer. The
joint filler shall be preformed bituminous type (Asphalt or Tar) conforming to ASTM: D994-
71.
The preformed filler shall be cut and placed as shown on the Drawings. The filler
material shall be held securely in place against the completed side of an expansion joint by
120
copper or brass nails precast in the first placed concrete provided that an adhesive suitable for
the purpose may be used when approved. Joints in the filler material shall be made tight and
shall be taped so that mortar from the concrete will not seep into the joints or the joint filler
material. The joint filler shall be handled carefully and stored under cover away from the
direct rays of the sun in a manner so as to prevent damage to the materials.
Preformed strips of expansion joint filler shall be of such character as not to be
deformed or broken by ordinary handling when exposed to atmospheric conditions and shall
not become brittle in cold weather. Pieces of the joint filler that has been damaged shall be
rejected.
Measurement for payment of the preformed bituminous type joint filler will be in
square meters based on the required neat lines of filler acceptably placed, and the area of all
openings will be deducted.
Payment of the preformed bituminous type joint filler will be made at the contract unit
price per square meter, which price and payment shall include all cost of furnishing and
placing of the joint filler as described above.
3. JOINT SEALANT
a) General
Joints so designated on the drawings or cracks or where directed by the Engineer shall
be sealed with Thioflex 600 polysulphide liquid polymer. Thioflex 600 is a tough, rubber-like
substance which will seal the joints against infiltration of water throughout repeated cycles of
joint expansion and contraction. It is a combination of two materials, i.e., a base compound
and a curing agent. Thioflex 600 is packed in dual container tins containing the correct
proportions of base compound and curing agent. Thioflex 600 should be used as fresh as
possible and must be used before the date of expiration as marked on each pack. Thioflex 600
should be stored under dry conditions at temperature not exceeding 27oC (80oF).
b) Inspection and Tests
Each pack of the base compound and curing agent shall be subject to inspection and
approval by the NIA before acceptance or shipment. The NIA reserves the right to be present
to observe the manufacturing process.
Samples shall be submitted to the NIA for testing at least thirty (30) days before use.
Regardless of previous tests, material that has not been used after the expiry date as marked
on each pack shall be rejected,
The base compound and curing agent packed in dual container tins shall each identify
the name of the manufacturer, the manufacturer's lot number, the date of manufacture, expiry
date and shall bear instructions for mixing and application.
c) Materials
Materials shall conform to American Standards Association Specification A-116.1 -
1960.
d) Placing
Joints so designated on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer that are to be
sealed with thioflex 600 polysulphide liquid polymer shall be formed to the correct
dimensions and thoroughly cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All dirt, dust, mortar,
laitance, scale, oil, loose materials and other foreign materials must be removed by wire
brushing and where possible, the joints shall be blown out with compressed air. Wet joints
121
must be thoroughly dried by means of a hot air blower or a propane gas torch. Where so
designated these joints shall be primed with the approximate thioflex primer applied strictly
in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions prior to sealing. Thirty six (36)
liters of thioflex 600 will require one and one-tenth (1.1) liters of thioflex primer.
The sealing compound shall be applied to all designated joints with the use of Gun
Grade all in accordance with the manufacturer's standards conforming to the American
Standards Association Specification A-116.1-1960. The Gun Grade pack yields one and one-
half (1.5) liters of mixed materials.
e) Curing
The curing time of the mixed material will vary with temperature. High temperature
and low temperature will correspondingly decrease and increase the curing time. The
temperature of the material to which the thioflex 600 is applied as well as the ambient air
temperature will affect the setting and curing time. Since the mixed materials tends to heat up
as it cures, the setting and curing time can also be affected by the volume of material applied.
f) Method of Measurement
Joint sealant will be measured by the number of liters acceptably placed as shown on
the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
g) Basis of Payment
The joint sealant measured as provided above shall be paid at the contract unit price
per liter, which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all
materials, tools, labor and all incidental and subsidiary works necessary for the successful
completion of the work.
2104. JOINT IN BRIDGE DECK
Joints in bridge deck shall be formed with expanded polystyrene faced with tempered
hardboard on the side of the polystyrene against which concrete is to be placed.
Upon completion of the deck, the joint shall be saw cut as shown in the Drawings and
the joint sealed. Saw cutting of the deck at curbs shall be completed prior to construction of
the curb.
Grooves shall be saw-cut with a self-propelled concrete saw fitted with diamond
blades and equipped with an accurate depth indicator. Grooves shall be within a tolerance of
0.3 centimeter of the depth and width shown in the drawings. Following saw cutting, the lip
of the groove shall be ground as shown in the drawings.
Prior to sealing the saw-cut joint in the bridge decks, expansion joint filler, hardboard,
concrete spillage, and other materials shall be removed from the waterstop and the joint
washed with water under pressure followed with abrasive blast cleaning and high pressure air
jets to remove all residue. Expansion shall be removed from the entire depth of joints in deck
slab overhangs, curbs, sidewalks, and railings. Waterstop shall be protected from abrasive
blast cleaning in an approved manner. Joint surfaces shall be dry at the time the sealer is
placed.
Except otherwise provided, payment for joints in bridge deck shall be included in the
unit contract price of concrete for which they are required.
2105. GROUT
122
Grout shall be composed of portland cement, sand and water proportioned and mixed
as specified in this Paragraph.
Grout shall be furnished and placed in recesses and holes, on surfaces, under
structural members, and at other locations as shown in the drawings or as specified by the
Engineer.
The proportion of cement to sand measured by volume, shall be one to two. Materials
shall conform to the provisions of Section XV, Concrete. The water cement ratio shall not
exceed 0.50. The grout shall be mixed until smooth and free of lumps, but in no case mixed
less than three minutes. Grout which is not placed within 45 minutes after mixing shall be
wasted.
Concrete areas to be in contact with grout shall be cleaned of all loose or foreign
materials that would in any way prevent bond between the grout and the concrete surfaces
and shall be kept thoroughly moistened with water for a period of not less than 24 hours
immediately prior to placing of the grout. After placing, all surfaces of grout shall be cured.
Payment of work for Grouting, unless otherwise specified, shall be considered included in
the various items in the Bill of Quantities where it is required
SECTION XXII. DOWELS
2201. SCOPE
The work under this Section shall include drilling holes, installation of dowels and
placing of cement grout as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
The installation of dowels shall follow the sequence of construction in the structure.
Where the thickness of any portion of the concrete structure is variable, the length of the
dowels will vary uniformly between the dimensions shown on the Drawings.
2202. MATERIALS
Dowels shall be deformed steel bars provided with a square nut threaded into the end
of the bar, and the shape and size shall be as shown on the detailed Drawings.
All the applicable provisions of Section XV shall be considered included under this
Section.
a) Drilling of Dowel Holes

The contractor shall drill holes on the existing concrete structures to the size and
depth as shown in the Drawings by using a rotary drilling equipment. Spacing of dowel holes
shall be in accordance with the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
b) Installation of Dowels
Dowels shall be installed to its full length on the dowel holes drilled as provided in
subparagraph (a) above. Spaces between the dowels and holes shall be filled with cement
grout to securely hold the dowels in place in accordance with the Drawings or as directed by
the Engineer.
123
The grout shall consist of a mixture of one part by volume of Portland cement and one
and a half parts by volume of water unless ordered otherwise by the Engineer.
Dowels or the installation of dowels will not be measured for payment. What will be
measured for payment is the drilling of dowel holes. Measurement will be made by the linear
meter of acceptably drilled dowel holes computed to the neat lines as shown on the Drawings.
Payment shall be made at the contract unit price per linear meter which price and payment
shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all labor, tools and equipment including
materials and other incidentals necessary for the installation of dowels described under this
Section.
SECTION XXIII. REINFORCING STEEL BARS
2301. SCOPE
All reinforcing steel bars required for the works as detailed in the Construction
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer shall be furnished by the Contractor.
The work under this Section includes the hauling of all reinforcing steel bars required
for the works to the project site, storing, cutting, bending and proper placing, all in
accordance with the drawings and these Specifications.
The length for each size of reinforcing steel bar to be furnished by the Contractor
shall be computed by taking the theoretical length of steel bars shown on the drawings
multiplied by 1.07 to get the approximate length required for the work. All reinforcing steel
bars shall be furnished in commercial standard lengths and the Contractor shall cut and bend
the reinforcing steel bars to the detail and dimensions shown on the Drawings.
2302. MATERIALS
All reinforcing steel bars to be furnished by the Contractor shall be Grade 40 or PS

275, deformed type and conforming to the requirements of ASTM A-615. The nominal
dimensions and unit weights of bar designation shall be in accordance with the following
table:
Nominal Bar Unit Weight Nominal Dimensions
Diameter (kg/m.) Cross Section Perimeter
Area (sq.mm.) (mm.)
6 mm 0.222 28.27 18.85
8 mm 0.395 50.2 25.13
10 mm 0.616 78.54 31.42
12 mm 0.888 113.10 37.70
124
16 mm 1.579 201.10 50.27
20 mm 2.466 314.20 62.83
25 mm 3.854 491.90 78.54
28 mm 4.833 615.75 87.96
32 mm. 6.313 804.25 100.53
36 mm. 7.991 1,017.90 113.10
The nominal diameter of a deformed bar is equivalent to the diameter of a plain bar
having the same weight per unit length of the deformed bar.
2303. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENT
Workmanship shall be at the highest grade and shall be in accordance with the latest
standard practice of the industry.
1. Cutting and Bending. Cutting and bending of reinforcing bars may be done in
shop or at the job site. All bending works shall be in accordance with the latest standard
practice and by approved machine methods. Radii for bends and hooks will be specified on
the approved detailed reinforcement Drawings in accordance with sound design procedures.
2. Placing. Reinforcement shall be laid, anchored and embedded in the concrete as
shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Unless otherwise directed, the spacing
of reinforcement bars shall be measured along the center line of the bars. Reinforcement shall
be inspected for compliance with requirements as to size, length, splicing, position and
number after placement based on the approved reinforcement drawings.
Before reinforcement are placed, the surfaces of the bars and the surfaces of any metal
bar support shall be cleaned of heavy flaky rust, loose scales, dirt, grease or other foreign
substance which, in the opinion of the Engineer, are objectionable. Heavy flaky rust that
can be removed by firm rubbing with burlap or equivalent treatment is considered
objectionable. After being placed, the reinforcing bars shall be maintained in a clean
condition until completely embedded in concrete.
Reinforcing bars shall be accurately placed and secured in position so as to avoid
displacement during the pouring of concrete. Special care shall be exercised to prevent any
disturbance of the embedded reinforcement during the setting of concrete. Metal chairs,
hangers, spacers or other approved support may be used by the Contractor for supporting
reinforcing bars. Metal supports shall be galvanized when they are to be exposed to view on
completed concrete surfaces or where it is use will contribute in any way to the discoloration
or deterioration of the concrete.
3. Relation of Bars to Concrete Surfaces. The minimum cover for all reinforcements
shall conform to the dimensions shown on the detailed reinforcement Drawings.
4. Splicing. All splices in reinforcement shall be as shown on the Drawings or as
directed by the Engineer. The lapped ends to bars shall be either supported sufficiently to
permit the embedment of the entire surface of each bar in concrete or shall be securely wired.
5. Welding. Welding of bars shall be performed only where shown on the Drawings or
as authorized in writing by the Engineer and shall conform to the requirements of AWS:
D12.1, latest revision. All welders employed shall show proof of their welding qualifications
to the Engineer. All welding shall be done using metal arc welding, pressure gas welding,
submerged arc welding or thermit welding. All electric shall be acceptable to NIA. Coverings
of low hydrogen electrodes must be thoroughly dry when used. The surfaces to be welds shall
125
be clean and shall be free from rust and dirt. All welds shall develop the full strength of the
bar or the smaller bar when two different sizes are welded. Test will be required of not more
than five percent of the welds. Approved testing equipment for testing welds shall be
furnished by Contractor.
6. Protection. Reinforcement to remain exposed and intended for future concrete
embedment shall be protected from corrosion or other damages in an approved manner where
directed. The reinforcement protection shall be of such nature that it can be thoroughly
cleaned without difficulty prior to encasement in concrete.
2304. PREPARATION OF REINFORCEMENT DRAWINGS
Contractor shall submit for the approval of NIA detailed reinforcement drawings in
accordance with Article GC-47. These drawings will include bar-placing drawings, bar
bending drawings, bar list, and any other reinforcement drawings as may be required to
facilitate placement and checking of reinforcing bars. No work shall be done by contractor
until such approval has been secured from NIA.
The Reinforcement Drawings submitted shall show the name of the structure location
by stationing where the reinforcement drawings is intended and all the necessary information
required by NIA. It shall likewise bear the stamp or seal of Contractor as evidence that the
Drawings have been checked by Contractor.
Contractor shall be held responsible for any delay in the progress of the work
occasioned by his failure to observe the requirements and the time for the completion of the
contract will not be extended on account of his failure to promptly submit said drawings in
strict adherence herewith.
2305. SAMPLING FOR TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE OF MATERIALS

THAT FAIL TO MEET CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS (FOR STEEL BARS
FURNISHED BY CONTRACTOR)
Sampling of reinforcing steel bars furnished by the Contractor for incorporation in the
Permanent Works shall be carried out by NIA at the manufacturer's stockyard before delivery
to the project site. The NIA authorized representative shall, at random, take two
representative samples of reinforcing steel bars per lot covered by the manufacturer's mill
certificate. A lot shall consist of all steel bars of the same heat or blow as shown in the mill
certificate, and the same nominal cross-section and grade. Samples shall be tested at the
manufacturer's testing laboratory, if any, or to any approved Government testing laboratory at
Contractor's expense. A lot or lots represented by samples tested which failed to meet
specified requirements shall be rejected and will not be counted for delivery to the project
site. Sampling and testing shall be in accordance with ASTM requirements. All deliveries
shall be subject to prior approval of NIA.
The NIA reserves the right to accept steel bars that fail to meet the contract
requirement provided that the deficiency is not more than nine percent (9%) of the
requirement per each type of test and provided further that a corresponding reduction in the
unit price will be made. The percentage of reduction equal to the percentage of deficiency
based on the minimum requirement of the ASTM A-615 Standard. For example, if the value
of the test result for one type of test is five per cent (5%) below the minimum requirement,
the unit price for payment will be reduced by 5%. If the non-compliance with the test
requirements is on two or more tests, the price reduction will be the summation of the
percentage of the deficiencies.
126
A. Furnishing and Stockpiling

Measurement for payment for the furnishing and stockpiling of reinforcing steel bars
shall be made on the actual deliveries to the project site and after presentation of the
following documents:
a. Delivery receipt duly acknowledged by the Engineer and the Project Auditor or their
duly authorized representatives
b. Manufacturer's certificate showing the details of manufacture, composition and
physical properties of the steel bars.
c. Certificate of acceptance by the Engineer of the actual quantity delivered at the site
B. Cutting, Bending and Placing
Measurement for payment of reinforcing steel bars will be made on the weight of
reinforcing steel bars actually placed with the concrete structure and drilled holes for
anchorage in accordance with the Drawings and Bar Schedule approved by NIA or as
directed by the Engineer and weights will be computed based on the published manufacturer's
weights or in the absence thereof, on the weights specified in the table presented in Paragraph
2302. Steel bars in laps or splices indicated in the approved rein-forcement Drawings, as
required by NIA will be measured for payment. Additional steel bars in laps which are
authorized for the convenience of the Contractor and such items as wires, clips, chairs, or
other devices for securing the steel bars in place will not be measured for payment. Where
weld splices are specified on the Drawings, weld splices will not be measured for payment
but the weight for its equivalent lap splices will be measured for payment instead. Where
contractor chooses to weld reinforcement bars for his convenience and welding is not
specified, no separate payment will be made for such welds. Where Contractor substitute
welded splices for lapped splices, separate payment will not be made for such welds, but
instead the weight for the lapped splices shown on the Drawings will be measured for
payment.
Payment for reinforcing steel bars measured as provided above, will be paid for at the
contract unit price per kilogram which price and payment shall constitute full compensation
for furnishing all labor, tools, equipment and all incidentals and subsidiary works necessary
As indicated in the Bill of Quantities, payment per kilogram of reinforcing steel bars
(same measurement as provided above) shall be made separately and in accordance with the
following schedule:
a. Ninety percent (90%) of furnishing and delivery cost which shall include all labor,
tools, equipment and supplies involved in the manufacture, and delivery to the project
site which includes loading, hauling, unloading and stockpiling at the delivery site;
b. Ten percent (10%) of furnishing and delivery cost shall be paid upon successful
completion of the works under this Section.
c. installation cost which shall include all labor, tools and equipment involved in cutting,
bending and placing into permanent structures and all incidentals necessary for the
successful completion of the work under this Section.
127
SECTION XXIV. REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPES
2401. SCOPE
The work under this Section shall include furnishing or the fabrication or manufacture
of reinforced concrete pipes, laying or installation including jointing and construction of
collars of the reinforced concrete pipes for culverts, drainage crossings and other structures as
shown on the Drawings and at such other places designated by the Engineer all in accordance
with the Drawings and these Specifications. All reinforcing bars to be used in the fabrication
or manufacture of reinforced concrete pipes shall be furnished by the Contractor.
2402. TYPES OF R.C. PIPES
The type of reinforced concrete pipes as shown on the Drawings shall be as follows:
1. Type A-1 Pipes subjected to 10-ton truck loading with minimum of 60 cm overfill
2. Type A-2 Pipes subjected to 20-ton truck loading with minimum of 60 cm overfill
2403. MATERIALS
The quality of materials shall conform to the applicable provisions of Section XV,
Concrete and Section XXIII, Reinforcing Steel Bars.
Concrete for pipes shall be Class "Y" which shall have a cement factor of 392.12
kilograms per cubic meter of concrete and a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 pounds
per square inch in 28 days. The maximum size of aggregates shall be one half inch.
Reinforcing bars shall be as indicated in the Drawings. Lapping of ends of the ring bars shall
not be less than 48 bar diameter.
2404. MANUFACTURE OF R.C. PIPES
Under these specifications, the Contractor could purchase finished products of R.C.
pipes or fabricate them in accordance with these specifications.
The pipes shall meet the requirements of the standard specifications for Reinforced
Concrete Culvert Pipes ASTM: C361-571 or latest revision. The pipes manufactured
according to these specifications shall further meet the requirements as specified on the
Drawings.
For pipes with one line of circumferential reinforcement, the nominal protective
covering of concrete over the ring bars shall be 25% to 50% of the shell thickness reckoned
from the inner surface of the pipe. For pipes with two lines of circumferential reinforcement,
the following shall be adhered to:
1. Each line of circumferential reinforcement shall be assembled into a cage which
shall contain sufficient member of longitudinal tie bars.
2. The distance between the two layers shall not be less than the diameter of the
longitudinal tie bars plus 1/4 inch.
3. The two line layers shall be provided with spaces and tied together to form a
single rigid cage.
128
For 20 centimeters R.C. Pipes (and smaller diameter) the thickness shall be 0.5
centimeters and reinforced with 3-strand barbed wire consisting of 10 centimeters pitch spiral
and six longitudinal ties.
2405. INSPECTION, SAMPLING AND TESTING
R.C. Pipes to be fabricated or manufactured by the Contractor shall be subject to

periodic inspection by NIA during the process of fabrication or manufacture. Sampling for
testing shall be done during said inspection. R.C. Pipes purchased by Contractor shall be
sampled for testing after delivery to Contractor's stockyard.
Sampling for test, not more than three pieces, shall be taken at random among the
pipes in a lot. A lot shall consist of 50 pieces of the same size and type delivered at a time to
Contractor's stockyard.
The lot represented by the samples tested which failed to meet the specified
requirements shall be rejected and Contractor shall immediately remove from the stockyard
the pipes comprising the lot.
The samples for testing shall be tested in accordance with ASTM: C-497, and shall
meet the physical requirements of ASTM: C-76. Cost for sampling and testing shall be at the
expense of Contractor. Pipes with injurious defects revealed subsequent to acceptance of
pipes at Contractor's stockyard or fabrication site shall be rejected.
2406. REJECTION
R.C. pipes shall be subject to rejection on account of failure to meet any of the
specification requirements. Individual sections of the pipe maybe rejected due to the
following:
1. Fractures or cracks passing through the wall, except for a single end crack that
does not exceed the depth of joint.
2. Defects that indicate imperfect proportioning, making and molding.
3. Surface defects indicating honeycombed or open texture.
4. Damaged ends, where such damage would prevent making a satisfactory joint.
2407. MARKING
The following information shall be clearly marked on each section of R.C. Pipes
delivered:
1. The type of pipes, A-1, A-2 or A-3 and so on, and the diameter for the proper
identification of the pipe.
2. Date manufactured, and trade-mark of the manufacturer if purchased from other
manufacturers.
2408. CURING
Reinforced Concrete Pipes shall be cured in accordance with the provisions

prescribed in Section XV, "Concrete".
2409. TRANSPORTATION AND DELIVERY OF R. C. PIPES
129
Contractor shall load and transport the R.C. Pipes to the installation site in a manner
as to avoid damage to pipes. The R.C. Pipes shall be handled carefully with belt slings or
other approved devices. The width of belt or other approved handling devices shall be
adequate to prevent any damage. The R.C. Pipes shall be at no time be dropped but shall be
lowered carefully and slowly into position. Any R.C. Pipe damaged during loading from the
Manufacturer's plant or Contractor's fabrication site, or when in transit to the delivery site, or
during unloading, or during installation will be rejected.
2410. EXCAVATION
Excavation for R.C. Pipes shall be performed in accordance with Section VI,
Structure Excavation. Notwithstanding the provisions of Section VI, where rock or other
unyielding materials will be encountered, the rock or unyielding materials shall be similarly
removed to a depth not less than 15 cm. below the established grade and shall be refilled with
suitable materials thoroughly compacted throughout. Recesses shall be excavated for any
collar involve.
2411. LAYING OR INSTALLATION OF R.C. PIPES
The R.C. Pipes shall be laid carefully, ends fully and closely jointed, and true to the
lines and grades as shown on the Drawings. Belts or other approved devices shall be provided
for lowering the pipes when they are placed in trench. Each pipe section shall be securely
attached to the adjoining sections unless otherwise specified, shall be filled with stiff mortar
composed of one part Portland cement and one-half parts of sand. Cement, sand and water
shall conform to the requirements for these materials given for concrete. The mortar shall be
placed so as to form a durable, water-tight joint. After each section of pipe is laid and before
the succeeding section is laid, the lower portion of the hub shall be plastered thoroughly on
the inside with mortar to such depth as to bring the inner surfaces of the abutting pipes flush
and even. After the section is laid, the remainder of the joint shall then be wiped and finished
smooth. After the initial set, the mortar on the outside shall be protected from the air and sun
with a cover thoroughly wetted earth or burlap. After the setting of the mortar of the joint, the
construction of the reinforced concrete collar shall be done in accordance with the drawings.
Any pipe which is not in true alignment or which shows any undue settlement after being
laid, or is damaged shall be removed and relaid or replaced without extra compensation.
2412. BACKFILLING
After the pipes have been installed and the mortar joints and reinforced concrete
sufficiently set, selected materials from excavation or borrow shall be placed alongside the
pipes in layer not exceeding 15 centimeters, in thickness and compacted thoroughly. The
backfilling of pipes shall be done simultaneously at both sides and shall conform with the
provisions prescribed in Section XII, Structure Backfill. When the construction calls for
placing high embankment over the pipes, special instruction regarding the method of
backfilling shall be given by the Engineer.
Reinforced Concrete Pipes of the various sizes and types specified in the Bill of
Quantities will be measured by the number of pieces or by the number of linear meter of pipe
as specified in the Bill of Quantities furnished and acceptably installed, jointed and provided
with collar.
130
The various sizes and types of pipes measured as provided above will be paid at the
contract unit price per linear meter of the respective types and sizes of R.C. pipes.
As indicated in the Bill of Quantities, payment per piece shall be made separately for
the:
a) Furnishing and delivery cost which shall include all labor, tools, equipment,
supplies and other incidentals involve in the manufacture and delivery to the site
which includes loading, hauling, unloading and stockpiling at the delivery site.
b) Installation cost which shall include all labor, tools, equipment involved and all
incidentals necessary for the successful completion of the work under this
Section.
The cost of collars in R.C. pipes are considered included in the contract unit price of
installation per linear meter of R.C. pipes.
Excavation and backfilling works are not considered subsidiary works under this
Section, hence payments shall be made under "Structure Excavation" and "Structure
Backfill", respectively in the Bill of Quantities.
SECTION XXV. BOULDER RIPRAP
2501. SCOPE
The work under this Section shall include furnishing and placing the boulders and
spalls of appropriate sizes of filler stones or precast concrete blocks for riprap on the prepared
subgrade, all in accordance with the Drawings and these Specifications or as directed by the
Engineer. Boulders and spalls shall be obtained from sources designated by the Engineer.
2502. MATERIALS
Rocks, boulders or stone materials for riprap shall be hard, dense, durable, and free of
fissures or defects that would tend to foster deterioration from natural causes. Rock or
boulder materials shall have specific gravity of not less than 2.6, saturated surface dry when
tested as specified in the Department of Water Resources Manual of "Testing Procedures for
Soils", Designation 508, Parts C and D.
The shape of the rock or boulders shall be such that the minimum dimension of a rock
or boulders is not less than 50% of the maximum dimension.
The sizes of rocks or boulders or precast concrete blocks shall be as specified on the
Drawings. If precast concrete blocks is specified in the Bill of Quantities, materials shall
conform to the applicable provisions of Section XV, Concrete and Section XXIII,
Reinforcing Steel Bars, and shall also be in accordance with the Drawings or as directed by
the Engineer. All reinforcing bars to be used in the fabrication of precast concrete blocks
shall be supplied by Contractor unless otherwise specified in the Bill of Quantities.
Boulder riprap shall be placed immediately following completion of the embankment,

channel or section of the structure involved, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
131
On the prepared gravel blanket or subgrade, the boulders shall be laid and arranged
properly as shown on the Drawings to offer maximum resistance to displacement due to high
water velocity. Spalls of appropriate size filler stones shall be placed to fill spaces between
the boulders. The rocks or boulders for riprap and boulder rockfill bank protection, after
placement in their final position, shall conform to the lines and grades as shown on the
Drawings.
Boulder riprap or boulder rockfill specified on the Drawings will be measured by the
number of cubic meter of materials acceptably placed and computed based on the neat lines
as shown on the Drawings.
Precast concrete blocks if specified in the Bill of Quantities will be measured by the
number of cubic meter of materials acceptably fabricated and placed in accordance with the
Drawings.
2505. BASIS 0F PAYMENT
The volumes measured as provided above shall be paid for at the respective contract
unit price per cubic meter, which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for
furnishing all materials (except reinforcing bars for precast concrete blocks (if supplied by
NIA), supplies, labor, tools, equipment and other incidentals or subsidiary works necessary
for the successful completion of the work under this Section. Any excavation involved under
this Section, is not considered a subsidiary work, hence it will not be measured for payment
under this Section. Rather, it will be measured and paid for under "Structure Excavation".
SECTION XXVI. GABION-TYPE RIPRAP
2601. SCOPE
The work under this section shall include the construction of Gabion-type Riprap on
places indicated on the drawings. It shall include the formation of rectangular baskets or
mattresses where boulders are to be contained, strongly made of hexagonal woven mesh (8cm
x 10cm) with joints formed by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns. All wires
shall be galvanized and with nominal wire diameter of 2.70 mm, strengthened with selvedges
of heavier wire or No. 3 bar and by mesh diaphragm which divide into the number of
compartments shown on the drawings. The collection or furnishing of boulder for this type of
riprap shall be the responsibility of the contractor.
Interlink galvanized wire mesh shall be placed or laid by the Contractor to the site in
flat form simply folded into its shape according to the Drawings by raising the side and end
panels to the vertical. The lid, however, is separate and not hinged to the mattress. All
sections shall be securely wired together in position to form the required retaining or anti-
erosion structure.
First, the sides and ends including the internal partitions shall be raised to the vertical
position, and held there temporarily by bending the selvedge galvanized wire or #3 bar,
which protrudes from the partition tops, over the sides. then pull out a sufficient length of the
132
helical wire which joins each partition to the base, and lace the ends of the partitions
permanently to the sides. Lacing shall be continuous without short twists at intervals.
The interlink galvanized wire, when filling operation is ready, shall be carried to its
final position on the structure, and tied securely to the adjacent interlink galvanized wire. On
slopes, the longer dimension should lie up and down the slope, and the widths and partitions
across the slope. On short slopes, the interlink galvanized wire shall be cut as directed by the
engineer to suit the field conditions.
Filling operation shall be done at the option of the Contractor either by hand or
machine, provided the stone shall be tightly packed, with a minimum of voids. Filling shall
start with the bottom compartment if on a slope, and should be staked if the slope is steeper
than 1:1.5.
The fill should be between one-third and two-thirds the thickness. The Contractor
shall slightly over-full its thickness in order to allow for settlement. After it has been filled,
the lid shall be securely wired down to the tops of the sides, ends and partitions.
On slopes under water, the gabion-filled mattress may be placed by sliding them into
position from a pontoon or lowering them from a crane.
Measurement for payment for the construction of gabion-type riprap shall be made on
the number of cubic meters laid and accepted based on the dimensions shown on the
Drawings.
The volume measured as provided above shall be paid at the contract unit price per cubic
meter, which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all
materials, tools, labor and equipment including all incidentals and subsidiary works necessary
SECTION XXVII. GROUTED RIPRAP
2701. SCOPE
The work under this Section shall include furnishing and placing appropriate sizes of
stones or spalls for riprap and grouting the riprap with cement mortar, in accordance with the
Drawings and these Specifications or as directed by the Engineer. The stones and spalls shall
be obtained from quarry areas or stockpile areas designated by the Engineer.
2702. MATERIALS
Stones for riprap shall be at least 15 centimeters in diameter and shall be sound,
tough, durable, dense and resistant to the action of air and water with a specific gravity of at
least two and six tenths (2.6).
Mortar for grouted riprap shall consist of one part cement to three parts sand by
volume and sufficient water to produce a thick and creamy mixture conforming to the
provisions of Section XV, Concrete.
133
A) NON-SLOPING GROUTED RIPRAP

The foundation bed shall be moistened, well compacted and brought to the required
elevation. The stones shall be well laid with close joints by hands. The stones shall be well
arranged in such a manner that the stones can resist disturbance. If big spaces occur between
stones and formation bed, said spaces shall be well packed with spall of appropriate sizes of
stones. The stones so arranged shall be moistened before placing the grout. All spaces
between the stones shall be completely filled with grout from bottom to top and the surface
swept with stiff broom. The first layer shall consist of at least 15 centimeters mortar and the
boulders should be embedded in this mortar. Thus the mortar poured is worked into the
interstices so that the whole mass of boulders from bottom to top is covered and connected
with mortar and will act as one mass. The grouted riprap shall be cured with water for a
minimum period of three (3) days.
B) SLOPING GROUTED RIPRAP
The slope where the grouted riprap is going to be constructed should be well cured
and compacted and trimmed to the required grade and elevation. If the grouted riprap is on
the slopes of the embankment , the embankment is constructed to the required degree of
compaction. The first layer of 15 centimeters thick mortar should be laid to a height of 60
centimeters to 90 centimeters and to a length which can be handled conveniently so that there
is no initial set of mortar. The stones shall be well laid with close joints by hands and shall be
well arranged in such a manner that the stones can resist disturbances. If big spaces occur
between stones and formation bed, said spaces shall be well packed with spalls of appropriate
sizes of stones. The stones so arranged shall be moistened before placing the grout. This will
act as base to the subsequent lifts. The next lift can be 1 to 1.25 meters height. Thus the
whole sloping grouted riprap should be constructed in 1 to 1.25 meters height lifts at a time.
All spaces between the stones shall be completely filled with grout from bottom to top and
the surfaces swept with stiff broom. Thus the mortar poured is worked into the interstices so
that the whole mass of boulders from bottom to top is covered and connected with mortar and
will act as one mass. The grouted riprap shall be cured with water for a period of three (3)
days.
The general construction procedure should be always to start from lowest elevations.
Grouted riprap will be measured by the number of cubic meter of materials acceptably
placed and computed based on the neat lines as shown on the Drawings.
The volume measured as provided above shall be paid at the contract unit price per
labor, tools, equipment, supplies and materials and all incidentals or subsidiary works
necessary for the successful completion of the work described under this Section. Excavation
involved under this Section is not considered a subsidiary work hence, it will not be measured
for payment under this Section. Rather, it will be measured and paid for under "Structure
Excavation".
134
SECTION XXVIII. GRAVEL BLANKET
2801. SCOPE
The work under this Section shall include furnishing, placing on approved subgrade
and compacting the graded sand and gravel to the thickness indicated on the Drawings or as
established by the Engineer.
If required on the drawings, the furnishing and installation of filter fabric shall also be
included in this Section.
2802. MATERIALS
Materials for the gravel blanket shall meet all the requirements for 50 mm coarse
aggregate specified in paragraph 1507.
2803. PLACING
The material shall be dumped on the prepared subgrade and spread in layers having an
uncompacted thickness of not more than 25 centimeters. Each layer shall be compacted to
achieve a relative density of 70% as determined by USBR Test E-12 by four complete passes
of a vibratory compactor. The Contractor has the option to adopt any method of compacting
the layers of materials approved by the Engineer.
If filter fabric is required on the drawings, the Contractor shall install or lay said
fabric on prepared subgrade prior to dumping of materials.
Gravel Blanket will be measured by the cubic meter of materials acceptably placed
and computed based on the neat lines and dimensions shown on the Drawings.
If materials placed by the contractor are more than what is required, the excess
materials will not be measured for payment.
Filter fabric shall be measured separately and shall be paid in accordance with the
provisions of Section XXIX, Filter Drain.
The volume measured as provided above shall be paid at the unit contract price per
materials, supplies, labor, tools, equipment and all incidentals or subsidiary works necessary
Excavation involved under this Section is not considered a subsidiary work, hence it will not
be measured for payment under this Section. Rather, it will be measured and paid for under
Structure Excavation.
SECTION XXIX. FILTER DRAIN
2901. SCOPE
135
The work under this Section shall include furnishing, placing on approved subgrade
and compacting graded sand and gravel in layers and to the thickness and dimensions
indicated on the Drawings, including furnishing and construction of weep holes to provide
outlet for filter and flap valve, if any, all in accordance with these Specifications or as
directed by the Engineer.
2902. MATERIALS
Filter materials shall consist of unweathered sand and gravel obtained from river bed
deposits or from designated quarries. To meet the gradation requirements, crushing, screening
and washing may be required. The materials shall be composed of tough, durable particles,
reasonably free from thin, flat and elongated pieces and shall be well graded between the
following limits:
U. S. Standard Percent Passing by Weight
Seive Size 1st Stage 2nd Stage 3rd Stage Bedding
2 inches 100 100
1 inch 100 5-35 70-90
1/2 inch 100 90-100 0-5 45-75
No. 4 85-100 70-90 25-60
No. 8 70-95 40-75 15-45
No. 30 25-70 0-20
No. 50 5-50
No. 100 0-30
No. 200 0-10
The bed for the filter drain shall be excavated to the required elevation and dimension
shown on the Drawings and then properly compacted as directed by the Engineer. The
materials shall be damped and spread on the prepared bed and each layer shall be compacted
by a suitable compactor to a degree approved by the Engineer. Placement of succeeding
layers will be allowed only after the Engineer has approved the placement and compaction of
the preceding layer. When concrete is to be placed directly on the filter, the entire surface
upon which concrete is to be placed shall be covered with a layer of reinforced building paper
before concrete is placed.
Filter drain will be measured by the number of cubic meter of materials acceptably
laid, compacted and provided with weepholes for outlets and flap valves, if any.
The volume measured as provided above shall be paid at the contract unit price,
which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials,
supplies, labor, equipment, tools and all incidentals or subsidiary works necessary for the
successful completion of the work described under this Section. Reinforced building paper
136
required to cover the filter shall be included in the unit bid price for applicable concreting
works.
SECTION XXX. PLAIN CONCRETE DRAIN PIPES
3001. SCOPE
of plain concrete drain pipes (sizes are shown on the Drawings), and installation to include
jointing all in accordance with the Drawings and these Specifications or as directed by the
Engineer.
3002. MATERIALS
Materials to be used in the fabrication of plain concrete drain pipes shall be in

accordance with the applicable provisions of Section XV, Concrete. Concrete for drain pipes
shall be Class "Y" which shall have a cement factor of 392.12 kilograms (kgs.) per cubic
meter of concrete and a minimum compressive strength of 210 kilograms per square
centimeter at 28 days. The minimum size of aggregate shall be 12.5 mm.
Sampling for testing as may be required by the Engineer shall be made in accordance
with the applicable provisions of Section XXIV, Reinforced Concrete Pipes.
3003. LAYING OR INSTALLATION OF PIPES
Plain concrete drain pipes shall be laid carefully, ends fully and closely jointed, ends
true to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. All joints, unless otherwise specified,
shall be filled with stiff mortar composed of one part Portland Cement and one and one-half
parts of sand. The mortar shall be placed so as to form a durable and watertight joint. After
each section of pipe is laid or installed and before the next section is laid, the lower portion of
the hub shall be plastered thoroughly on the inside with mortar to such depth as to bring the
inner surfaces of the abutting pipes flush and even. Any pipe which is not in true alignment or
which shows any undue settlement after being laid, or is damaged, shall be removed and
replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
Plain concrete drain pipes will be measured per linear meter furnished and acceptably
installed.
The total number of pipe length in meters measured as provided above shall be paid at
the contract unit price per linear meter, which price and payment shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment and all incidentals or
subsidiary works necessary for the successful completion of the work described under this
Section.
137
SECTION XXXI. REINFORCED CONCRETE PILES
3101. SCOPE
of Pre-stressed Concrete bearing Piles (Reinforced Concrete Piles), driving, splicing or built
up and cutting off of reinforced concrete piles for bridge structures or any other special
structures and shall include all incidentals necessary for the successful completion of the
work all in accordance with these Specifications or as directed by the Engineer. All
reinforcing bars shall be furnished by Contractor unless otherwise specified in the Bill of
Quantities.
The requirements herein and as specified on the Drawings are minimum. Strict
compliance with these requirements or specifications will not relieve the contractor of the
responsibility for adopting whatever additional provisions that may be necessary to insure the
successful completion of the work.
3102. FABRICATION
The kind and type of piles shall be precast type. The piles shall be precasted in
accordance with the plans, and reinforcements shall be placed accurately and rigidly secured
in such a manner so as to insure its proper position in the completed pile and shall be
witnessed and approved by NIA or its duly authorized representatives. For bearing piles, the
pre-stressed tendons shall be stressed before concrete is poured. The lengths indicated in the
Drawings are for estimating purposes only and Contractor shall be required to obtain NIA’s
approval before casting them.
For piles longer than 18 meters, splicing can be done to ease up delivery and driving.
The minimum length of a splice members shall be 9 meters. Splicing will be in accordance
with the manufacturer's standard. However, before the casting of any bearing pile to be
spliced, the Contractor shall submit for approval the method to be used, as recommended by
the manufacturer.
The concrete shall be class "A" and must have a required 28-day compressive strength
of 210 kilograms per square centimeter and shall meet all the requirements of Section XV
"Concrete". The maximum size of aggregate shall not be larger than 25 mm. in any case. The
cement and reinforcing steel bars shall conform to the requirements of AASHO 185 (ASTM
C-150) and AASHO M31 (ASTM A-15), latest revisions, respectively. The size and
dimensions of reinforcements shall be as shown on the Drawings.
Centers of main reinforcing bars shall not be closer than 6 cm. to the surface of the
concrete. Concrete shall be compacted, using vibrators and supplementary spading and
finished as specified in Section XV, Concrete. The piles shall be separated by tar paper
properly placed. Pouring or placing concrete in the forms shall be done continuously. The
finished piles shall be free from stone pockets, porous spots or other defects and shall be
straight and true to the form specified.
Forms shall be true to line and built of dressed lumber or steel. A 2.5 centimeters
chamfer strip shall be used in all corners. Forms shall be watertight and shall not be removed
within 24 hours after the concrete is placed.
Piles shall be cured at least 28 days except that where high early strength cement is
used, curing time may be reduced to seven days. Piles shall not be transported to the Project
Site until test indicates a compressive strength equal to the specified 28 days compressive
138
strength. When these piles are moved or lifted, they shall be supported at the quarter points or
as shown in the plans approved by NIA or as directed by the Engineer.
Pile shoes, when required shall be in accordance with the approved design as shown
on the Drawings.
3103. LOCATION AND SITE PREPARATION
Piles shall be driven to places specified on the Drawings or in places designated by

the Engineer.
Before driving piles, the Contractor must see to it that all excavations for foundation
in which piles are to be driven shall be complete. After driving is completed all loose and
displaced materials shall be removed from around the piles, leaving clean solid surface to
receive concrete.
3104. TESTING
For testing purposes, the Contractor shall provide one cylinder sample taken from
every 20 cubic meter of concrete or fraction thereof. Test specimens shall be made and cured
in accordance with ASTM: C39 and Designation 33 of the seventh edition of the Bureau of
Reclamation of Concrete Manual or its latest revision. Test results of concrete to be
considered shall be the average strength of all the representative samples required. The
standard age of test shall be 28 days, but seven days maybe used with the permission of NIA,
provided, that the relation between the seven days and 28 days strength of the concrete is
established by tests for the materials and mix proportions used.
NIA reserves the right to reject any or all concrete piles not meeting the required or
specified strength.
3105. DRIVING CONCRETE PILES
All piles shall be driven as shown on the Drawings or as ordered in writing by the
Engineer with the use of an equipment acceptable to NIA.
When water jets are used the number of jets and the nozzle volume and pressure shall
be sufficient to freely erode the materials adjacent to the piling. The equipment to be used
shall have sufficient capacity under working conditions, to maintain and deliver at all times a
pressure at least 7 kilograms per square centimeter at two 19 millimeter jet nozzles or as
specified by the manufacturer. Before the desired penetration is reached the jets shall be shut-
off and the piles shall be driven with steam hammer and water jets. The boiler shall be
equipped with an accurate pressure gage and another gage shall be supplied at the hammer
intake to determine the drop in pressure between the boiler and the hammer. Steam hammer
used in driving concrete piles shall develop an energy per blow at each full stroke of the
piston of not less than 732.95 m/kg (5,300 ft./lb.) per cubic meter of concrete in the pile being
driven. The total energy developed by the hammer shall develop an energy per blow of not
less than the manufacturer's rated capacity of the said hammer.
Pile driver leads shall be constructed in such manner as to afford freedom of
movement of the hammer, and they shall be held in position by guys or braces to insure
support of pile during driving. Except where piles are driven through water the leads, in
139
general, shall be of sufficient length to make the use of a follower unnecessary. The driving
of piling with followers shall be avoided, if practicable, and shall be done only under written
permission from the Engineer. The lead shall be designed so as to permit proper placing of
batter piles.
When followers are used, one pile from every group of 10 shall be of long driven
without a follower, and shall be used as a test pile to determine the average bearing power of
the group.
Metal shoes as shown on the Drawings or as approved by the Engineer shall be used
when so indicated.
Piles shall be driven with a variation of not more than 2.0 centimeters per meter from
the vertical or from the batter shown on the Drawings except that piles for trestle bents shall
be so driven that the cap maybe placed in its proper location without inducing excessive
stresses in the piles.
Procedure incidents to the driving of piles shall not subject them to excessive or
undue abuse producing crushing or spalling of the concrete or injurious splitting.
Manipulation of piles to force them into proper position considered by the Engineer to be
excessive will not be permitted. Any pile damaged by reason of internal defects, driven below
the elevations fixed on the Drawings or by the Engineer, shall be corrected at Contractor's
expense by one of the following methods:
(a) The pile shall be withdrawn and replaced by a new and if necessary a longer pile
(b) A second pile shall be driven adjacent to the defective pile
(c) The pile shall be built up
It is expected that all piles shall be driven to the full length shown on the Drawings or
as determined by test piles.
3106. TEST PILE
When shown on the Drawings or required in writing by the Engineer, Contractor shall
drive test piles of a length and at designated locations. These piles shall be of greater length
than the length assumed in the design in order to provide for any variation in soil conditions.
3107. SPLICING OF FILES
Splicing of piles when necessary shall be done following the pile splicing detail as
shown on the drawings.
After the driving is completed, the concrete at the end of the pile, similar to that of the
upper pile, shall be cut at straight portion by means of concrete saw. The splicing shall be
made using 12.50 mm. thick steel plate which shall be fabricated following the dimensions
shown on the drawings.
3108. CUTTING OFF AND CAPPING PILES
All piles shall be cut-off square at the required elevation. Tops of foundation piles
shall be embedded in the concrete footing at least 30 centimeters and, above the top of the
seal concrete.
140
If capping is required the connection shall be made according to details shown on the
Drawings. If circumferences permit, concrete piles to be capped shall be cut-off 30
centimeters above the bottom of the cap, the concrete just below the cut-off shall then be cut
back to expose the reinforcement for 15 centimeters for purposes of allowing the steel to
extend into the cap. All concrete shall be cleaned out from the inside of the reinforcing hoop
in order that the fresh concrete of the cap may have a secure bond with the pile
reinforcement.
Concrete piles actually fabricated, accepted and delivered to the site will be measured
per piece as shown on the plans while driving of concrete piles will be measured per linear
meter acceptably driven on grade duly certified by the Engineer.
As indicated in the Bill of Quantities payment shall be made separately for:

a) costing and delivery cost which shall include all labor, tools, equipment, supplies and
materials needed in the manufacture or fabrication and delivery to the project site which
includes, loading, hauling, unloading and stockpiling at the job site;
b) driving cost which shall include all labor, tools and equipment needed in driving the
concrete piles (the length of concrete pile to be paid as measured above shall be limited from
the tip of piles to the ground surface elevation) and all incidentals necessary for the
SECTION XXXII. STEEL SHEET PILES
3201. SCOPE
All steel sheet piles required for the works as detailed in the Construction Drawings
shall be furnished by the Contractor unless otherwise specified in the Bill of Quantities.
3202. DRIVING STEEL SHEET PILES
A trench well below the bottom of the pile cap shall be excavated and where
necessary falsework to support the sheet piles shall be erected.
Driving the steel sheet piles shall be done with the use of drop or steam hammer or by
any similar approved driving equipment. The use of water jets will not be allowed.
Pile driver lead shall be constructed in such manner as to afford freedom of movement
of the hammer and shall be held in position by sufficient guys. Unless authorized by the
Engineer, the use of follower will not be allowed.
The steel sheet piles shall be driven vertically to the full length, true to the lines and
grades indicated on the Drawings and they shall interlock with each other from the top to the
bottom. Steel sheet piles that deflect badly or refuse to penetrate further on account of
141
obstructions in the subsoil shall not be forced. In such cases, the driving of steel sheet piles
down the line shall continue, leaving the obstinate pile or piles projecting above the rest. The
obstructions shall thereafter be removed by excavation when all parts of the piling wall have
been properly set. It is best to place the sheet piles in the line and then work them down
gradually rather than drive each pile down to the required grade in a single operation.
Whenever necessary, suitable falsework shall be provided to serve as guides in driving the
sheet piles into proper position. After driving the steel sheet piles to the required grade, the
trench shall be backfilled in manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
Should it be found impractical to drive the steel sheet piles, open excavation shall be
restored to and the steel sheet piles shall then be placed in accordance with the Drawings. The
steel sheet piles shall be braced to maintain their vertical position during the process of
backfilling of the excavation trench. Backfilling shall be done simultaneously on both sides
and shall progress at the same rate. Materials for backfill and degree of compaction will be
determined by the Engineer. Steel sheet piles installed in this manner shall be considered as
driven. No allowance for extra compensation will be allowed when this method is employed.
Steel sheet piles will be measured per linear meter of steel sheet piles delivered and
accepted to the project site and acceptably driven to grade as shown on the Drawings.
As indicated in the Bill of Quantities, payment shall be made separately for:

a) Supply and Delivery Cost
For the supply and delivery of steel sheet piles which includes loading, hauling,
unloading and stockpiling at the jobsite.
b) Driving Cost which include all labor, tools and equipment needed in driving the
steel sheet piles (the length of steel sheet piles to be paid as measured above shall be limited
from the tip of piles to the ground surface elevation) and all incidentals necessary for the
SECTION XXXIII. STEEL GATES AND LIFTING MECHANISM
3301. SCOPE
The Contract work calls for the fabrication, supply, delivery and installation
supervision of steel gates, stoplog, lifting mechanism, embedded parts including all
accessories and field painting all in accordance with these specifications and the drawings:
3302. STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS
All materials and equipment to be incorporated in the works shall conform to the
latest applicable standards and specifications as specified in the Contract Documents or to
approved equivalent applicable standards and specifications established and adopted in the
country of manufacture of the materials and equipment.
142
Reference to standards and specifications or to materials shall be considered as
followed by the words "or equivalent". Contractor may propose equivalent standards,
specifications and materials which shall conform to that specified.
If Contractor proposes equivalent standards and specifications or equivalent materials,
Contractor shall state the exact nature of the change, and shall submit complete standards and
specifications of the materials for the approval of NIA.
Such submittals shall be along with the bid and failure to do so, or purchase of any proposed
equivalent materials prior to approval of NIA, will be at the Contractor's risk.
Abbreviations of the titles of official bodies which issue standards or specifications
whenever referred to in these specifications are as follows:
ASTM - American Society for Testing Materials
AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction
AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute
ANSI - American National Standards Institute
AISE - Association of Iron and Steel Engineers
AWS - American Welding Society
JIS - Japanese Industrial Standards
SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council
AGMA - American Gear Manufacturers Association
SAE - Society of Automotive Engineers
ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers
3303. MATERIALS
A. General
All materials shall be new and shall be the best available for the purpose for which
they will be used, considering strength, ductility, durability for the intended service and best
engineering practice.
Materials to be used for the various components of gates and hoists shall conform to
the following specifications:
Components Material International Specifications
Fixed wheel gates frames, Structural Steel ASTM A36 Specifications for
girders, sill beam, rail beams, Structural Steel
guide frames, seal clamps
and other miscellaneous
fabricated parts
Gate Wheels & Guide Wrought Steel ASTM A-504/A-148 Specifications
143
Rollers for Wrought Carbon Steel
Wheel pins Corrosion Resistant ASTM A-276 Specifications for

Steel Hot-Rolled and cold finished
corrosion resisting steel bars Type
316
Seal seats and clamp plates Corrosion Resistant ASTM A-240 Specifications for
for rubber seals Steel Chromium-Nickel Stainless Plate,
Sheet and Strip
Standard steel bolts, nuts and Galvanized Steel ASTM A-307 Specifications for
washers Low Carbon Steel Externally
Threaded Fasteners
High strength steel bolts, nuts Carbon Steel ASTM A-325 Specifications for
and washers Steel bolts and studs with suitable
nuts and plain washers
Rope drum Cast steel ASTM A-27/ASTM A-36

Specifications for mild to medium
strength carbon steel castings for
General Applications
Gears/Pinions Cast Steel/Forged ASTM A-27/ASTM A-291

Steel Specifications for Alloy and Carbon
Steel Forgings for Gears and
Pinions
Worm Gear Phosphor Gear Bronze SAE 65
Worm Case hardened Ground AISI-3120

Steel
Iron Castings ASTM A-48, Class 30
Stems & Shaftings Carbon Steel ASTM A-108, Grade 1018 or Grade
1117 Specifications for cold
finished carbon steel bars and
shaftings
Wire Rope Improved Plow Steel R R W-410 Fed. Specifications
Bronze bushings, bearings, High Lead Tin Bronze ASTM B-144 or B-147
washers or Manganese Bronze
144
Covers Mild Steel ASTM A-36
Bronze casting for lift nut, Manganese Bronze ASTM B-147 Specifications for
thrust nut Manganese Bronze Sand Castings-
Alloy 8A
Anti-friction Bearing Ball & Roller Bearings shall be

equivalent to those manufactured by
SKF Industries
Gear Housing Oil Seals Spring loaded and made of synthetic

compound enclosed in a metal
retainer, "Synthetic Seals" or
equivalent
Lubricating Fitting Alemite type 1610-3 or equivalent
Rubber Seal
The rubber seal shall be molded from natural or synthetic rubber containing not less
than one percent by weight of copper inhibitor and shall have the following physical
properties:
Property Limit ASTM-Test
a) Shore A Durometer Hardness 65 + or - 5 D-675
b) Minimum Elongation 450 percent D-412
c) Ultimate Tensile Strength (min.) 14.5 N/sq.mm D-412
d) Water Absorption (700 C - 7 Less than 10% by D-471

days) weight
e) Tensile strength after 80 or more percent of D-572

accelerated ageing test of 48 hours strength before ageing
in oxygen at 700 C and 2.1
N/sq.mm pressure
f) Compression Set (Max.) 30 percent D-395
B. Tests of Materials
145
i. All materials, supplies, parts, assemblies used for the work to be done under these
Specifications shall be tested according to modern approved methods for the
particular type and class of work. Certified copies in triplicate of the tests made and
results thereof shall be made available to NIA as soon as possible. The data shall
be in such a form as to provide means of assessing compliance with the applicable
relevant specifications for the material tested. The Contractor shall state in his
tender the place of manufacture, testing, inspection of the various components of
the work included in the contract.
ii. Wherever required, at their discretion, NIA may nominate an Inspector to inspect
the tests or trials on their behalf. Sufficient notice must be given by the Contractor
to the Inspector to enable him to reach the site of tests/trials except the pay and
expenses of the Inspector shall be included in the quoted price. All authorized
representatives of NIA shall have free access to the work premises of the contract
at all reasonable times and shall be provided by the Contractor full facilities and
safety to inspect the process of manufacture and the materials used. NIA will reject
any material/work that in their opinion does not conform to the specifications and
will order the same to be removed and replaced or altered at the expense of the
Contractor to conform to the specifications.
iii. If materials are not referred to in the applicable Standard Specifications but are
required to have certain physical and /or chemical properties, such properties shall
be checked by two chemical samples for each 5 tons of materials and fractions
thereof in each lot. For lots less than 250 kilograms, Contractor's warrants will be
acceptable in lieu of actual tests provided heat treatment of the fabricated parts
using such materials is not required. A lots shall consist of all materials of the same
physical size and conditions submitted at one time in which the material is from the
same melt or heat and on which any subsequent heat treatment has been performed
at the same conditions. Not more than two heat treatment to attain the desired
physical properties shall be permitted.
iv. Notwithstanding the above tests, examination and inspection, the Contractor shall
be responsible for the acceptability of the finished work.
C. Manufacturing/Fabrication Program
i. The fabricator/manufacturer shall prepare a manufacturing/fabrication program in

Bar Graph Form showing the activities and its sequencing in sufficient details such
that the contract works can be properly monitored from commencement to
completion.
ii. The fabricator/manufacturer shall submit said program within thirty (30) calendar
days after the date of receipt of Notice of Award.
iii. The fabricator/manufacturer shall show the target dates for commencing and
completing the principal activities as required for in the contract works including
but not limited to the following:
146
a) procurement of materials and the like
b) fabrication and manufacture
c) painting
d) delivery dates
D. Pre-fabrication Inspection Works
i. The fabricator/manufacturer shall be required to submit mill and/or manufacturer's
certificate for the steel materials, welding electrode, paints, etc. intended for use in
the works.
ii. Materials to be used in the fabrication shall be adequately sampled and tested to
check its compliance with the specification/standard requirements.
iii. No fabrication work and/or use of materials in such works shall commence unless
materials for said works are duly inspected, tested, and certified by NIA or his
authorized representatives as to conformity with the specification/ standard
requirements.
iv. NIA technical inspector shall prepare and submit inspection and acceptance report
on materials for use in the fabrication works.
E. Inspection Works During Actual Fabrication
1. The NIA should assign a knowledgeable and experienced technical inspectors, to
conduct inspection.
2. The NIA's authorized technical inspector shall be entitled at all reasonable time free
access to the manufacturer's/fabricator's plant to conduct inspection during
fabrication, to ascertain that all the works shall comply in all aspect with the
standards and requirements set forth in the contract documents.
3. The NIA technical inspectors shall monitor progress and conduct of the fabrication
works and prepare and submit progress report on said works at regular intervals.
F. Final Inspection Works
1. Intake Gates, Main Canal Gates, Lateral and Turnout Gates
i. The NIA technical inspector shall conduct final inspection based on the approved
fabrication drawings and specifications.
ii. The gates should be properly marked with the corresponding identification as per
approved schedule of dimension such as size of gate, lateral, stationing for proper
identification by the end user.
2. Sluice Gate, Barrage, Stoplog and Radial Steel Gates
i. The NIA technical inspector should see to it that all component parts should be
properly pre-assembled at the fabricator's/manufacturer's shop to ascertain the
proper fitness of all adjoining parts and should be properly punch mark before
disassembling for guidance and reference during field installation.
147
ii. The NIA shall issue certificate of pre-delivery inspection and acceptance of
completed fabrication works as a basis for the final inspection and acceptance by
the field office of deliveries made at the site.
3304. WORKMANSHIP
A. General
i. All works shall be performed in accordance with the best modern practice of the
manufacturer of high grade machinery. All parts shall have accurately machined
mounting and bearing surfaces so that they can be assembled without filing,
chipping, or remachining. All parts shall conform accurately to the design
dimensions and shall be free from any defect in workmanship or material that will
impair their services. All attaching bolt holes shall be accurately drilled to the
layout indicated on the approved drawings. The steel gates shall be completely
shop assembled to insure the proper fit and adjustment.
B. Welding
i) General
Whenever welding is specified or permitted, the electric arc welding process, manual
or machine welding shall be used.
Contractor shall provide adequate amount of materials for each type of welding and
shall specify the materials on all relevant drawings. Contractor shall also provide detailed
drawings showing joint preparation required for each type of welding to be carried out on the
site.
ii) Preparation
The parts to be joined by electric welding shall be cut precisely to the correct size by
machine methods suitable for the type of weld to be used and to allow the proper penetration
and good fusion of the weld with the base metal. The cut surfaces shall not have visible
defects such as scabs, superficial defects caused by shearing or torch cutting operations or
any other damaging effect. The surfaces of a 40 mm wide strip on each side of the plate
adjacent to the edge and the edges to be welded shall be free from rust, oil, grease and other
foreign matter.
iii) Lamination
Any plate in which lamination has been discovered after cutting shall be rejected
unless the laminated portion of plate is local and can be cut out and replaced by the welding
of a sound plate in the cut out area with the approval of NIA. Repaired surfaces shall be
ground smooth to assure neat appearance.
iv) Welding Methods and Welder's Qualifications
The welding method that would be employed by the Contractor shall be submitted to
NIA for approval. Welds shall be balanced as far as possible to minimize distortion. Welding
shall conform to AWS D1.1, Parts Procedures (Welding of Stressed Structural Components)
not only with regard to workmanship but also with regard to qualifications of welders.
Welders should be certified in the trade and such certification shall be submitted to NIA.
v) Electrodes
148
Contractor shall indicate on all detailed drawings the type and size of electrode he
proposed for use for shop and/or field welding.
In general, welding electrodes for structural steel shall conform to Table 1.17.2 of the
AISC Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings.
Contractor shall provide the net quantity plus ten percent (10%) of each type of
electrode required to complete each field welded joint.
C. Non-Destructive Testing
i) General
All tests shall be conducted with the approval of NIA and the cost of tests shall be
borne by the Contractor.
Radiographic, ultrasonic, magnetic particles or liquid dye penetrant tests shall be
conducted on components as specified below. Where ultrasonic or magnetic particle tests
indicate the possibility of a flaw, the suspected part shall be tested by radiography. All flaws
shall be removed by thermal or mechanical gauging processed and replaced by welding. The
replacement weld and contiguous parts of the original weld, if any, shall then be tested
radiographically. All radiographs shall become the property of NIA.
The acceptability of parts inspected by magnetic particle and liquid dye penetrant test
and the acceptability of use of these methods will be subject to agreement between Contractor
and NIA.
ii) Welds
Radiographic examination shall be applied to the whole length of butt welds in plate
furnishing stressed members.
Ultrasonic examination shall be applied to all other stressed groove welds.
Radiographic and ultrasonic examination shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1,
Section 6.
iii) Castings
Castings shall be of fine grain quality and the surfaces which do not undergo
machining, particularly those of steel or iron in contact with water, shall be dressed smooth in
the foundry with all joints blended into adjacent surfaces and shall be free from foundry
irregularities, such as projections, ridges, hollows, honeycombing, pock marks, blow holes
and crack or chip marks, so that they will not require surface smoothing operations prior to
painting. All defects shall be fully explored and castings shall be repaired, plugged or welded
to the satisfaction of NIA.
iv) Carbon Steel Plates and Shapes
Carbon steel plates, shapes, bars, etc. for welded construction shall conform to
materials specifications ASTM A-36, Steel shapes shall be in accordance with ASTM
specifications. Plates from which webs, flanges and other stressed members are cut shall be
ultrasonically tested for laminations according to ASTM A-578 at the place of manufacture.
v) Forgings
Forgings shall conform to ASTM A-668 Class D and shall be free from defects
affecting their strength and durability, including seams, pipes, flaws, cracks, scales, fins,
porosity, hard spots, excessive non-metallic inclusions and segregations.
149
The largest fillets compatible with the design shall be incorporated wherever a change
in section occurs.
Tool marks or tearing of the metal by the finishing tools will not be acceptable on the
surface of fillets. Such marks if it occurs, shall be removed by grinding or polishing. All
finished surfaces of forging shall be smooth and free from tool marks.
All forgings in excess of 150 mm diameter shall be subjected to examination
internally for the detection of flaws and to heat treatment for the relief of residual stresses.
D. Fastenings
i. All screws, bolts, studs and nuts shall be of International Standard (Metric) form of
threads. Bolt heads and nuts shall be hexagonal. Hexagonal recesses shall be
provided in the head of countersunk head bolts and machine screws. The bolt
length shall be such as to ensure that at least two full threads are projecting after
the nut has been tightened.
ii. Nuts and bolts for pressure containing parts shall be of best quality bright steel
machined on the shank and bearing faces of head and nut.
iii. Where there is risk of corrosion, bolts shall be finished flush with the top of the nut
after tightening, except in cases where the connected components are required to be
frequently removed for replacement or adjustment when the bolts and nuts shall be
of corrosion resisting steel or bronze.
All nuts shall be provided with washers, parallel or taper as appropriate. Mechanical
locking devices of an approved form shall be provided where there is a possibility of nuts
becoming loose due to vibration. Spring type washers will not be permitted where they
maybe damaged any protective coating. Special locking compounds may be used as an
alternative to mechanical devices subject to NIA approval.
E. Structural Work
i. Unless otherwise, specified, design and fabrication of structural parts shall conform
to the applicable provisions of the AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication
and Erection of Structural Steel in Building" of the AISC "Code Standard Practice
for Steel Building and Bridges".
F. Machine Work
All tolerances, allowances and gauges for metal shall conform to the ASA Standard
B42, Tolerances, Allowances and Gauges for Metal Fits, for the class of fits as required.
Finished contact or bearing surfaces shall be true and exact to secure full contact. All
holes or field assembly with bolts shall be accurately located and drilled for shop assembly.
Journal surfaces shall be polished and all surfaces shall be finished with sufficient
smoothness and accuracy to insure proper operation when assembled. All drilled holes for
bolts shall be accurately located and drilled from template.
3305. PROTECTION OF MACHINED SURFACES
150
Machined finished surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter. Finished
surfaces of large parts and other surfaces shall be protected with wooden pads or other
suitable means. Unassembled pins and bolts shall be oiled and wrapped with moisture
resistant paper or protected by other approved means.
3306. FABRICATION
a. General
All members shall be free from twist, bonds or other deformations, and all surfaces
that will be in contact shall be thoroughly cleaned before assembling.
All parts shall be cut accurately to the dimensions shown on the drawings. All edges
shall show sound metal, free from laminations, surface cracks and other injurious defects.
Bumping or heating will not be allowed. Parts shall be adjusted to fit, and shall be
firmly bolted or otherwise held securely together so that surfaces are in closer contact before
welding is commenced. Close adherence to the dimensions and tolerance called for in the
drawings is required.
b. Straightening
Rolled materials shall be straight and true before being laid out or worked. Necessary
straightening shall be accomplished by methods that will not injure the metal. Sharp kinks or
bents will be considered causes for rejection.
c. Bending
Where bending or forming of plates or shapes is required, the plates or shapes shall be
bent to the proper curvature by cold forming. Heating shall not be employed except with
specified approval of the Administrator, and special precautions, therefore shall be taken to
avoid overheating. Prior to rolling or bending the plates, the edges shall be pressed properly
to the correct curvature, as determined by templates, to produce continuity from the edges.
Corrections of curvature by hammering will not be permitted.
d. Shearing, Chipping and Flame-Cutting
All plates or shapes shall be cut accurately to shape and size, with the edges to be
joined by welding formed properly to suit the selected type of welding and to allow thorough
penetration of the weld metal. Sheared edges shall be machined to a depth of not less than
one-quarter of the thickness of the materials, to remove surface cracks caused by the shearing
operation. Flame-cut edges shall be uniform and smooth and shall be free from loose scale
and slag accumulations before being welded. Whenever possible, flame-cutting shall be
guided by mechanical means. No materials shall be cut by electric arc. Chipping shall be
done neatly and accurately, and exposed edges, shall be smooth.
e. Preparation for Field Welding
All necessary chipping, grinding, leveling and other preparation for joints or splice to
be made by field welding shall be done in the shop.
f. Punching
In punch works, holes in materials having a thickness of less than three-quarter of an
inch may be punched to full size. Holes in material having a thickness equal to or greater than
151
three-quarter of an inch shall be drilled to full size. All holes shall be clean-cut, without torn
or ragged edges.
g. Drilling, Reaming, Countersinking and Tapping
Unless otherwise called for on the drawings and except where reaming or tapping is
required or where tight bolts are to be used, full sized drill and/or reamed holes shall be not
less than 1.59 millimeter not more than 2.38 millimeter larger than the nominal drilled and/or
reamed perpendicular to the face of the member and if necessary, shall be drilled to a
template. Countersinking, where required, shall be true and square with the holes. Outside
burns shall be removed. Tapped holes shall be drilled to the proper diameter for the tap used
and shall be tapped carefully so that the threads will be continuous, smoothly cut, and free
from imperfection.
h. Tolerance
Contact faces of gates and guides shall not depart more than 1 millimeter from a plane
surface. Bottom contact edges shall not depart more than 2 millimeters from the designated
planes. Fits, tolerance and finish when not specified, shall conform with the best modern shop
practice in the manufacture of finished products of similar nature.
i. Lubrication
Before assembly all bearing surfaces, journals, grease and oil grooves shall be
carefully cleaned and lubricated with an approved oil or grease. After assembly each
lubricating system shall be filled with an approved lubricant.
3307. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE INSTALLATION AND

OPERATING ARRANGEMENT
A. Sluice Gates
Sluice gates as shown on the Drawings are to be installed to desilt the sluiceway. The
gates shall be of fixed wheel type. Each gate shall consist of an upstream skin plate supported
by vertical and horizontal stiffeners spaced at required intervals which in turn shall be
supported by end vertical girders. Wheels are to be mounted on the end vertical girders and
provided with necessary bronze bushings. The total horizontal load on the gate shall be
transmitted through the wheels on to the wheel track plates fixed on the piers with necessary
embedments. Rubber seals on sides and bottom shall be provided on the upstream side of the
gate to render the gate leak proof.
B. Intake Gates
i. Intake Gates of different sizes as shown on the drawing are to be installed to
regulate the flow of water through the intake. The gates shall be of sliding type.
Each gate shall consist of a downstream skin plate supported by vertical
stiffeners spaced at required intervals and horizontal girders which in turn shall
be supported by end vertical girders. The total horizontal load on the gate shall be
transmitted to the vertical frame fixed on the piers with necessary embedments.
The details of construction are shown in the NIA bid drawings.
ii. The gates are to operate at water level corresponding to normal and high flood
level condition and the operation is hydraulically unbalanced.
iii. The gates are to be operated through manually operated pedestal lift with rising
stem, of adequate capacity.
152
C. Flap Gate
a. General Flap gates are to be installed to allow free flow through the gate and to
close automatically to prevent backflow should a head reversal occur.
b. Flap Cover and Frame
The flap gate cover shall be made of steel and shall consist of an upstream skin plate
supported by vertical and horizontal stiffeners spaced at required intervals. Music note type
rubber seals shall be provided on the two sides as well as on the top and bottom of the
upstream side of the flap to render the gate leak proof. These rubber seals shall be fixed to the
flap by means of clamp steel plate and stainless steel bolts.
The flap gate shall be provided with arms mounted on steel hinges of the double pivot
type using stainless steel pins and bronze bushings. A concrete counterweight shall be
provided and attached to the arms in such a way that its position is adjustable in order to ease
the opening of the flap gate. Final position of this counterweight will be determined by the
field office.
All edges of the gate opening where the music note type rubber seal is in contact shall
be provided with stainless steel seal seats. This seal seats shall be fixed/welded to the steel
frames embedded on the concrete.
3308. STRUCTURAL DESIGN CRITERIA FOR GATES
a. General
The design shall ensure that:
1) The gates shall be reasonably watertight.
2) They shall be capable of being raised or lowered by the hoist at the speed
specified.
3) Since all the gates are for regulation, they shall be held in partially open position
within the range of travel to pass the required discharge without undue vibration.
b. Wheels and Wheel Tracks
1) The gate wheels shall be suitable to withstand the stresses developed due to the
loads they carry.
2) The wheels and wheel tracks shall be machined true and shall operate smoothly
without vibration and without undue drift.
3) The hardness of wheel track shall be 50 points Brinell Hardness Number (BHN)
higher than the BHN of the wheel tread.
c. Wheel Bearing
1) The wheel bearing shall be bronze bushing with grooves for lubrication.
d. Wheel Pin
1) The wheels shall be mounted on fixed pins and the pin shall be harder than the
bushing. Wheel pin shall be of stainless steel and the contact surfaces shall be
finished smoothly.
153
2) The wheel pin shall be of cantilever type with support from the cantilever box of
the end vertical girder. The rigidity of cantilever box should be ensured.
e. Seals and Accessories
1) Seals shall be fixed by means of stainless steel seal clamps and galvanized steel
bolts to ensure positive water pressure between the seal and the gate and to bear
tightly on the seal seat to prevent leakage. Edges of seal clamp adjacent to seal
bulb shall be rounded.
2) Side rubber seals shall be flat or angle shape type - Bottom seal may be of
wedge type.
3) The initial interference of side rubber seals shall be 3 mm pre-compression. The
projection of bottom wedge seal shall be 6 mm. Suitable chamfer shall be
provided at the bottom of skin plate/clamp plate to accommodate the bottom
wedge seal in compressed position.
f. Guides and Sill Frames
1) The guide frames and sill frames shall be composed of steel plates and steel
sections so built up as to suit the gate structure. They shall be securely fixed in
concrete by means of anchor members to ensure that all hydraulic loads exerted
on the gate will be safely carried and transmitted to the concrete works.
2) The guide frames shall be true and shall be sufficient for the lifting height of the
gate.
3) The side seal seat shall be stainless steel with a minimum width of 75 mm. The
seal seat shall be fixed on the seal seat base by welding. The fixing of the seal
seat on its base shall ensure rigidity and watertightness. The seal seat shall be
finished smooth and the edges shall be rounded/chamfered to prevent damage to
the seal.
4) All the seal seat base including the sill beam shall be embedded in concrete.
5) Sill beam flange width shall not be less than 100 mm and the length shall cover
the entire waterway. The seal seat (stainless steel plate) welded to the top flange
shall be at least 25 mm wider than the top flange width of sill beam. It shall be
flushed with surrounding concrete. Each end of sill beam shall have provision
for the connection of each side vertical frame to facilitate their location.
g. Embedded Parts
i. All structural parts of the guides, seal seats, wheel tracks shall be constructed
straight and be free from twists and warping. The ends of sections of side guides
shall be machined so that when assembled, the finished surfaces of adjoining
sections shall be flushed and ends shall butt firmly to form watertight joints. The
faces of all seal seats shall be in a true common plane and this plane shall be
parallel to the plane tangent to wheel-track face. The ends of track sections shall
also be machined smooth and square so that when tracks are assembled to the
track base, the ends of adjoining sections shall butt firmly.
154
3309. HOISTS
A. Hoist for Sluice Gate

1. General
a) The Contractor shall provide manually operated rope drum hoist of adequate
capacity complete in every respect along with hoist supporting units and all
accessories that would be required for the satisfactory operation of the sluice
gates.
b) Each hoist mechanism shall consist of gear reducers, wire ropes, rope drums,
shaftings, bearings, sprockets for diesel engine drive and all other mechanical
accessories for the satisfactory operation of hoist.
c) The hoisting equipment shall be designed to raise, lower and hold the gate in any
position between fully opened and fully closed positions. Hoisting equipment
shall be enclosed in dust proof housing with suitable lugs and eye bolts for
handling.
d) The complete equipment shall rest on a steel base framework which shall rest on
the pier top.
B. Mechanical Parts
1. General
a) The components of the hoist mechanism shall be so proportioned as to take the
severest load coming on individual components.
2. Wire Rope
a) The wire rope shall be made from improved plough steel of 6 x 37 construction
with steel center, right regular lay, preformed and lubricated.
b) A turnbuckle shall be provided on one side of the wire rope connecting the gate
and hoist to equalize the tension in the rope. Turnbuckle and wire rope fitting
shall be galvanized.
c) The breaking strength of wire rope shall be as per standard manufacturer's
specifications.
d) The strength of socket end of wire rope shall be approximately equal to the
strength of the rope itself. The ends shall be safely secured against twisting.
3. Drums
a) The groove drum shall be of such size that there will be not more than one layer
of rope on the drum when the rope is in its fully wound position.
b) The length of drum shall be such that each lead-off rope has minimum two full
turns on the drum when the gate is at its lowest position and one spare groove for
each lead-off of the drum when the gate is at its highest position.
155
c) If the ends of the drum are flanged, the flanges shall project to a height not less
than two rope diameters above the rope. A spur gear secured to the drum may be
regarded as forming as one of the flanges.
d) The lead angle (fleet angle) of the ropes shall not exceed 5 degrees or 1 in 12 on
either side of helix angle of groove in the drum.
e) The drum shall be made of cast steel.
f) The drum shall be machined groove. Grooving shall be finished smooth and
edges between groove rounded. The contour at the bottom of the grooves shall be
circular over an angle of at least 120 degrees. The groove radius shall be 0.53
times the diameter of rope. The depth of groove shall not be less than 0.35 times
the diameter of the rope.
g) The pitch of the grooves shall be such that the clearance between adjacent turn of
rope is at least:
1.5 mm for ropes up to 12 mm diameter
2.5 mm for ropes over 12mm diameter up to 30 mm diameter and
3.0 mm for ropes of over 30 mm diameter
h) The ends of the rope shall be fixed to the drum to such a way that the fixing
device is accessible. Each rope shall be wound at least two turns before it is fixed
(dead wrap).
4. Gearing
a) The reduction units of the hoist shall be composed of spur gears, bevel gears,
worm and worm gears. The gears shall be machined cut with smooth finish.
b) Tooth form of spur and bevel gears shall be 20 degrees full depth involute
system.
c) Spur and bevel gears shall be of cast steel, forged steel or surface hardened steel.
The gears and pinions shall be made from two different grades of materials; the
higher strength grade material for the pinion.
d) Standard worm and worm gears shall be high grade reduction unit of good
efficiency suitable for long service life. The proportioning of parts therein shall
be in accordance with the best engineering practice. The bearing section of the
rotating shaft shall be fitted with anti-friction bearings designed for thrust and
radial loads and the helical angle of the worm shall be designed for self-locking.
e) Keys in gear trains shall be fitted and secured that they should not work loose
when in service.
f) Gears shall have removable housing with provision for convenient access for
lubrication. All bolts and cap screws shall be provided with lock washers. All
machined units shall be thoroughly cleaned to ensure that they are free of cutting
and objectionable and abrasive material.
156
5. Shafts
a) The shafts shall be designed for appropriate torque/load that is being transmitted.
Shafts shall have liberal factor of safety for strength and rigidity and shall have
adequate bearing surfaces. They shall be finished smooth and, if shouldered, shall
be provided with fillets of large radius.
b) All shafts shall be designed for safety against simple bending, pure torsion and
the combined effect of bending and torsion.
6. Bearings
a) All the running shafts shall be provided with ball, roller or bush bearings.
Selection of bearings shall be done on consideration of duty, load and speed of
the shaft.
b) Bearings shall be easily accessible for lubrication and/or replacement.
C. Intake Gate Hoists
1. General
Intake gate hoist shall be manually operated. The pedestal lift shall be crank
operated and the direction of rotation of the crank to open the gate shall be clearly
indicated on the lifting mechanism.
2. Manual Operation
i. The manual operation should be designed in such a manner that the continuous
effort per man does not exceed a crank force of 98 Newtons (10 Kgf) with 400
mm of crank radius at a continuous rating of 24 RPM.
3. Gate Stem, Coupling and Stem Guides
i. Stems shall be of cold finished steel. Each stem shall be of adequate size to safely
withstand operation of the gate (both raising and lowering) under the specified
head and shall be furnished in sections of suitable length with necessary couplings
to facilitate removal and replacement, if necessary. The couplings shall be of the
same materials as the stem and shall be safely pinned, bolted or threaded and
keyed to the stem. The bolts and pins shall be of stainless steel. The stems shall be
provided with suitable stop nuts with provision for adjustment to prevent damage
to the bottom of the gate due to overrun of the gate when closing.
ii. Stem guides shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be adjustable
in two directions. Stem guides shall be provided with either bronze-bushed cast
iron or steel collars bolted into place.
4. Pedestal and Lifting Mechanism
157
i. The pedestal shall have a cast bronze lift nut threaded to fit the operating stem.
Ball thrust bearings shall be provided above and below the flange of this lift nut to
take the computed maximum thrust developed in opening and closing the gate.
ii. Gears shall be of cast steel accurately machined with cut teeth and smooth
operating with drive shafts running in bronze sleeve bearing of ample size.
iii. All gears and bearings shall be enclosed in a cast iron housing. The gears and
bearings shall be easily accessible for maintenance and lubrication. The housing
shall be adequate to withstand the tropical climate.
iv. The lift mechanism shall be provided with a cast iron or structural steel pedestal
machined and drilled to accommodate the gear housing and suitable for bolting to
the operating floor.
v. The crank shall be of cast iron and detachable and provided with a rotating handle.
D. Lubrication
1. General
i. All bearings, journals and locations where sliding between parts takes place shall
be provided with adequate means of lubrication.
ii. Adequate seals shall be provided wherever necessary to prevent the escape of
lubricants during normal operation and the entry of foreign matter.
iii. All the equipment covered under the scope of this contract shall be handed over to
NIA in running order with all moving parts properly lubricated and fully charged
with the recommended lubricant.
iv. Contractor shall provide a list of all recommended lubricants for each location and
the compatible types of lubricant from the product line of all major companies in
the Philippines.
2. Grease Lubrication
i. Unless otherwise specified, all greasing shall be effected by high pressure hand
grease gun.
ii. All fittings shall, if possible, be of the same size.
iii. Underwater equipment shall be charged with lithium based grease, for other
locations the grease shall be calcium based.
3. Oil Lubrication
i. Gear boxes shall be provided with an oil level sight glass or dipstick, a screw
capped filling hole and drain cock.
ii. Where pressure oil lubrication of bearings is adopted, a filter and overload facility
shall be provided in an accessible position.
iii. All opening or joints in the gear box casing shall be provided with gaskets to
avoid oil leakage.
158
iv. Contractor shall provide the net quantity plus ten percent (10%) of the required
oils and grease for the first filling and charging of the equipment at site.
v. The oil shall be delivered in steel drums and grease in steel kegs. The containers
shall be non-returnable.
3310. LIFTING MECHANISM INSTALLATION, TESTS AND

ADJUSTMENTS
The installation of the lifting mechanism and anchorage shall be in accordance with
the details as shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall send qualified and experienced
Installation Supervisor who will supervise the installation of the lifting mechanism.
Lifting mechanism shall be installed complete with gear reductions, couplings,

shafting, shaft bearings, drums, wire ropes, anchor bolts and all other materials for complete
assembly. Lifting mechanism shall be assembled and accurately placed in correct alignment
by the use of shims and wedges between the sole plates or base plates and concrete. Dry
packing shall be done after the dry-pack has set.
After the lifting mechanism have been completely installed, adjusted and made ready
for operation, the Contractor shall conduct test runs for the gates and lifting mechanism. All
units shall be tested for normal operating speed to ensure that all necessary clearances and
tolerances have been provided and that no binding occurs in any moving part. The cost of
performing all the required test shall be borne by the Contractor.
All tests shall be performed in the presence of an authorized representative of NIA.

All data shall be certified correct and submitted to NIA. All defects found during the test as a
result of the installation work shall be corrected accordingly to the satisfaction of NIA.
3311. EMBEDDED PARTS
Special attention shall be given to the method by which embedded parts are aligned
during erection and secured against movement during the placing of the second stage
concrete.
The proposed method which is indicated on the Drawings utilize adjusting anchors
welded at one end to anchor plates embedded in first stage concrete and fastened by means of
two adjusting nuts at the other end to the embedded parts.
3312. ANTI-CORROSION MEASURES AND PAINTING
a. General
i. The steel gate shall be designed to minimize as much as possible the effects of
localized corrosion. Drain holes shall be provided in all locations where the
entrapment of water can occur.
ii. All steel surfaces except stainless steel surfaces shall be coated and/or painted
with a protective film specified under Section C below.
iii. Crevices over which the protective film can bridge shall be retouched or repaired
prior to coating.
159
iv. Boxed in members shall be provided with access holes or shall be treated
internally with an effective coating material.
v. All coating or paint materials to be used shall be original sealed container bearing
the manufacturer's label revealing complete identification of content and shall be
subject to inspection by NIA prior to coating and/or painting.The NIA shall have
the right to reject any paint material supplied under these specifications which is
found to be defective.
b. Surface Preparation and Shop Painting

Upon completion of fabrication and machining works but prior to application
of coating materials, the Contractor shall notify NIA in writing that the surface
preparation for painting is in progress. Coating application shall commence only after
the NIA or their duly authorized representatives have inspected and subsequently
approved the surface preparation in accordance with these specifications.
NIA or their designated inspectors shall undertake from time to time,
inspection of the painting works while it is in progress. NIA shall be at liberty to
reject outright any deviation to material specifications and procedure noted during
inspection.
Notwithstanding such inspection, the Contractor shall be held responsible for
the acceptability of the finished work.
All oil, grease, soil and other contaminants shall be removed from steel and
cast iron surfaces by the use of clean solvent, emulsion, cleaning compound or other
methods which involve cleaning action.
Following the solvent, the surfaces shall be cleaned of all defective or damage
areas of existing paint, and of all loose rust, loose mill scale and other foreign
substance in accordance with the requirements for surface preparation as specified
hereunder.
i. Immersed Steel
Except where otherwise specified, all steel surfaces and all parts of structures
that have surfaces which are exposed and/or permanently immersed in water, shall be
blast cleaned by commercial blast cleaning (SSPC-SP6) then painted with 2 coats of
coal tar epoxy paint conforming to U.S. Military Specifications MIL-P23236 (Ships)
Type I, Class 2 to produce a total dry film thickness of 400 microns (16 mils.),
ii. Steel Exposed to Atmosphere (Lifting Mechanism and Accessories including
Enclosures)
Except where otherwise specified all steel and cast iron surfaces of lifting
mechanism and accessories including its enclosure which are exposed to atmosphere
shall be blast cleaned by commercial blast cleaning (SSPC-SP6) then applied with 1
coat of Alkyd Red Lead Primer. After proper drying time is attained apply 2 coats of
Alkyd Enamel finish to attain a total dry film thickness of 175 microns (7 mils.).
iii. Embedded Steel Work
160
Where not otherwise specified, all steel surfaces which will be embedded or
against which concrete will be placed shall be cleaned by power tool cleaning (SSPC-
SP3) then painted with 1 coat of cement latex milk consisting of 10 parts of Portland
Cement (by weight), 5 parts of water and 1 part modified latex emulsion.
iv. Repair of Paint Film
The Contractor shall retouch or repair areas of steel gates which maybe
damaged during transit from shop to the site of delivery.
All paints shall be applied in conformity with SSPC-PAI Shop, Field and
Maintenance Painting, by skilled personnel fully experienced in this type of work.
C. Machine Surfaces
All finished surfaces of ferrous metals that will be exposed during shipment or while
awaiting installation shall be cleaned in accordance with a coating of heavy, gasoline rust
preventive compound.
D. Stainless Steel Surfaces
No painting is required for finished or unfinished stainless steel parts.
3313. PREPARING FOR TRANSPORTATION
i. Shipment of fabricated works to the Project Office should be made only upon
issuance of pre-delivery inspection and acceptance report to the
fabricator/manufacturer by the NIA Office.
ii. The Project Office reserves the right to conduct its own final inspection upon
arrival at the project office before issuance of final acceptance report and any
findings made thereat should be noted in the final inspection report for appropriate
action by the Central Office.
iii. All parts shall be prepared for transportation so that slings for handling maybe
attached readily wherever the parts are to be moved. When it is unsafe to attach
slings to the boxes/crates, boxed parts shall be packed with sling attached to the
part and the slings shall project through the box or crate so that attachments can be
made easily.
iv. All exposed finished surfaces shall be adequately protected against abrasion and
injury during transportation and all long and slender pieces shall be safely
supported and blocked.
v. Rubber seals shall be dismantled after shop assembly and shall be transported
separately. They shall be so packed and protected that their size, shape and
physical properties are not affected during transportation.
vi. The gates shall be prepared for transportation as to involve the minimum amount
of field assembly.
a. Packing
161
i. The bid price shall include and provide for securely protecting and packing the
equipment so as to avoid the damage during transport. All packing shall allow for
easy removal and checking at site. Special precaution shall be taken to prevent
rusting of the parts. Gas seals or other methods if proposed to be used shall have
the approval of NIA. Each carton or package shall contain a packing
memorandum mentioning the name of the Contractor, the number and date of the
Contract and the name of the office placing the order.
ii. The equipment shall be insured for loss or damage during transit to the field, the
cost being borne by the Contractor.
iii. Notwithstanding anything stated above, the Contractor shall be entirely
responsible for loss, damage or depreciation to the equipment and materials.
b. Marking
Each part of gates, hoist and embedded parts which need to be transported from the
shop to the field site as separate piece shall be marked to show the unit of which it is a part
and match marked to show its relative position in the unit to facilitate assembly in the field.
Unit marks and match marks shall be made with heavy steel stamps and paints. Each piece,
sub-assembly or package to be transported separately shall be labeled or tagged with
transportation designation consisting of the Specification number and the mark number of
such piece or the number of parts grouped in such assemblies or package.
3314. ACCEPTANCE OF WORKS
After the steel gates have been installed in the field, it will be operated and tested by
the NIA and when so operated and tested it shall meet all the requirements of the
specifications. The gates shall be raised and lowered several times for the full length of the
travel. The primary requisite for acceptance shall be that each gate operates smooth and shall
be watertight.
A. Tests
i. The Contractor shall carry out such tests on the gates and hoist equipment as
maybe required by the Engineer. Contractor shall be responsible for all
modifications and adjustments required for the works as a result of such tests.
ii. The test shall include:
a. operational tests in the dry
b. operational tests with fully hydrostatic load
c. c) leakage test
iii. Test maybe repeated, if necessary, until they successfully carried out to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
iv. The tests will be carried out at the convenience of the Engineer the cost thereof
shall be borne by the Contractor.
B. Operational Tests in the Dry
162
Operational tests in the dry shall be carried out after completion of erection
when all the power supply have been connected and adjusted. The tests shall include
at least two complete traverses from the maximum raised position to the full seating
position. Manual operation will also be similarly tested. All adjustments, clearances,
brakes, motors and controls, etc. shall be checked for proper operation.
C. Operational Test under Hydrostatic Head
i. These tests shall simulate the actual operating conditions as closely as possible.
ii. At least one complete traverse will be made on the sluice and intake gates from
the fully closed position to the normal raised position as follows:
a. With the gate initially in the fully closed position raise it to the normal open
position until stopped by the limit switch;
b. Lower the gate to the fully closed position;
c. Ascertain proper operation against over-travel;
d. Record and report fan speed, motor torque and current while raising and fan
speed during closing;
D. Leakage Tests
Leakage test shall be carried out with the gate lowered on the sill. Before the
observation for leakage, the gate shall be raised and lowered by about one meter,
several times to dislodge any debris that might have lodged on the side seals. The
leaking shall then be measured. Excessive leakage shall be rectified until it is reduced
to 15 (fifteen) litres/minute/metre length of the seal.
3315. MANUALS
The fabricator/manufacturer shall prepare and furnish NIA and the installation
contractor's staff, the installation procedure, operation, and maintenance manuals for all of
the works as provided for in the Contract Documents.
Measurement for furnishing and installation of gates and stoplog will be made on the
number of assemblies of the different classes and sizes acceptably installed and tested.
The cost for the supply and delivery of various steel gates will be paid at the contract
unit price per assembly or the lump sum price whichever is stated in the Bill of Quantities,
which shall include all equipment and materials prescribed in this section and directed by the
Engineer.
The cost for the installation provided under this item will be paid at the contract unit
price which shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools,
equipment, supplies and all incidentals and subsidiary works necessary for the successful
completion of the works.
163
Payment for the work provided under this item will be made separately for the supply
and delivery, and installation of various gates and lifting mechanism as follows:
a) Supply and delivery
For the supply and delivery of various gates and lifting mechanism, eighty percent
(80%) of the respective unit price in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid upon
delivery to the project site in accordance with this technical specification
acceptable to NIA.
All equipment/materials delivered at the site, shall be kept by the Contractor

and will be responsible for any loss or damage of the equipment/materials until they
are installed. Any loss or damage to the equipment/materials shall be replaced by the
Contractor at his own expense.
Twenty percent (20%) shall be paid upon installation of the equipment and materials,
and ready for operation as certified by the Engineer.
b) Installation
One hundred percent (100%) of the respective unit price of each installation
works which shall include labor, consumable materials, subsidiary works and
other incidentals required for the successful completion of the works shall be
paid upon complete installation of the respective equipment/ materials all in ac-
cordance with the drawings and accepted by the Engineer.
SECTION XXXIV. STEEL PIPE MANHOLE, BLOW-OFF VALVE AND

MANHOLE COVER
3401. SCOPE
The work under this Section shall include furnishing or the fabrication or
manufacture, installation and testing for proper operation of the steel pipe manhole, manhole
cover, blow-off valve and pumping complete with all accessories in accordance with the
dimensions, elevations and design shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
3402. CONTRACTOR'S DRAWINGS, AND OTHER DATA
Contractor shall submit to NIA for approval all installation drawings, operating and
maintenance instructions, illustrations and repair procedure of the blow-off valve, and
manhole with cover.
Installation, operating and maintenance instructions shall be submitted in English.
3403. MATERIALS
All materials shall be new, free from defects and shall be the best available for the
purpose for which used, considering strength, ductility, suitability for the intended service
and best engineering practice.
164
Materials to be furnished by the Contractor shall conform to the following
specifications:
a) Steel Plates
Steel plates for welded construction of manhole and cover shall conform to material
specification ASTM A 570 Grade C.
b) High Strength Steel Bolts, Nuts and Washers
Bolts, nuts and washers for watertight connection shall conform to ASTM designation
A 325 "High Strength Steel Bolts for Structural Steel Joints, including Suitable Nuts and
Plain Hardened Washers".
c) Lock Washers
Lock washers shall conform to SAE proportions, regular series and shall be spring
steel.
d) Iron Casting
Cast iron for general purpose iron castings shall conform to ASTM Designation A 48,
"Gray Iron Castings", Class 50.
e) Rubber Gasket
Rubber gasket shall be the continuous ring type, made of a special composition
rubber. The compound shall be of first grade natural crude, synthetic rubber, or a suitable
combination thereof. The gasket shall be so formed and cured as to be dense, homogenous,
and have a smooth surface free of blisters, pits and other imperfections. The gasket shall be of
sufficient volume to fill substantially the recess provided when the joint is assembled and
shall be sole element depended upon to make the joint water tight.
f) Galvanized Manhole Cover
Manhole cover shall be hot-dipped zinc galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153.
g) Bronze Castings
Bronze casting shall conform to ASTM Designation B 584 or 937 Alloy 862.
3404. FABRICATION OR MANUFACTURE
a) General. Workmanship shall be of the highest quality and in accordance with the
best shop practice of the industry. All work shall be in accordance with approved practices
and by approved machine methods. Like parts shall be interchangeable whenever possible.
Machining of fits on renewable parts shall be accurate to specified dimensions so that
replacement parts made in conformity with the Drawings may be installed.
b) Welding, Electric and Oxy-Acetylene
1. Preparation for Welding. Members to be joined by welding shall be cut
accurately to size and where required, shall be rolled or pressed to the proper
curvature. The edges of the members shall be sheared, flame cut and machined to
suit the required type of welding and to allow thorough penetration. The cut
surfaces shall expose sound metal free from laminations, surface defects caused
by shearing and flame-cutting operations and other injurious defects. The
165
surfaces of the members to be welded shall be free from grease, rust and other
foreign matter.
2. Welding Procedure. All welding shall be performed in accordance with a
procedure at least equal to standard required by qualification procedures of the
American Welding Society (AWS).
3. Qualification of Welders and Welding Operators. All welders and welding
operators assigned to the Work shall have passed a performance qualification test
at least equal to that specified in AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure".
c) Structure Work. Unless otherwise specified, design and fabrication of structural
parts shall conform to the applicable provision of the AISC.
d) Machine Work
1. General. All tolerances, allowances, and gauges for metal fits shall conform to
ANSI Standard B4a, "Tolerance, Allowances and Gauges for Metal Fits", or
other approved equivalent standard of other countries for the class of fit required.
Finished contact or bearing surfaces shall be true and exact to secure full contact.
Journal and sliding surfaces shall be polished and all surfaces shall be finished
with sufficient smoothness and accuracy to insure proper operation when
assembled. All drilled holes shall be accurately located and drilled from
templates.
2. Finished Surfaces. Surface finishes shall be indicated on the shop drawings in
accordance with ANSI B46.1, "Surface Roughness, Waviness and Lay".
3. Unfinished Surface. So far as practicable, all work shall be laid out to secure
proper matching of adjoining unfinished surfaces. Where there is a large
discrepancy between adjoining unfinished surfaces, they shall be chipped and
ground smooth, or machined, to secure proper alignment. Unfinished surface
shall be chipped or ground free of all projections and rough spots.
e) Steel Casting. Castings shall be free from injurious defects and shall be
satisfactorily cleaned for their intended use. The surfaces of castings which do not undergo
machining and are exposed in the final installation shall be free of foundry irregularities such
as projections, ridges, hollows, honey-combing, pock marks or chip marks, so that they shall
not require surface smoothing operations at the site prior to painting. The Structure of the
castings shall be homogeneous and free from excessive non-metallic inclusions.
f) Pins and Pin Holes. Pin holes shall be bored true to gauges, smooth and straight,
and at right angles to the axis of the member. The boring shall be done after the member is
securely fastened in position.
g) Protection of Machined Surfaces. Machine finished surfaces shall be thoroughly
cleaned of foreign matter. Finished surfaces of large parts and other surfaces shall be
protected with wooden pads or other suitable means. Unassembled pins and bolts shall be
oiled and wrapped with moisture resistance paper or protected by other approved means.
h) Lubrication. Before assembly, all bearing surfaces, journals, and grease and oil
grooves shall be carefully cleaned and lubricated with an approved oil or grease. After
assembly, each lubricating system shall be filled with an approved lubricant.
166
3405. DESIGN AND TEST PRESSURE
The piping system, including valves, manholes and covers shall meet the following
design conditions:
a) Pressure Head
The system specified herein shall operate at full hydraulic pressure of 100-feet head.
b) Hydrostatic Test Pressure
The pipes, valves, manholes and covers shall be designed to safely withstand a test
pressure equivalent to 1-1/2 times the operating pressure.
3406. INSTALLATION
The Contractor shall furnish and install all pipes, fittings, manholes and covers,
valves, supports, bolts, nuts, gaskets, jointing materials and all other appurtenances as shown
in the drawings and as required to provide a complete and workable installation.
All anchor bolts shall be set accurately to the grade and alignment designated on the
drawing or as directed.
Before installation, the rust preventive compounds on all thread joints shall be
removed with a solvent and all joints shall be re-lubricated, where applicable.
After installation is completed and before closing the manhole cover, the pipes shall
be checked to ensure that all extraneous foreign matter has been removed.
3407. TEST AND ADJUSTMENTS
After complete installation and adjustment ready for operation, Contractor shall
conduct test runs for the blow-off valves. The cost of performing the test shall be considered
included in the contract unit price.
All test shall be performed in the presence of an authorized representative of NIA. All
data shall be certified correct and submitted to NIA. All defects found during the test as a
result of the installation work shall be corrected accordingly to the satisfaction of NIA.
3408. PAINTING
All surfaces subject to rust or corrosion shall be given coat of paint in accordance
with the provisions of Section XXXVI, Painting Metalworks.
3409. PROTECTION COATING
a) Immersed Steel
Except where otherwise specified, all steel surfaces and all parts of structures that
have surfaces which are normally immersed in water, shall be painted with two coats of coal
tar epoxy paint in accordance with SSPC No. 11.01 Coal Tar Epoxy-Polyamide Black (or
Dark Red) Paint System.
b) Embedded Steelwork
167
Where not otherwise specified, all steel surfaces which will be embedded or against
which concrete shall be placed shall be cleaned in accordance with SSPC-SP3 then painted
with one coat of cement latex milk consisting of 10 parts of Portland Cement (by weight),
five parts of water and one part of modified latex emulsion.
3410. CLEANING AND SHIPPING
All pipes and fittings, manholes and covers, shall be cleaned internally of all oil,
grease, loose mill scale, rust weld spatter and flux by pickling if necessary. All welds shall be
thoroughly cleaned by all flux, and wire brushed.
For shipping, the ends of all threaded pipes shall be capped with suitable metal
protectors. Flange sections shall be protected with suitable wooden covers bolted in positions.
All pipes shall be protected against rust in transit and storage.
Steel pipe manholes, manhole covers and blow-off valve compartment including all
accessories shall be measured per assembly completely installed and accepted.
Payment for steel pipe manhole, manhole covers and blow-off valve including all accessories,
measured as provided above shall be made at the contract unit price per assembly, which
price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor,
equipment, tools including all incidentals and subsidiary works necessary for the successful
completion of the work described under this Section
SECTION XXXV. MISCELLANEOUS METALWORKS AND MATERIALS
3501. SCOPE
The work under this Section shall include furnishing, delivering and installing all
miscellaneous metalworks and materials shown on the drawings which shall include but not
limited to the following:
1. Trashracks or screens including frames, guides and anchors

2. Steel ladder rungs
3. Steel gratings including frames, guides and anchors
4. G.I. Pipes guardrails and handrails
5. Bearing plates for bridges
6. Bearing pads and filler board for bridges
7. Perforated drain pipes
168
8. Embedded metals including plates, anchors, angles, strap anchors, bolts, nuts
washers, flanges, fittings, bends, tees, cross, elbow and other metals or materials
which are not paid for under other items in the Bill of Quantities
9. Timber
All metalworks treated in this Section shall conform to the following standards or
their approved equivalent standards:
ASTM AG General requirements for delivery of rolled steel plates, shapes, sheet
piling bars for structural use
ASTM A36 Structural Steel
AWS D1-1 Structural Welding Code
AWS Code for Arc and Gas Welding in Building construction
ASTM A307 ASTM A307 Specification for Low-Carbon Steel Externally and
Internally Threaded Std. Fasteners
ASTM A325 High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints including Suitable Nuts
and Plain Hardened Washers
ASTM A108 Cold Finish Carbon Steel Bars and Shafting
AISC Manual of Steel Construction
ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot Galvanized) Coatings on products fabricated from rolled,
pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strips
ASTM A53 Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe
Metal Grating Metal Grating Institute Handbook Pittsburg, Pa. U.S.A
ASTM 120 Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and

Seamless Steel Pipe for Ordinary Uses
AISC Specification for Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel

for Buildings
ASTM A153 Galvanized Steel Pipes
3502. FABRICATION
169
Details of design and fabrication not covered by the drawings nor by these
specifications shall conform to the applicable provisions of the latest "Specifications for the
Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings" including all
supplementary provisions of the American Institute of Steel Construction.
All metalworks and materials furnished by the Contractor and all works performed
will be subject to rigid inspection. No metalworks or materials shall be delivered to the
jobsite until inspection at the Contractor's fabricating plant has been made, in accordance
with the provisions of these specifications.
Shearing and cutting by torch or electric arc shall be performed carefully, and all
portions of the work which will be exposed to view after completion shall be finished neatly.
Re-entrant cuts and copes shall be shaped notch-free to a radius of at least 12 millimeters.
In bolted connections, all holes shall be cylindrical, unless otherwise shown on the
drawings, perpendicular to the members, and clean cut and without burned or ragged edges.
Holes in materials more than 20 mm thick shall be drilled. All other holes may be punched or
drilled to full size. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, drilled holes shall be 1 mm
larger than the nominal diameter of the bolt. Outside burrs resulting from drilling shall be
removed with a tool making a 1 mm bevel. Likewise for punched holes, unless otherwise
shown on the drawings, the diameter of the punch for punching to full size shall also be 1 mm
larger than the nominal diameter of the bolt. The diameter of the die shall be not more than
1.50 mm larger than the diameter of the punch.
Welding shall be done by the shielded-arc method except where otherwise

specifically permitted by the Engineer. Welding rods shall be furnished by the Contractor and
shall be of heavily coated type designated for all position welding, and the size, type and
nomenclature of the rods shall be subject to approval by NIA. Welds shall be made as
indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the conventional symbols of the American
Welding Society (AWS). Welding shall be done in accordance with Sections 3, 4, 5 and 6 of
the AWS' code for Arc Welding and Gas Welding in Building Construction, latest revision.
All butt welds shall have complete penetration. Teeming of multiple layer welds will not be
permitted.
3503. INSTALLATION
All metalworks and materials shall be installed in accordance with the details shown
on the Drawings. Care shall be taken to insure that all parts of metalworks are installed in
correct position and alignment. Metalworks to be embedded in concrete shall be located
accurately and shall be held in correct position and alignment during placing and setting of
the concrete. Anchor bolts shall be set and held in position before concrete is placed, unless
otherwise approved. Where it is impractical to embed anchor bolts or ladder, stairways or
other comparatively light metal work before the concrete is placed and when it is necessary to
anchor parts where inserts or anchor bolts have not been provided, holes shall be drilled in
the concrete and expansion anchors with bolts shall be installed as directed. The surfaces of
all metalworks to be in contact with or embedded in concrete or grouting mortar shall be
cleaned.
Suitable blockouts shall be constructed in the concrete where required for installation
of railing posts and other metalworks. After installation of the metalworks, blockouts shall be
170
filled with concrete or grout as shown on the drawings. Contractor shall drill or drill and tap,
as required all holes in metalwork required for installation of the metalwork.
Contractor shall drill all holes in concrete required for the installation of expansion
anchors. Contractor shall slot or cut or split metalwork in the field as required for installation.
3504. TRASHRACKS OR SCREENS
Trashracks or screens shall be a substantial all welded sectionalized steel structure,

generally as shown on the drawings. Special care shall be taken to insure that all members
shall be in exact position and alignment. Vertical members shall be welded to horizontal
members. Trashracks shall be prime coated and painted in accordance with Section XXXVI,
Painting Metalworks.
3505. STEEL LADDER RUNGS
Steel ladder rungs shall be furnished and installed in accordance with details shown
on the drawings. Bars used for steel ladder rungs shall be cold drawn steel wire conforming
to the provisions of ASTM Designation A32 or its latest revision. The wire gage or bar size
and spacing shall be as designated on the Drawings.
Ladder rungs embedded in concrete shall be free of mortar, oil dirt, loose mil scale,
loose rust and other coatings that would destroy or reduce the bond. Bars shall conform to the
dimensions shown on the drawings. Bars with links or improper bends or other deformations
shall not be used or made as rungs.
3506. STEEL GRATINGS
Gratings shall be provided as indicated on the drawings. Steel gratings shall be

fabricated from steel shapes and flat bars provided with stiffeners and welded to form a rigid
structures as shown on the drawings.
Flat bars of sizes and spaces shown on the drawings shall be welded at their ends into
continuous rolled steel angles and provided with stiffeners. The sizes and dimensions of
angles or stiffeners shall not be less than those shown on the drawings.
Steel gratings used as cover for the intake barrel manhole shall be provided with
rollers on both ends as shown on the drawings, such that this cover could be opened by
sliding. Roller guides shall not be shorter than the length shown on the drawings.
3507. GALVANIZED IRON PIPE GUARDRAILS AND HANDRAILS
Galvanized iron pipe guardrail and handrail shall be provided at operating platforms
and other places shown on the drawings. Sizes and dimensions shall be as shown in detail on
the drawings. All railings shall be of threaded ends and furnished with complete joint fittings.
Vertical members for guardrails shall be installed plumbed and horizontal members
parallel to the surface of anchorage. Vertical members shall be installed in prepared sockets,
braced in true alignment and secured permanently by either threaded floor flange which is
anchored to the concrete structure by means of expansion bolts as shown on the drawings or
by cement grout consisting of 1 part cement and 3 parts sand (by wt.) mixed to a consistency
as directed by the Engineer. Bolts in bolted connections shall be firmly tightened.
171
Galvanized surfaces that are abraded or damaged during installation shall be
thoroughly wire brushed removing all loose and cracked coating and then painted with two
coats of high zinc- dust content paint conforming to the requirements of Federal Specification
MIL-P-21035 or approved equal.
3508. BEARING PLATES FOR BRIDGES
Bearing plates, bars, rockers, assemblies, and other expansion or fixed devices for
bridges shall be constructed in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings and shall
be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication conforming to ASTM Designation A120 or its latest
revision.
The bearing plates shall be set level and the rockers and other expansion devices shall
be set to conform to the temperature at the time of erection or to the setting specified.
When bearing assemblies or masonry plates are shown on the Drawings to be placed
(not embedded) directly on concrete, the concrete bearing area shall be constructed slightly
above grade and shall be finished by grinding or other approved means to a true level plane
which shall not vary perceptively from a straight edge placed in any direction across the area.
The finished plane shall not vary more than 0.30 centimeter from the elevation shown on the
Drawings.
When elastic bearing pads, or preformed fabric pads are shown on the Drawings, the
concrete surface on which pads or packing are to be placed shall be wood float finished to a
level plane which shall not vary more than 0.40 centimeter from a straight edge placed in any
direction across the area. The finished plane shall not vary more than 0.30 centimeter from
the elevation shown on the Drawings.
3509. BEARING PADS AND FILLER BOARDS
Bearing pads of sizes indicated on the Drawings shall be neophrene, hardness 60 and
filler boards shall be canex board or as indicated on the Drawings. The concrete surfaces on
which bearing pads are to be placed shall be wood float finished to a level plane which shall
not vary more than 0.15 centimeter from a straight edge placed in any direction across the
area. The finished plane shall not vary more than 0.30 centimeter from the elevation shown
on the Drawings.
3510. PERFORATED DRAIN PIPES
Perforated drain pipes shall be installed at locations shown on the drawings and as
directed by the Engineer. The sizes and type of materials to be used shall be as indicated on
the drawings.
3511. BOLTS, ANCHORS, ANGLES, NUTS, WASHERS AND OTHER

METALS
Except for studbolts, the length of connection bolts shall be in 6 mm variations and
when in the structure, the bolts shall extend at least six millimeters beyond the nuts. Anchor
bolts and studbolts shall be as shown on the Drawings. Threads of anchor bolts shall be given
a heavy coat of rust preventive compound in the shop. Washers shall be used under heads of
172
all connection bolts where shown or called for on the drawings. Bevelled washers shall be
used on sloping flanges.
3512. GROUT AND MORTAR
Grout and mortar for miscellaneous metalworks shall be mixed in the proportions and
to the specified consistency in accordance with the requirements of Section XV, Concrete.
Before placing grout and mortar, the surfaces of concrete on which grout will be placed shall
be roughened and shall be cleaned of all laitance, loose or defective concrete coatings and
other foreign materials by effective means followed by thorough washing and such surfaces
shall be kept moist for at least 24 hours.
3513. TIMBER
This work shall consist of timber structures constructed to the dimension, lines and
grades shown on the Drawings and in accordance with the specification. The timber shall be
treated or kiln dried.
In handling treated timber, care shall be exercised so as not to break or penetrate the
treatment with any tool or handling equipment. Any damage timber shall be replaced without
any extra compensation. Any cut made or hole bored in treated timber that exposes untreated
wood shall be given 3-coats of hot creosote oil before the exposed part is assembled.
All timber shall be of the specie specified in the drawing, shall be sound, free from
knots, splits, ring separation, wormholes or any defects which will impair its strength or
render it unfit for its intended use.
All timber which is to be stored on the job for any length of time, prior to its use in
the structure, shall be neatly stacked in piles to prevent warping or distortion. Un-treated
timber shall be open stacked at least 300 mm above the ground and shall be close-stacked and
piled to prevent warping. The ground underneath and in the vicinity of all piles shall be
cleared of all weeds and rubbish.
Measurement for payment of miscellaneous metalwork and materials will be made

either on the weight of metalwork in kilogram or on the number of assembly or pieces
actually installed in accordance with the table as follows:
Metal/Material Metal/Material
1. Trashrack or screens including frames, Kilogram/Set

guides and anchors
2. Steel ladder rungs Kilogram
3. Steel grating, including frames guides and Kilogram

anchors
173
4. G.I. Pipe guardrails and handrails Kilogram/L.M.
5. Bearing Plates for Bridges Piece
6. Bearing Pads and Filler Boards for Bridges Piece
7. Perforated drain pipes Kilogram/L.M.
8. Embedded metals including plates, Kilogram/Lump sum

anchors, angles, strap anchors, bolts, nuts
and washers, flanges, fittings, bends, tees,
cross, elbows and other metals or
materials which are not paid under other
items in the Bill of Quantities
9. Timber Set/Assembly or bd. ft.
Weights shall be computed based on the theoretical weight of such material duly
certified by the manufacturer.
Payment for miscellaneous metalwork will be made at the contract unit price per kilogram,
per piece, or per assembly whichever is called for in the Bill of Quantities which price and
payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishings all labor tools, materials and all
incidentals and subsidiary works necessary for the successful completion of the
miscellaneous metalworks and materials described under this Section
SECTION XXXVI. PAINTING METALWORK
3601. GENERAL
Contractor shall clean all surfaces of metalworks and apply paint and protective
coatings as hereinafter provided and shall furnish all the required materials. Surfaces not
required to be painted or coated, but which are adjacent to surfaces to be cleaned and painted,
shall be protected against contamination and damage during the cleaning and painting
operations. Before proceeding with the painting or coating operations, Contractor shall clean
and repair all shop applied paint which is defective or damaged. Materials which have been
painted shall be handled with care and protected as necessary to preserve the coating in good
condition. Temporary or permanent welding will not be permitted on areas where the welding
will damage paint or other protective coatings unless the areas of coating which could be
damaged thereby are accessible for repairing and inspection. Except where specified,
Contractor will not be required to disassemble machinery, equipment or other metal work for
the purpose of painting the interiors. Tinting where required for color contrast, shall be done
by using not more than three ounces of tinting color per U.S. gallon of paint.
174
Items being delivered shop-coated with priming paint or standard shop coat will have
coatings compatible with the types of paint indicated in the following schedule. Certain items
will be furnished with a gasoline-soluble rust-preventive compound.
Contractor shall take care to procure the painting materials according to a schedule
which will insure that paint will not be stored longer than the limits recommended by the
manufacturers.
3602. CLEANING AND PAINTING SCHEDULE
No. Item Method of Surface Paint or No. of

Preparation (*) Coating Coats
Material
1 Operating mechanisms; B Red-lead 1

gate hoist; non-water Priming paint,
bearing metal pipe and Damaged areas of shop- Type II
standard valves and applied prime coats and
fittings; pipe hangers and any unpainted surfaces
supports; handrails, stairs, that require painting
walkways gra-tings unless
galvanized, ladders; A
structural steel; hatch
covers, hatch frames; base Damaged areas of shop
applied prime coats and Machinery 2
plates; & miscellaneous
areas of field-applied paint or regular
non-water bearing metal
prime coats that require aluminum
work to be subjected to
cleaning except that clean Paint,
ordinary atmospheric
surfaces prime coats will whichever is
exposure and to public
require no further surface directed
view but not including
items otherwise tabulated. preparation
Damage areas of items

furnished completely Damage areas
painted shall be
repaired to
match existing
surface
2 Trashracks, guides, frames, C Self-curing in 1

stems, gates and any other organic zinc
metalwork not otherwise Damaged areas of shop prime coating
specifically tabulated, all applied prime coat (Equal to
of which will be Dimetcote No.
intermittently submerged, 4 Amercoat
or otherwise subjected to Corp., Brea,
excessive spray or California)
Coal tar-epoxy
175
condensation coating
A or more
to
Undamaged areas of produce a
shop-applied prime coats minimum
and areas of field-applied dry-film
prime coats that require thickness
cleaning except that clean of 16 mils
surfaces of field-applied
prime coats will require
no further surface
preparation
VR-6 vinyl
C
resin paint
Upstream face of steel 6
see paragraph 3303 for
Gates
letter identification
3
Red-lead
C
priming paint
For unpainted surfaces type IV
1
Exterior surfaces of: all
ferrous non-galvanized
surfaces of water-bearing B Phenolicresin
4 valves; steel gates and any aluminum paint
other metalwork w/c will For areas of Type IV re-
be intermittently lead shop coat 2
submerged or subject-ted
to spray or condensation
and which will be subject
also to sun- light exposure
or to public view
Galvanized surfaces
Zinc dust-zinc
exposed to public view
oxide priming
which are required to be
A paint
painted for decorative
machinery
enamel semi-
176
purposes For galvanized surfaces gloss enamel
interior oil
paint or regular
aluminum paint
whichever is
directed
5
One heavy coat
of gasoline
soluble rust-
preventive
compound
Machined surfaces, steel

cables and finished
surfaces which will be in
rolling or sliding contact Priming paint
and w/c are not required to A
specified for
be painted or lubricated other surfaces
of the same
metalwork 1
Surfaces of metalwork
None
which will be inaccessible
after installation or
6
assembly
None
B or C
As specified for other

surfaces of the metal work
if furnished unpainted or 3
Stainless steel; non-

7 ferrous metalwork, gal
A
vanized metalwork w/c
will be exposed outdoors; If furnished prime painted
and surfaces of cast-iron
which are to be buried or
continuously subjected to
moisture and not exposed Painting is not required
to public view unless other-wise
tabulated
None
Interior surfaces of cast-
177
iron pipe, valves, fittings
Metal surfaces to be None

encased in concrete and
which concrete is to be Painting is not required
placed unless specifically listed
elsewhere in this
tabulation
Painting is not required
3603. PREPARATION OF SURFACES
Surface preparation shall be in accordance with one of the following methods. The
method to be used for each item is indicated in the painting tabulation. Weld spatter, burrs, or
other objectionable surface irregularities shall be removed or repaired before cleaning. Any
dirt or dust remaining from the cleaning operation shall be removed before the surfaces are
painted. Cleaning solvent shall be mineral spirits or xylol except that xylol shall be used for
surfaces which require coal tar coatings. In the event that rust forms or the surfaces becomes
otherwise contaminated in the interval between cleaning and painting, or between coats of
paints, recleaning will be required.
Method A. All oil, grease and dirt shall be removed by the use of clean solvent and
clean wiping materials.
Method B. All oil, grease and dirt shall be removed by the use of clean solvent and
clean wiping materials. Following the solvent cleaning, the surfaces to be painted
shall be cleaned of all defective or damaged areas of existing paint, and of all loose
rust, loose mil scale, and other foreign substances by scraping, chipping, blasting,
power wire brushing or other effective means.
Method C. All oil, grease and dirt shall be removed by the use of clean solvent and
clean wiping materials. Following the solvent cleaning, the surfaces to be painted
shall be blast cleaned to base metal, using dry, hard, sharp sand or steel grit, to
produce a gray-etched surface. The blasting material shall pass a No. 16 United States
standard screen and at least 85 per cent shall be retained on a No. 50 United States
standard screen.
3604. APPLICATION
Materials shall be thoroughly mixed and surfaces shall be clean and free from
moisture at the time of application. Effective means shall be provided for removing free oil
and moisture from the air-supply lines of all spraying equipment. Nozzle pressure consistent
with acceptable finish results shall be employed when spray painting. Each coat shall be free
from runs, pinholes and sags. Each coat shall be allowed to dry or to harden before the
succeeding coat is applied. Thicknesses specified in millimeters shall be measured by an
approved dry-film thickness gage. Red-lead priming paint, regular or phenolicresin aluminum
178
paint, and machinery paint may be thinned if necessary to permit satisfactory application, in
which event mineral spirits shall be used and the amount of thinner shall be kept to a
minimum and in no event shall it exceed 15 per cent of the paint. Thinning of other materials
will be permitted only if approved by the Engineer. If necessary to improve application
properties, cold-applied paints may be heated by means of a hot water to a temperature not
exceeding 38 degree centigrade.
Application of specific materials shall be as follows:
(a) Red-lead priming paint shall be applied at a maximum coverage of 12.5 square
meters per liter per coat for type II and a maximum coverage of between 11 and
12.5 square meters per liter coat for Type IV. The first coat shall be applied by
either brush or spray. Following the first coat, an additional tinted brush coat
shall be applied over all rivets, welds, bolts, seams, sharp corners and edges
before subsequent painting. Alternate coats shall be tinted for color contrast using
IB black.
(b) Aluminum paints (except aluminum paint for VR-6 vinyl- resin seal coats) shall
be applied by spraying at a maximum coverage of 12.5 square meters per liter per
coat for regular aluminum paint and a maximum coverage of 10 square meters
per liter per coat for phenolic-resin Aluminum paint. The paint shall be prepared
by mixing 240 grams of aluminum paste per liter of mixing varnish and only
enough paint for each day's use shall be prepared at one time. The first coat shall
be tinted for color contrast using 2A blue.
(c) Machinery paint shall be applied at a maximum coverage of 12.5 square meter
per liter per coat.
(d) Rust-preventive compound shall be applied by any convenient method to insure a
complete coverage with a heavy uniform coating
(e) Vinyl-resin paint VR-6
Coat Alternate Colors Apply by Maximum Minimum
of Coverage Drying Time
SQ.M-/liter
Prime Dark Gray Brush 6.2 4 hours
Body 3 or more coats Spray 3 each coat 12 hours each c
alternated red,
gray, red
Seal 2 or more Spray 5 each coat 12 hours
aluminum between coats
pigmented and at last 10
days placing in
service
The minimum acceptable dry-film thickness for the completed system shall be 0.25
millimeter with 0.20 millimeter thickness through the last body coat.
Paint applied by brush shall be applied in generous brushfuls and quickly brushed out
of smooth before significant evaporation of Solvents occur and before brush drag develops.
179
Pressure pot equipment shall be use for spray application and the equipment shall be
capable of operating at atomization pressure up to 7 kilograms per square centimeter.
Application shall be such as to avoid excessive loses of volatiles before the paint spray strikes
the surface. Each stroke of the spray gun shall make lap over the previous stroke so that a
continuous wet film is obtained on the surface. To prevent sagging and to insure the
minimum dry-film thickness, it may be necessary to make repeated passes with the spray gun.
Where this is necessary, each additional pass shall be by strokes at right angles to the
previous pass.
Specific color matches will not be required except that all paint used for the last coat
shall be uniform in color.
(f) Cold-applied coal-tar paint, CA-50, shall be applied at a coverage of

approximately 3 square meters per liter per coat. It shall be applied by brushing.
Thinning will not be permitted.
(g) Coal-tar epoxy coating shall be applied at a maximum coverage of 2.7 square
meters per liter per coat. Alternate coats shall be of different colors and the final
coat shall be a color other than black, the color being subject to the approval of
the Engineer. Surface preparation, coating preparation, application and thinning
shall all be done in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
3605. MATERIALS
All pigmented paints and primers shall be purchased in sealed containers packaged by
the manufacturer and shall be delivered with the seals unbroken. Colors of finish paints shall
match color samples furnished by NIA unless color requirements are specifically stated
otherwise. Materials shall be in accordance with the following specifications:
(a) U.S. Federal Specifications

1. Red-lead priming paint, TT-P-86c, Type II and Type IV.
2. Zinc-dust zinc oxide primer, TT-P64lb, Type II.
3. Mixing varnish for regular aluminum paint, TT-V-8lb,
Type II, Class B
4. Mixing varnish for phenolic-resin aluminum paint,
TT-V-119.
5. Aluminum paste, TT-A-320a, Type II, Class B.
6. Machinery enamel, TT-E-489b, Class A.
7. Pigment-in-oil (tinting colors) TT-P-38lb.
8. Mineral spirits, TT-T-29la, Grade I.
(b) U.S. Bureau of Reclamation Specification
1. Cold-applied, coal tar paint CA-50

2. Vinyl-resin paint, VR-6, aluminum paste and thinner.
180
(c) United States Maritime Administration Specification
Rust preventive compound, 52 MA-602a, type B, medium except that equally effective
inhibitors, in suitable quantities may be used in lieu of the specified percentage of chromates.
(d) U.S. Military Specifications
Coal tar epoxy coating, MIL-P-23236, Type I, and II, Class 2.
(e) Certification, Sampling and Testing of Materials
Contractor shall furnish manufacturer's certificates of compliance with specifications

for all paint materials being furnished.
Contractor shall conduct film thickness measurements and electrical inspection of the
coated surfaces and shall recoat and repair defective work as necessary for compliance with
the specifications. All test equipment shall be furnished by the Contractor. Contractor shall
provide magnetic type dry film thickness gage for measuring paint thickness and a high
voltage type detector for electrical inspection of coal tar epoxy resin coatings. All tests to be
done shall be under the direction of the Engineer and testing equipment to be used shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer.
3606. COSTS
No separate measurement and payment will be made for the above painting
requirements and the cost for the painting and test shall be considered included in the various
items in the Bill of Quantities for which painting is required.
SECTION XXXVII. ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACING - PLANT MIX
3701. DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of furnishing and mixing aggregates and asphalt binder at a
central mixing plant, transporting the mixture and spreading and compacting it on a prepared
base in accordance with the Specifications and the Drawings.
3702. MATERIAL_REQUIREMENTS
A. Aggregates
1. Coarse and fine aggregates shall be clean, hard, tough, sound particles free from
decomposed materials, vegetable matter and other deleterious substances.
2. Coarse aggregate, which is material retained on a 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve, shall

consist of crushed rock or crushed river gravel. At least 50 percent by weight of the coarse
aggregate shall have at least one fractured face.
3. Fine aggregate, which is material passing a 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve, shall consist of
sand or stone screenings or a mixture thereof. At least 50 percent by weight of the fine
181
aggregates shall be angular or fractured particles. Sand shall not comprise more than 25% by
weight of the total aggregate.
4. The combined aggregate shall conform to one of the gradings shown in Table I.
When the combined grading of the coarse and fine aggregates is deficient in material passing
the No. 200 sieve, additional filler materials shall be added. The filler material shall consist of
finely divided rock dust, hydrated lime, portland cement or other suitable mineral matter and
shall conform to the grading shown in Table II. However the grading shall be adjusted to take
account of the results of the trials to allow the asphalt concrete mix to conform in all respects
to the requirements for the job mix specified in paragraph 3703.
TABLE I AGGREGATE GRADING FOR ASPHALT CONCRETE
MIX CLASS CLASS B
MIX USE WEARING, BINDER
MINIMUM COMPACTED
THICKNESS 35 mm
Asphalt Concrete Surfacing-Plant Mix
U.S. STANDARD SIEVE PERCENT PASSING BY WEIGHT

mm alternative
25 ( 1 in)
19 (3/4 in) 100
l2.5 (1/2 in) 80-l00
9.5 (3/8 in) 70-90
4.75 (No. 4) 50-70
2.36 (No. 8) 35-50
0.600 (No. 30) 18-29
0.300 (No. 50) 13-23
0.150 (No. 100) 8-16
0.075 (No. 200) 4-10
TABLE II FILLER GRADING FOR ASPHALT CONCRETE
US STANDARD SIEVE PERCENT PASSING BY WEIGHT
mm alternative
0.600 (No. 30) 100

0.300 (No. 50) 65-100
0.075 (No. 200) 80-100
182
5. The coarse and fine aggregates shall meet the following requirements.
a) The percentage of wear by the Los Angeles Abrasion Test (AASHTO T 96)
shall not be more than 40.
b) The loss when subjected to five cycles of the Sodium Sulphate Soundness
test (AASHTO T104) shall be less than 12%.
c) The Sand Equivalent (AASHTO T 176) determined after all processing

except for addition of asphalt cement shall not be less than 45.
d) All aggregates shall be non-plastic
e) The flakiness index of the aggregate retained on the 9.5 mm (3/8 in) sieve
then tested in accordance with BS812 shall not exceed 35%. (The flakiness index of
an aggregate is the percentage by weight of particles in it whose least dimension
(thickness) is less than three fifths of their mean dimension. The test is not applicable
to material passing a 6.3 mm (1/4 in sieve.)
B. Asphaltic Material
Asphalt binder to be mixed with the aggregate shall be asphalt cement penetration
grade 60-70 or 85-100 as specified in the Contract and shall meet the requirements of
paragraph 3705.
C. Composition of Mix
The asphalt concrete mixture shall conform to the requirements of Table III.
However, the exact composition of the mixture shall be adjusted to take account of the results
of the mix trials to allow the asphalt concrete mix to conform in all respects to the
requirements of paragraph 3703.
TABLE III ASPHALT CEMENT CONTENT OF ASPHALT CONCRETE MIX
% OF ASPHALT CEMENT OF TOTAL MIX BY WEIGHT
BINDER COURSE WEARING COURSE

Minimum maximum minimum maximum
4.0 5.5 5.0 7.0
3703. CONSTRUCTION_REQUIREMENTS
A) Mixing Plant
1.The plant shall be either a batch plant or continuous mix plant of adequate capacity,
coordinated and operated to produce a mixture within the limits of the Specification.
2. The plant scales for any weigh-box or hopper shall be of either the beam or the
springless dial type, sensitive to one-half of one percent of the maximum load that may be
183
required and shall be of standard make and design. When of the beam type there shall be a
separate beam with tell-tale indicator for each size of aggregate, and a tare beam for
balancing the hopper.
3. Tanks for storage of asphalt cement shall have a capacity of at least 7 days run and
shall be capable of heating the material, under effective and positive control at all times, to
the temperature requirements given in paragraph 3406. The method of heating shall be such
that the products of combustion or the flame shall not come into contact with the asphalt
cement. Before the asphalt cement is placed in the mixer it shall be heated in a direct fired
heater of such capacity that it need never be less than half full. Heating of material supplied
in barrels shall be subject to the same conditions.
4. The plant shall be provided with accurate mechanical means for uniform feeding of
the aggregates into the dryer so that a uniform production and a uniform temperature of the
heated aggregates is secured.
5. A rotary dryer of satisfactory design for drying and heating the aggregates shall be
provided. The dryer shall be capable of drying and heating the aggregates to the temperature
requirements specified in paragraph 3703 D for the type of asphaltic material to be used.
6. Suitable screens capable of screening all aggregates to the sizes required, and
having normal capacities slightly excess of the maximum output of the mixing plant shall be
provided.
7. The plant shall include at least three storage bins for screened aggregates with total
capacity of not less than three times the dead load of the mixer in the case of a batch mixer,
or not less than a run of 10 minutes in the case of a continuous mixer. Bins shall be divided
into compartments arranged to ensure separate and adequate storage of appropriate sizes of
aggregate. Each compartment shall be provided with an overflow pipe that shall be of such a
size and so located as to prevent any backing up of material into other bins. Adequate dry
storage shall be provided for filler, if used, and satisfactory provision made for proportioning
the filler for each batch of mixture.
8. Satisfactory means either by weighing, metering or volumetric measurement, shall

be provided to obtain the proper amount of asphalt cement, and all measuring devices shall be
sensitive to a two per cent tolerance of the amount required. Means shall be provided for
checking the quantity or rate of flow of asphalt cement into the mixer. Suitable means shall
also be provided, either by steam jacketing or other insulation, for maintaining the specified
temperature of the asphalt cement in the pipe lines, meters, weight buckets, spray bars and
other containers or flow lines.
9. If an asphalt bucket is used for weighing the asphalt cement, it shall have sufficient
capacity to hold not less than twenty per-cent of the weight of aggregate required for one
batch. It shall be steam jacketed or equipped with properly insulated electric heating units and
shall be suspended on dial scales equipped with a telltale device so that the tare weight can be
accurately measured to a tolerance of two percent of the weight required. The bucket shall be
so arranged that it will deliver the heated asphalt cement in a thin uniform sheet or in multiple
streams the full width of the mixer, except in the case of a rotary mixer where the asphalt
cement will be sprayed into the mix.
184
10. An armored thermometer to include the range from 93 degrees Centigrade to 204
degrees Centigrade shall be fixed in the asphalt cement feed line at a suitable location near
the discharge valve at the mixer unit. The plant shall be further equipped with an approved
thermometric instrument so placed at the discharge chute of the dryer as to register
automatically the temperature of the heated aggregate.
11. The plant shall be equipped with positive means to govern the time of mixing to
the satisfaction of the Engineer. The time of mixing shall be considered as the interval
between the time the asphalt cement is spread on the aggregate and the time the same
aggregate is discharged from the mixer.
12. The plant shall have an efficient dust collecting system. Provision shall be made to
waste the material so collected, or to return it uniformly to the mixture.
13. Adequate and safe stairways to the mixer platform and guarded ladders to other
plant units shall be placed at all points requiring accessibility during plant operations. All
gears, pulleys, chains, sprockets and other dangerous moving parts shall be adequately
guarded and protected. Ample and unobstructed space shall be provided on the mixing
platform. A clear and unobstructed space shall be maintained at all times in and around the
truck loading space, and this area shall be kept free from dripping from the mixing platform.
B) Special Requirements for Batching Plants
1. The plant shall include means for accurately weighing each size of aggregates in a
weigh box or hopper, suspended on scales, large enough in size to hold a full batch without
hand raking or running over. The weigh box or hopper shall be supported on a fulcrum and
knife edges so constructed that they will not be easily thrown out of alignment or adjustment.
Gates on both bins and hopper shall be so constructed as to prevent leakage when they are
closed.
2. The plant shall include a batch mixer of an approved twin pugmill type, rotary
drum type, or other type that has proved itself capable of producing a uniform mixture within
the limits of this Specification. It shall have a batch capacity of not less than 900 kg. If of the
pugmill type, the clearance of the blades from all fixed and moving parts shall not exceed 20
mm. If the mixing tank is not closed, it shall be fitted with a lid to prevent the dust from being
dispersed into the air. The mixer shall be so constructed as to prevent leakage of contents.
The mixer shall have an accurate time lock to control the operation of a complete mixing
cycle by locking the weigh box gate after the charging of the mixer until the closing of the
mixer gate at the completion of the cycle; it shall lock the asphalt bucket throughout the dry
mixing period and shall lock the mixer gate throughout the dry and wet mixing periods. The
dry mixing period is defined as the interval of time between the opening of the weigh box
gate and the application of asphalt cement. The wet mixing period is the interval of time
between the application of asphalt cement and the opening of the mixer gate.
3. The control of the timing shall be adjustable and capable of being set at maximum
intervals of 5 seconds for cycles of mixing up to 3 minutes. A mechanical batch counter shall
be installed as a part of the timing device and shall be so designed as to register only
completely mixed batches.
185
C) Special Requirements for Continuous Mixing Plants
1. The plant shall include a means for accurately proportioning each size of aggregate
either by weighing or by volumetric measurement. When proportioning is by volume, the unit
shall include a feeder mounted under the compartment bins. Each bin shall have an accurately
controlled gate, for volumetrically measuring the material drawn from each respective bin.
The gate shall be rectangular with dimensions of about 300 mm x 250 mm with one
dimension adjustable by positive mechanical means provided with a lock. An indicator shall
be provided on each gate to show the amount of the gate opening. Filler, if used, shall be
proportioned separately from a small hopper mounted directly over the mixer.
2. The plant shall provide for the calibration of gate openings by means of weighed
test samples. The materials fed out of the storage bins through their individual orifices shall
be by-passed to a suitable test box, each compartment of material being confined in a separate
box section. The plant shall be equipped to handle conveniently samples of about 400 kg to
be weighed on accurate scales.
3. Means shall be provided in the plant to afford positive interlocking control between
the flow of aggregate from the bins and the flow of asphalt cement from the meter or other
proportioning source to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
4. The plant shall include a continuous mixer of an approved type. The paddles shall
be of an adjustable type for angular position on the shafts and shall be reversible to retard the
flow of the mix. The mixer shall carry a manufacturer's plate giving the net volumetric
content of the mixer at various feed rates.
5. The mixing time shall be determined using the following formula:
Pugmill dead capacity in kilograms

Mixing time in seconds
Pugmill output in kilograms per sec
D) Preparation of Aggregates
Before being fed to the mixer aggregates and filler for binder and wearing courses
shall be separated into two or more sizes and stored separately. One storage unit shall contain
aggregate of such size that 80 percent will pass a 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve and the other unit
shall contain aggregate of such size that 80 percent will be retained on a 4.75 mm (No. 4)
sieve. Should the Contractor elect to use natural fine material, a further separate storage unit
for such material shall be provided. If filler is used as a separate component it shall also be
stored and measured separately and accurately before being fed into the mixer.
In placing the materials in storage or in moving them from storage to the mixer any
method which causes segregation or uncontrolled combination of materials of different
grading shall be discontinued and the segregated or degraded materials shall be rescreened, or
wasted, and, if necessary, passed through the dryer before being mixed.
Fine and coarse aggregates shall be fed into the dryer at a uniform rate of feed shall be
maintained within 10 percent of the amount set. Coarse and fine aggregates shall be dried to a
moisture content not exceeding 1% and heated so that when delivered to the mixer they shall
186
be at a temperature of 25 degrees Centigrade above the mixing temperature for the asphalt
cement being used, or as ordered by the Engineer.
E) Preparation and Composition of the Mixture
First the aggregate, including filler, shall be loaded into the mixer followed by the
asphalt cement. Mixing shall continue until all particles of aggregate are coated uniformly.
When the mixture is prepared in a twin pug mixer, the volume of aggregate shall not be so
great as to extend above the tips of the mixer blades when these blades are in a vertical
position. Mixing shall continue until all particles of aggregate are coated uniformly.
F) Mix Trials
1. Prior to commencing the supply of asphaltic concrete for flexible surfacing, the
Contractor shall submit full details to his proposed gradings and mixes to the Engineer. On
receiving preliminary approval of his proposals the Contractor shall then arrange to lay and
properly compact trial areas of binder and wearing course materials.
2. The Contractor shall place approximately 80t of asphaltic concrete in each trial area
which shall be large enough to demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the laying
and compaction equipment complies with the requirements of the Specification and that the
proposed mixes as laid are acceptable.
G) Job-Mix
1. Marshall specimens are to be obtained from each of the base and wearing course
materials supplied for trial laying purposes. The Marshall specimens shall be formed and
compacted in proper moulds, in accordance with the procedure described in ASTM D 1559.
2. The Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer by testing,

carried out in the presence of the Engineer's Representative, in accordance with the
procedures set out in the Marshall Method of Mix Design in the Asphalt Institute Manual,
Mix Design Methods, for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot mix Types, Manual Series No. 2
(MS-2), that the requirements given in Table IV below are achieved. The loss in Marshall
Stability by submerging specimens in water at 60 degrees Centigrade for 24 hours shall be
not more than 25 percent of the stability of the job-mix. In addition the Contractor shall
demonstrate by approved tests to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the proposed mix is not
subject to stripping of the asphalt cement from the aggregates.
TABLE IV MARSHALL TEST REQUIREMENT FOR ASPHALT CONCRETE
BINDER WEARING
COURSE COURSE
min max min max
STABILITY ( 1bf) 1200 - 1200 -

FLOW (0.01 in) 8 16 8 16
AIR VOIDS (1%) 3 8 3 6
AGGREGATES VOIDS
187
FILLED WITH ASPHALT
CEMENT (%) 60 75 70 80
FILLED COMPACTED DENSITY
MARSHALL SPECIMEN DENSITY 97 - 97
-
3. To determine the Marshall Specimen Density, from each set of six Marshall
specimens, the highest and lowest densities shall be ignored and the Marshall Specimen
Density shall then be the mean of the densities of the remaining four specimens.
4. As Compacted densities shall be determined of samples taken from the materials

laid and compacted for the mix trials as specified. At least four samples shall be taken for
each of the binder and wearing course materials, under the direction of the Engineer's
Representative, and the required percentage of the Marshall Specimen Density shall be
achieved in each case. Testing shall be in accordance with ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.
5. When the Engineer's Representative is satisfied that the materials and methods
demonstrated by the Contractor during trial laying comply with the requirements of the
Contract, the Engineer shall determine the job-mix and shall inform the Contractor in writing
of its composition. On receipt of such information the Contractor may proceed with the work.
H) Transportation of Plant Mixture
The mixture shall be transported to the site in steel-plate lined trucks with a minimum
capacity of 5 tons. The inside of the body shall be lightly coated with a soap or detergent
solution to prevent adhesion of the mixture and shall be equipped with covers or tarpaulins to
protect the mixture.
I) Spreading and Compacting
1. The surface to be covered shall be thoroughly cleaned. The Contractor shall, unless
otherwise ordered, apply not more than 4 hours before the placing of the mixed materials a
prime coat as specified in paragraph 3408 on the surface to be covered. All mixtures shall be
spread and all initial compaction completed at a temperature such that the viscosity of the
asphalt cement is within the range of 140 + 10 seconds Saybolt Furol. The mixture shall not
be placed on wet surfaces or when weather conditions will otherwise prevent its proper
handling or finishing.
2. Asphalt pavers shall be self-propelled mechanical spreading and finishing

equipment, provided with a screed or strike-off assembly capable of distributing the material
to not less than the full width of a traffic lane. Screed action shall include any cutting,
crowding or other practical action which is effective on the mixture without treating, shoving
or gouging, and which produces a surface texture of uniform appearance. The screen shall be
adjustable to the required section and thickness. The paver shall be provided with either a full
width roller or tamper or other suitable compacting devices. Pavers that leave ridges,
indentations or other marks in the surface that cannot be eliminated by rolling or prevented
by adjustment in operation shall not be used.
188
3. The prepared base to be surfaced shall be marked such that minor irregularities in
its surface are not repeated in the surfacing. Alternatively approved automatic levelling
devices may be used.
4. The sequence of laying shall be planned in advance and shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer's Representative. Where applicable laying of material shall
commence on the lower side of the road. Where a course previously laid is joined to a course
to be laid later, the first course shall be cut back to a vertical face and painted with asphalt
cement as directed by the Engineer.
5. A joint in any layer shall not lie above a joint in any lower bituminuos layer but
shall be laterally displaced by a minimum of 100 mm.
6. The mix shall be compacted immediately after placing. Initial rolling shall follow
the paver as closely as possible and shall be with a steel wheeled tandem or three-wheel roller
with a minimum wheel load of 50kN/m (265 lb/in) or an approved vibrating steel wheeled
roller. Immediately following the sealing of longitudinal joints, rolling shall commence on
the lower side of each strip laid and progress toward the higher side. Intermediate rolling with
a pneumatic tired roller with tire pressures not less than 620 kN/sq.m. (90 lbf/sq.in.) shall be
done immediately behind the initial rolling. Final rolling shall eliminate marks from previous
rolling. All rollers shall incorporate quick reversing mechanisms. In areas too small for the
roller, a vibrating plate compactor or hand tamper shall be used to achieve the specified
compaction.
7. Rolling shall continue as long as required to attain the minimum specified

compaction and until all surface movement has ceased.
J) Compliance with Job-Mix Requirements
1. The material being laid shall comply with the requirements of Table V of this
Section.
2. Modifications to the job-mix may only be made with the approval of the Engineer.
Should the Engineer at any time have reason to believe that the materials and methods of
laying are different from those approved, he shall so advise the Contractor in writing and may
order work on flexible surfacing to cease pending further trial laying and testing.
3. Following each day's work the Contractor shall cut core samples from locations
chosen by the Engineer's Representative. The cores will be used to test the density by either
ASTM D 1188. or ASTM D 272, whichever is applicable.
TABLE V COMPLIANCE WITH ASPHALT CONCRETE JOB-MIX
PERMISSIBLE VARIATION
US STANDARD SIEVE % of total mix
mm alternative by weight
4.75 (No. 4) & larger +6%
189
2.36 (No. 8) + 4%
0.600 (No. 30) + 3%
0.075 (No. 200) + 2%
Asphalt cement + 0.1%
K) Pavement Thickness and Tolerance
The asphalt concrete binder and wearing courses shall be laid to the designed levels
and transverse slopes as shown on the Drawings. The allowable tolerance shall be in
accordance with Table VI below:
TABLE VI TOLERANCES FOR FLEXIBLE SURFACING
Asphalt Concrete Bituminous Surfacing

Surface Treatment
(Binder & Wearing

Courses)
Permitted variation from + 15
design THICKNESS OF LAYER mm +5 -5
Permitted variation from +15

design LEVEL OF SURFACE mm +5 -5
Permitted SURFACE IRREGULARITY

measured by 3 mm
straight edge mm 5 5
Permitted variation from

design CROSSFALL OF CAMBER % +0.2 +0.2
3704. ASPHALT CEMENT
1. Asphalt cement shall be an oil asphalt, or a mixture of refined solid asphalt,

prepared from crude asphaltic petroleum. It shall be free from admixture with any residue
obtained by the artificial distillation of coal, coal tar, or paraffin oil and shall be
homogeneous and free from water. No emulsification shall occur when a 30 g sample is
boiled for 2 hours with 250 cc of distilled water in a 500 cc Erlenmeyer Flask equipped with
a reflux condenser.
2. Asphalt cement shall be classified by penetration and when tested in accordance

with the AASHTO standard method of tests, the grades of asphalts shall conform to the
requirement given in Table VII below. The grade of asphalt to be used shall be as specified in
the Contract.
190
TABLE VII REQUIREMENTS FOR ASPHALT CEMENT - AASHTO M 20
PENETRATION GRADE
60-70 85-10
Min. Max. Min. Max.
Penetration at 25
Degree Centigrade
(77 Degree Fahren-
heit)100 g, 5 sec. 60 70 85 100
Flashpoint, Clave-
land Open Cup 450 - 450 -
Ductility at 25
Degree Centigrade
(77 Degree Fah-
renheit) 5cm, per
min. cm 100 - 100 -
Solubility in
trichloroethylene % 99 - 99 -
Thin-film oven test

1/8 in. (3.2 MM)
163 Degree Centi-
grade (325 Degree
Farhrenheit) 5 Hour
Loss on heating, - 0.8 - 1.0

per cent
Penetration of
residue, percent
of original 54 - 50 -
Ductility of residue
at 25 Degree Centi-
grade (77 Degree
Fahrenheit) 5 cm
per min., cm 50 - 75 -
191
Spot test when
not as specified
(See note with:)
Standard naphtha solvent

Negative for all grades
Naphtha-xylene solvent,
percent xylene -do-
Heptane-xylene solvent,
percent xylene -do-
NOTE: The use of the spot test is optional. When it is specified, the Engineer shall
indicate whether the standard naphtha solvent, the naphtha-xylene solvent, or the heptane-
xylene solvent will be used in determining compliance with the requirements, and also, in the
case of the xylene solvents, the percentage of xylene to be used.
3705. CUT BACK ASPHALT
1. Liquid asphalts (cut-back) shall consist of materials conforming to the following

classifications. When tested in accordance with the AASHTO standard methods of test the
grades of liquid asphalt conform to the requirements specified in Table II.
2. Medium curing products designated by letters MC, shall consist of asphalt cement
with a penetration of approximately 85 to 100 fluxed or blended with a kerosene solvent.
3706. MIXING TEMPERATURE FOR ASPHALT CEMENT
The mixing temperature shall be that temperature to which the asphalt must be heated
to produce a viscosity of 85 + 10 seconds Saybolt Furol. A viscosity/temperature curve shall
be supplied for each asphalt cement grade from each source of crude from which the asphalt
cement has been manufactured.
3707. APPLICATION TEMPERATURE FOR CUT-BACK ASPHALT
The application temperature shall be in accordance with Table I.
TABLE IAPPLICATION TEMPERATURESFOR CUT-BACK ASPHALT
TYPE AND GRADE APPLICATION

OF ASPHALTIC TEMPERATURE
MATERIAL
CUTBACK MC-70, RC- 70 49 Deg.- 88 Deg. Cent.

ASPHALT MC-250, RC-250 74 Deg.-110 Deg. Cent.
MC-800, RC-800 93 Deg.-129 Deg. Cent.
MC-3000 113 Deg.-149 Deg. Cent.
192
3708. BITUMINOUS PRIME COAT
1. This work shall consist of furnishing and applying asphaltic material on a prepared
and untreated surface in accordance with the Specifications and Drawings.
2. Asphaltic materials shall conform to the requirements of paragraph 3704.
3. Construction Requirement
a) Surface Condition
Prime coats shall be applied only to surfaces which are dry or slightly moist. No
prime coats shall be applied when the weather is foggy or rainy.
b) Equipment
The liquid asphaltic material shall be sprayed by means of a pressure distributor of not
less than 1000 liter capacity, mounted on pneumatic tires of such width and number that the
load produced on the road surface will not exceed 1 kN (100kgf) per cm width of tire. It shall
be of recognized manufacture.
The tank shall have a heating device to heat a complete charge of asphaltic liquid to
180 Degree Centigrade. The heating device shall be such that overheating will not occur.
Consequently the flames must not directly touch the casing of the tank containing the
asphaltic liquid. The liquid shall be insulated in such a way that the drop in temperature when
the tank is filled with asphaltic liquid fixed to the tank in order to be able to measure
continuously the temperature of the liquid. The thermometer shall be placed in such a way
that the highest temperature in the tank is measured. The tank shall be furnished with a
calibrated dipstick to indicate the contents. The pipes for filling the tank shall be furnished
with an easily interchangeable filter.
The distributor shall be able to vary the spray width of the asphaltic liquid in
maximum steps of 0.1 m to a total width of 4 m. The spraying bar shall have nozzles from
which the liquid is sprayed fan-shaped on the road surface equally distributed over the total
spraying width.
For adding the liquid asphaltic material the distributor shall have a pump either driven
by a separate motor, or with a device to synchronize its speed with the speed of the
distributor. The pump shall be furnished with an indicator showing the rate of flow. At the
suction side the pump shall have an easily exchangeable filter. A thermometer shall be fixed,
such that it indicates the temperature of the liquid immediately before it leaves the spraying
bar.
The distributor shall be furnished with a tachometer indicating its forward speed. The
tachometer shall be visible from the driver's seat. The distributor shall be designed so that
deviation from the prescribed rate of application does not exceed 20%. The distributor shall
be equipped with a devise for hand spraying of the asphaltic liquid.
c) Application of Asphaltic Materials
1. Immediately before applying the prime coat, the full width of surface to be treated
shall be swept with a power broom and if necessary scraped to removed all dirt and other
193
objectionable material. Where required by the Engineer, immediately prior to the application
of the prime coat, the surface shall be lightly sprayed with water but not saturated. Asphaltic
materials shall be applied by means of a pressure distributor and at a temperature given in
Paragraph 3707.
2. The rate of application of the liquid asphalt shall be within the range of 0.5 to 2.0
liters per cu.m. the exact rate being specified in the Contract or ordered by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall furnished certified weight tickets in duplicate to the Engineer immediately
upon delivery to the Site.
3. The prime coat shall be left undisturbed for a period of at least 24 hours and shall
not be opened to traffic until it has penetrated and cured sufficiently so that it will not be
picked up by the wheels of passing vehicles. The Contractor shall maintain the prime coat
until the next course is applied. Care shall be taken that the application of bituminous
materials is not in excess of the specified amount; any excess shall be blotted with sand or
similarly treated. All areas inaccessible to the distributor shall be sprayed manually using the
device for hand spraying from the distributor.
The quantity of asphalt concrete surfacing shall be the design volume in place as
shown on the Drawings. No allowances will be given for materials placed outside the design
limits shown on the cross-sections.
The quantities measured as provided above shall be paid for at the contract unit price
per cubic meter of asphalt wearing Surfaces in the Bill of Quantities, which price and
payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, hauling, placing,
watering, rolling, compacting, labor, equipment, tools and all incidental expenses and
subsidiary works necessary for the successful completion of the work.
SECTION XXXVIII. PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
3801. SCOPE
The work under this section shall include furnishing, delivery to the site and
installation of valves including all materials and accessories necessary to complete the work.
3802. FABRICATION
Materials to be furnished by the Contractor are the Ball Mechanism which will serve
as the valve and the piping system where the valve shall be inserted. The valve was designed
to minimize the malfunction. Valve system shall be made of non-corrodible and non-
degradable materials.
194
3803. METHOD OF INSTALLATION
The pressure relief valve shall be installed to the lines, grades and places indicated on
the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The ball mechanism shall be inserted into a 50
mm diameter pipe which shall be installed at intervals shown on the drawings or as may be
directed by the Engineer during the construction of canal lining. It shall be provided with
special locking device that will prevent the ball from coming out of the pipe. The valve
should normally shut and open when there is a pressure to be relieved. It should be placed
outside of the channel bed where the potential sediment load is highest. However, the higher
the valves are placed on the channel side, the less is the available differential head for their
operation. Therefore it should be placed where it should not be a sediment trap but with
maximum efficiency for their purpose. It's design and construction should also facilitate
easier maintenance and will not be affected by flow of water in the canal.
Pressure relief valve shall be measured by the number of unit completely installed and
accepted by the Engineer.
3805 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment for pressure relief valve measured as provided above shall be made at the
contract unit price per unit which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for
furnishing all the material and accessories, labor, equipment, tools including all incidentals
and subsidiary works necessary for the successful completion of the works described in this
section.
SECTION XXXIX. GATE VALVE AND BUTTERFLY VALVE
3901. SCOPE
The work under this Section shall include furnishing, or the fabrication or
manufacture, installation and testing for proper operation of gate valve and butterfly valve
with all accessories in accordance with the dimensions, elevations and design shown on the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
3902. CONTRACTOR’S DRAWINGS AND OTHER DATA
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval all installation drawings,
operating and maintenance instructions, illustrations and repair procedures of gate valve and
butterfly valve.
Installation, operation and maintenance instructions shall be in the English language.
3903. MATERIALS
All materials shall be new, free from defects and shall be the best available for the
purpose for which used, considering strength, ductility, suitability for the intended service
and best engineering practice.
195
Materials to be furnished by the Contractor shall conform to the following
specifications:
Body : Cast Steel

Valve Disc : Cast Steel
Valve Shaft : Stainless Steel
Body Seat Ring : Bronze Casting
Pressure Rating : 150 psi
3904. FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE
Workmanship shall be of the highest quality and in accordance with the best shop
practice of the industry. All works shall be in accordance with the approved practices and by
approved machine methods. Like parts shall be accurate to specified dimensions so that
replacement parts made in conformity with the drawings may be installed.
3905. PROTECTIVE COATINGS
The surfaces of the steel which are susceptible to corrosion shall be sunblast-cleaned
by commercial blast-cleaning tools (SSPC-SP-6) prior to application of protective coatings as
specified hereunder:
a) Interior Surfaces - To be painted with two (2) coats of coal tar epoxy paint
conforming to U.S. Military Specifications MIL-P-23236 (ships) Type 1, Class 2
to produce a total dry film thickness of 400 microns (16 mils).
b) Buried Exterior Surfaces - Cement-mortar lining (one coat of cement latex milk
consisting of ten (10) parts of portland cement by weight, five (5) parts of water
and one part of modified latex emulsion.
c) Exterior Surfaces Exposed to Atmosphere - Red lead primer and aluminum paint.
3906. INSTALLATION
The Contractor shall furnish and install the gate valve, butterfly valve and its
appurtenances as shown in the drawings and as required to provide a complete and workable
installation.
3907. TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
After complete installation and adjustment ready for operation, Contractor shall
conduct test runs for the gate valve and butterfly valve. The cost of performing the test shall
be considered included in the contract unit price.
All tests shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer or its authorized
representative. All defects attributed to installation works which are found during the test
shall be corrected accordingly to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
196
Gate valve and butterfly valve including accessories shall be measured per assembly
completely installed and accepted.
Payment for gate valve and butterfly valve measured as provided above shall be made
at the contract unit price per assembly, which price and payment shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, equipment tools including all incidentals and
subsidiary works necessary for the successful completion of the works described under this
Section.
SECTION XL. SODDING
4001. SCOPE
The work under this Section shall include furnishing and planting of carabao grass (or
vetiber grass, if specified or indicated in the Drawings) on areas indicated in the Drawings or
as directed by the Engineer after the slopes are topsoiled with the best quality soil, in
accordance with these Specifications.
Slopes of embankments after being carefully trimmed to the uniform profile shown on
the cross sections shall be top-soiled with the best quality soil previously selected from
excavations and laid aside on the Site. The soil shall be free from objectionable matters and
neatly raked and planted with carabao grass (or vetiber grass, if specified) in the best manner
to suit local conditions and to the approval of the Engineer. If the planting fails or the
topsoiling becomes displaced, the process shall be repeated until a good result is obtained and
satisfactory to the Engineer, without additional cost to NIA.
Before sowing, fertilizing of topsoil shall be carried out with even distribution. The
rate of application of the fertilizer shall not be lighter than 1 kg to 10 square meters.
Sowing of grass shall be carried out with an even distribution of approved seed. The rate of
application of the seed shall not be less than 1 kg to 10 square meters, or as directed by the
Engineer.
The surface prepared as specified above shall be covered with layer of turf sod
consisting of strips of dense living grass growth of approved species. The sod shall include a
mat of roots and earth at lease 50 mm thick and shall be carefully handled during
transportation to minimize loss of earth. The strips shall be laid on the slopes in close contact
and then tamped firmly in place. Immediately after placing the turf sod, the slopes shall be
watered and kept moist until plant growth has been re-established.
Until the issuance of a Certificate of Completion for the part of the Works, except
where otherwise directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall keep all grasses areas in the
particular part of the works sown or cut and cleared of grass cutting to the satisfaction of the
Engineer, so that the vegetation at no time exceeds 150 mm in height.
197
4003. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Measurement of sodding will be made by the area of sod placed in position. Payment
shall be made at the unit bid price per square meter which shall include all labor, tools,
equipment, supplies and all incidentals or subsidiary works necessary for the successful
completion of the work, after plant growth has taken root and established.
SECTION XLI. MASONRY WORKS
4101. SCOPE
The work under this Section shall consist of furnishing all labor, tools, equipment,
supplies and materials and performing all operations necessary for the installation of all
masonry works, all in accordance with the drawings and these specifications.
4102 MORTAR
The mortar shall be proportioned by volume as specified in the following table:
_________________________________________________________________
Class of Mortar Portland Cement Hydrated Lime Sand
_________________________________________________________________
A 1 part 2 parts
B 1 part 3 parts
C 1 part 1/4 part 3
parts D 1 part 1/2 part 3
parts _________________________________________________________________
Lime shall be either finely pulverized quick lime, stake or hydrated lime (92%
hydrated) and shall be a standard product of a recognized manufacture. The lime shall be
mixed with water to form a putty which shall be allowed to stand for at least 15 minutes
before using.
Sand shall be either natural or manufactured sand and shall be in natural color, but
more than 25% of the sand shall be retained between No. 50 and No. 100 sieves. Fine sand
shall be used in mortar for plasters, bedding of tiles and similar works where coarse sand
prevents good finishing.
Water shall be in accordance with the requirements set forth in the paragraph 505,
Section V.
4103. CHB WALLS AND PARTITIONS
198
a. Materials - Concrete hollow block shall be of standard manufacture, machine
vibrated and shall have a fine and even texture and well defined edges. CHB shall be modular
non-load bearing with normal size as specified in the Bill of Quantities and shall conform to
the requirements of ASTM C-129. All hollow blocks shall have a minimum compressive
strength of 30 kg/sq.cm. measured on the average net area.
Concrete Hollow blocks shall be true to size, without cracks, chips, splits, or other
defects which may impair their strength and durability.
Class "B" mortar, as specified above, shall be used in the masonry for concrete hollow
blocks.
b. Testing - Test samples for every 500 units shall be taken at random from stock
piles before installation. Testing shall be done or performed by a laboratory approved by NIA
and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor. CHB presented by samples failing to
meet the requirement under ASTM C-129 shall be rejected.
c. Installation - All blocks are to be thoroughly soaked in water immediately before

use.
Masonry units shall be laid in horizontal courses true to line and plumb, and vertical
joints shall be staggered with respect to those in the courses next above and below. Corner
blocks and blocks at edges of framed openings shall have finished return ends.
All walls are to be carried up uniformly and as regularly as possible; no part is to be

raised more than 100 cm above any other part at any time.
The mortar in the horizontal and vertical joints shall range from 8 mm to 15 mm
thick.
For bed joints, a thick bed of mortar shall be spread and only slightly furrowed so
that the joint will be completely filled with mortar. Spreading of the bed mortar shall extend
only so far ahead that the mortar will be plastic when the units are laid. The ends of the units
shall be buttered with an ample quantity of mortar and the units pushed into place so that the
vertical joint is completely filled with mortar. In making closures, ample mortar shall be
spread in the closure space, the closure units buttered on both ends and rocked into place so
that both end and end joints are completely filled with mortar.
Where an adjustment must be made after the mortar has lost its plasticity, the mortar
shall be removed and fresh mortar shall be used to reset the work. Masonry surfaces shall be
wetted immediately after the finishing of a wall.
d. Blocks_Reinforcement - Vertical reinforcement shall be 1/2"0/ at 800 mm (32")

on centers for 150 mm (6") blocks and 3/8"0/ on centers for 100 mm (4") blocks to form as
vertical reinforced studs for the hollow block walls. Horizontal reinforcements shall be 3/8"
0/ at 600 mm (24") on centers (every third course), for 150 mm (6") or 100 mm (4") blocks.
Reinforcing bars shall be straight except for bends or backs that may be required at
the ends or around corners. Splices shall overlap at a distance sufficient to develop the stress
in the bar but not less than forty bar diameter.
199
Intersecting hollow block walls and partitions shall be bonded by overlapping units on
alternate courses or by the use of 1/4" 0/ ties at 400 mm (16") O.C. (every second course)
maximum, anchored in filled cells.
All horizontal reinforcements shall be tied with vertical reinforcements.
c. Lintels - The Contractor shall construct and install concrete lintels for doors,
windows and other openings left in the concrete block walls and partitions. The size of the
lintels shall be in accordance with the span of the opening, width in accordance with the size
of the blocks (100 m or 150 mm) and the depth shall never be less than 200 mm. Each lintel
shall be reinforced with four 12 mm (1/2") 0/ bars.
4104. R.C. PIPES (8" 0/ and below)
a. Materials - Concrete for pipes shall be Class "Y" which shall have a count factor
of 395 kgs/cu.m. of concrete and a minimum compressive strength of 211 kg/sq.cm. (3,000
psi) in 28 days. The maximum size of aggregates shall be 1/2 inch. The pipe thickness shall
be at least 5 mm (2") and reinforced with 3-strand barbed wire consisting of fourpitch
spiral and six longitudinal ties.
b. Fabrication - The contractor may fabricate the R.C. pipes or purchase finished
product in accordance with these specifications and in the approved plans.
c. Laying_and_Installation - The R.C. Pipes shall be laid carefully, ends fully and
closely jointed, and true to the lines and grades as shown on the drawings. Bolts or other
approved devices shall be provided for lowering the attached to the adjoining sections unless
otherwise specified, shall be filled with stiff mortar composed ot one part Portland cement
and one-half parts of sand. Cement, sand and water shall conform to the requirements for
those materials given for concrete. The mortar shall be placed so as to form durable, water-
tight joint. After each section of pipe is laid and before the succeeding section is laid, the
lower portion of the hub shall be plastered thoroughly on the inside with mortar to such depth
as to bring the inner surfaces of the abutting pipes flush and even. After the section is laid, the
remainder of the joint shall then be wiped and finished smooth. After the initial set, the
mortar on the outside shall be protected from the air and sun with a cover of thoroughly
wetted earth or burlap. After the setting of the mortar of the joint, the construction of the
reinforced concrete collar shall be done in accordance with the Drawings. Any pipe which is
not a true alignment or which shows any undue settlement after being laid, or is damaged,
shall be removed and relaid or replaced without extra compensation.
4105. PLASTERING
a. Surface_Preparation - The surface to be plastered shall be cleared free from

loose material, fins, incrustations, oil, paint, dirt and any other material that might prevent
satisfactory bond. The surface to be plastered with cement mortar shall be wetted thoroughly
with fog spray of clean water to produce a uniformly moist condition.
Damage dummy or otherwise defective plaster shall be replaced at the contractor's

expense, and in such a manner that on completion of the work, the plaster shall be sound and
the general appearance of the work shall not be marred.
b. Plaster_Application - Cement Plastering shall consist of the following operation:
200
i )Scratch (first) coat shall be full and thick and shall be applied with sufficient force
to form good keys. The scratch coat shall be cross- scratch upon attaining its initial set and
shall be kept damp with a fine spray.
ii). Brown (second) coat shall be applied after the scratch coat has set, but not less
than 24 hours after the application of scratch coat. When applied directly to masonry the
brown coat shall be applied with sufficient pressure to fill the surface voids and joints in the
masonry to prevent air pockets and secure a good bord. The brown coat shall be lightly
scratched and broomed, shall be kept moist with fine spray.
iii). Finish (third) coat shall be floated to a true and even surface, then trowelled in a
manner that will force the sand particles down into the plaster and with the final trowelling,
leave surface burnished smooth and free from rough areas, trowel marks, checks or other
blemishes. The finish coat shall be kept moist with a fine spray for at least two days and
thereafter shall be protected against rapid drying until properly and thoroughly cured.
iv) Cement plaster finish shall be applied to a thicknessof not less than 3/8" and in all
cases shall be sufficient to cancel all irregularities. Special care shall be taken to prevent
sagging and consequent dropping of applications.
Class "C" mortar as specified in paragraph 602 shall be used for first and second coat
while Class "D" mortar shall be used for the third (finish) coat.
a. CHB_Walls - Measurement for payment of CHB walls and partitions will be

based on the area of CHB walls and partitions acceptably installed.
b. R.C. pipes of the various sizes and types specified in the Bill of Quantities will be
measured for payment per linear meter of pipes furnished and acceptably installed.
c. Plastering - Measurement for payment of plastering will be made according to the

provisions set forth in Section XII, Surface Finishing.
a. CHB_WALLS - Payment for concrete hollow block walls and partitions including
steel bars and tie wires used as blocks reinforcement will be made at the unit price per square
meter of in-placed blocks which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for
furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment and all incidentals necessary to complete the
work.
b. RC_Pipes - The total length measured for the various sizes and types of pipes as
provided above shall be paid at the contract unit price per linear meter of in-placed respective
types and sizes of R.C. pipes, which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for
furnishing all 0materials, labor, tools, equipment and all incidentals necessary to complete the
work.
201
202
Section VII. Drawings
[Insert here a list of Drawings. The actual Drawings, including site plans, should be
attached to this section, or annexed in a separate folder.]
203
Section VIII. Bill of Quantities
Standard Form Number: SF-INFR-55
Revised on: August 11, 2004
Contract ID: NIAREG9-01102024-REPAIR-PISCY2024-937

Contract Name: Tungawan PIS CY 2024 (Installation of Distribution Tanks and Pipelines, Construction
of Pumphouse, Solar PV House and Solar Panel Array)
Location of the Contract: Tungawan, Zamboanga Sibugay
204
(Column 1,2,3, and 4 are to be filled up by the
(Column 5 and 6 are to be filled up by the Bidder)
Procuring Entity)
Ite
m Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Price (Pesos) Total Estimated Cost
No.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Delivery and installation of Distribution Tanks &
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
I. Pipelines, Construction of Pump House and Solar 1.00 l.s
In Figures: ___________ In Figures: ____________
PV House

In words:_____________ In words:_____________
In Figures: ___________ In Figures: ____________
III. Pipelines
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
a. Common Excavation 241.70 cu.m In Figures: ____________ In Figures: ____________
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
b. Common Backfill(Manual) 276.80 cu.m In Figures: ____________ In Figures: ____________
c. Miscellaneous Pipes & Materials
c.1 2” Ø HDPE (SDR 17) w/ accessories: 12pcs
of 30 ° elbow @50.8 mm nominal diameter & 8 In words:_____________ In words:_____________
pcs of 45° elbow @ 50.80 mm nominal In Figures: ____________ In Figures: ____________
diameter 340.00 mtrs.
IV. Distribution Tank
a. Concrete
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
a.1 3000 Psi Plain Concrete 1.40 cu.m In Figures: ____________ In Figures: ____________
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
b. Reinforcing Steel Bars 89.60 kg. In Figures: ____________ In Figures: ____________
c. Stailess Steel Tank

c.1 2000 liters Stainless Steel Tank w/ In words:_____________ In words:_____________
2.00 Lengths
Accessories In Figures: ____________ In Figures: ____________
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
c.2. 1 ½” ø G.I. Pipe 16.00 Pcs
In Figures: ____________ In Figures: ____________
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
c.3. 1 ½” ø G.I. 90° Elbow 2.00 pcs
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
V. PUMP HOUSE
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
a. Structure Excavation (Manual) 10.00 cu.m In Figures: ____________ In Figures: ____________
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
b. Structure Backfill (Manual) 4.80 cu.m In Figures: ____________ In Figures: ____________
c. Gravel Blanket
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
c.1. Gravel Bedding 6.20 cu.m In Figures: ____________ In Figures: ____________
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
d. Concrete 5.70 cu.m In Figures: ____________ In Figures: ____________
d.1 3000 Psi Plain Concrete
e. Masonry Works
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
e.1 4" Concrete Hollow Blocks 29.60 sq.m In Figures: ____________ In Figures: ____________
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
e.2 Mortar & Plastering 74.70 sq.m In Figures: ____________ In Figures: ____________
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
f. Roofing & Metal Works 1.00 ls In Figures: ____________ In Figures: ____________
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
g. Doors and Windows 1.00 ls In Figures: ____________ In Figures: ____________
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
h. Reinforcing Steel Bars 1,068.20 kg. In Figures: ____________ In Figures: ____________
VI. Solar PV House
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
b. Structure Backfill (Manual) 4.80 cu.m
c. Gravel Blanket
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
c.1 Gravel Bedding 6.30 cu.m In Figures: ____________ In Figures: ____________
d. Concrete
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
d.1 3000 Psi Plain Concrete 2.30 cu.m In Figures: ____________ In Figures: ____________
e. Masonry Works
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
e.1 Plastering 8.60 sq.m In Figures: ____________ In Figures: ____________
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
f. Roofing and Metal Works 1.00 l.s. In Figures: ____________ In Figures: ____________
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
g. Reinforcing Steel Bars 426.50 kg. In Figures: ____________ In Figures: ____________

In words:_____________ In words:_____________
c. Gravel Blanket
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
c.1 Gravel Bedding 0.40 cu.m In Figures: ____________ In Figures: ____________
d. Concrete
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
d.1 3000 Psi Plain Concrete 0.40 cu.m In Figures: ____________ In Figures: ____________
e. Masonry Works
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
e.1 Plastering 1.90 sq.m In Figures: ____________ In Figures: ____________
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
f. Reinforcing Steel Bars 85.40 kg. In Figures: ____________ In Figures: ____________
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
g. Solar panel (300-watts)(including and installation) 6.00 unit In Figures: ____________ In Figures: ____________
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
h. Submersible Pump 5hp-3 Phase 1.00 unit In Figures: ____________ In Figures: ____________
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
i. Solar Panel mounting Accessories(including installation) 6.00 unit In Figures: ____________ In Figures: ____________
In words:_____________ In words:_____________
j. 4"Ø GI Pipe 205
18.00 mtrs. In Figures: ____________ In Figures: ____________
In words:______________
TOTAL In Figures: _________________________________
____________
Submitted by:
Name and Signature of Bidder ____________________________________ Date: __________ss______
Section IX. Checklist of Technical and Financial

Documents
206
Checklist of Technical and Financial Documents
I. TECHNICAL COMPONENT ENVELOPE
Class “A” Documents
Legal Documents
(a) Valid PhilGEPS Registration Certificate (Platinum Membership) (all pages)
in accordance with Section 8.5.2 of the IRR;
Technical Documents
(e) Statement of the prospective bidder of all its ongoing government and private
contracts, including contracts awarded but not yet started, if any, whether
similar or not similar in nature and complexity to the contract to be bid; and
(f) Statement of the bidder’s Single Largest Completed Contract (SLCC) similar
to the contract to be bid, except under conditions provided under the rules;
and
(g) Special PCAB License in case of Joint Ventures and registration for the type
and cost of the contract to be bid; and
(h) Original copy of Bid Security. If in the form of a Surety Bond, submit also a
certification issued by the Insurance Commission or original copy of
Notarized Bid Securing Declaration; and
(i) Project Requirements, which shall include the following:

a. Organizational chart for the contract to be bid;
b. List of contractor’s key personnel (e.g., Project Manager, Project
Engineers, Materials Engineers, and Foremen), to be assigned to the
contract to be bid, with their complete qualification and experience
data;
c. List of contractor’s major equipment units, which are owned, leased,
and/or under purchase agreements, supported by proof of ownership
or certification of availability of equipment from the equipment
lessor/vendor for the duration of the project, as the case may be; and
(j) Original duly signed Omnibus Sworn Statement (OSS) and if applicable,
Original Notarized Secretary’s Certificate in case of a corporation,
partnership, or cooperative; or Original Special Power of Attorney of all
members of the joint venture giving full power and authority to its officer to
sign the OSS and do acts to represent the Bidder.
Financial Documents
(k) The prospective bidder’s computation of Net Financial Contracting Capacity
207
(NFCC).
Class “B” Documents

(l) If applicable, duly signed joint venture agreement (JVA) in accordance with
RA No. 4566 and its IRR in case the joint venture is already in existence or
duly notarized statements from all the potential joint venture partners stating
that they will enter into and abide by the provisions of the JVA in the
instance that the bid is successful.
II. FINANCIAL COMPONENT ENVELOPE

(m) Original of duly signed and accomplished Financial Bid Form; and
Other documentary requirements under RA No. 9184

(n) Original of duly signed Bid Prices in the Bill of Quantities; and
(o) Duly accomplished Detailed Estimates Form, including a summary sheet
indicating the unit prices of construction materials, labor rates, and equipment
rentals used in coming up with the Bid; and
(p) Cash Flow by Quarter.
Note: Any missing document in the above-mentioned checklist is a ground for outright
rejection of the bid.
208
Section X. Bidding Forms
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Bid Form .......................................................................................................... 210
Form of Contract Agreement ........................................................................... 212
Omnibus Sworn Statement .............................................................................. 214
Bid Securing Declaration………………………………………………………91
209
Bid Form
Date: _______________________
IB2 No: _____________________
To: [name and address of PROCURING ENTITY]

Address: [insert address]
We, the undersigned, declare that:
(a) We have examined and have no reservation to the Bidding Documents, including
Addenda, for the Contract [insert name of contract];
(b) We offer to execute the Works for this Contract in accordance with the Bid and Bid Data
Sheet, General and Special Conditions of Contract accompanying this Bid;
The total price of our Bid, excluding any discounts offered below is: [insert
information];
The discounts offered and the methodology for their application are: [insert
information];
(c) Our Bid shall be valid for a period of [insert number] days from the date fixed for the
Bid submission deadline in accordance with the Bidding Documents, and it shall remain
binding upon us and may be accepted at any time before the expiration of that period;
(d) If our Bid is accepted, we commit to obtain a Performance Security in the amount of
[insert percentage amount] percent of the Contract Price for the due performance of the
Contract;
(e) Our firm, including any subcontractors or suppliers for any part of the Contract, have
nationalities from the following eligible countries: [insert information];
(f) We are not participating, as Bidders, in more than one Bid in this bidding process, other
than alternative offers in accordance with the Bidding Documents;
(g) Our firm, its affiliates or subsidiaries, including any subcontractors or suppliers for any
part of the Contract, has not been declared ineligible by the Funding Source;
(h) We understand that this Bid, together with your written acceptance thereof included in
your notification of award, shall constitute a binding contract between us, until a formal
Contract is prepared and executed; and
2 If ADB, JICA and WB funded projects, use IFB.
210
(i) We understand that you are not bound to accept the Lowest Calculated Bid or any other
Bid that you may receive.
(j) We likewise certify/confirm that the undersigned, is the duly authorized

representative of the bidder, and granted full power and authority to do, execute
and perform any and all acts necessary to participate, submit the bid, and to sign
and execute the ensuing contract for the [Name of Project] of the [Name of the
Procuring Entity].
(k) We acknowledge that failure to sign each and every page of this Bid Form,
including the Bill of Quantities, shall be a ground for the rejection of our bid.
Name:
In the capacity of:
Signed:
Duly authorized to sign the Bid for and on behalf of:
Date: ___________
211
Form of Contract Agreement
THIS AGREEMENT, made this [insert date] day of [insert month], [insert year]
between [name and address of PROCURING ENTITY] (hereinafter called the“Entity”) and
[name and address of Contractor] (hereinafter called the “Contractor”).
WHEREAS, the Entity is desirous that the Contractor execute [name and
identification number of contract] (hereinafter called “the Works”) and the Entity has
accepted the Bid for [insert the amount in specified currency in numbers and words] by the
Contractor for the execution and completion of such Works and the remedying of any defects
therein.
NOW THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSETH AS FOLLOWS:
1. In this Agreement, words and expressions shall have the same meanings as are
respectively assigned to them in the Conditions of Contract hereinafter
referred to.
2. The following documents shall be attached, deemed to form, and be read and
construed as integral part of this Agreement, to wit:
(a) General and Special Conditions of Contract;

(b) Drawings/Plans;
(c) Specifications;
(d) Invitation to Bid;
(e) Instructions to Bidders;
(f) Bid Data Sheet;
(g) Addenda and/or Supplemental/Bid Bulletins, if any;
(h) Bid form, including all the documents/statements contained in the
Bidder’s bidding envelopes, as annexes, and all other documents
submitted (e.g., Bidder’s response to request for clarifications on the
bid), including corrections to the bid, if any, resulting from the
Procuring Entity’s bid evaluation;
(i) Eligibility requirements, documents and/or statements;
(j) Performance Security;
(k) Notice of Award of Contract and the Bidder’s conforme thereto;
(l) Other contract documents that may be required by existing laws and/or
the Entity.
3. In consideration of the payments to be made by the Entity to the Contractor as

hereinafter mentioned, the Contractor hereby covenants with the Entity to
execute and complete the Works and remedy any defects therein in conformity
with the provisions of this Contract in all respects.
212
4. The Entity hereby covenants to pay the Contractor in consideration of the
execution and completion of the Works and the remedying of defects wherein,
the Contract Price or such other sum as may become payable under the
provisions of this Contract at the times and in the manner prescribed by this
Contract.
IN WITNESS whereof the parties thereto have caused this Agreement to be executed
the day and year first before written.
Signed, sealed, delivered by the (for the Entity)
Signed, sealed, delivered by the (for the Contractor).
Binding Signature of Procuring Entity
________________________________________________
Binding Signature of Contractor
_____________________________________________
[Addendum showing the corrections, if any, made during the Bid evaluation should be
attached with this agreement]
213
Omnibus Sworn Statement
REPUBLIC OF THE PHILIPPINES )

CITY/MUNICIPALITY OF ______ ) S.S.
AFFIDAVIT
I, [Name of Affiant], of legal age, [Civil Status], [Nationality], and residing at [Address
of Affiant], after having been duly sworn in accordance with law, do hereby depose and state
that:
1. Select one, delete the other:
If a sole proprietorship: I am the sole proprietor or authorized representative of

[Name of Bidder] with office address at [address of Bidder];
If a partnership, corporation, cooperative, or joint venture: I am the duly authorized

and designated representative of [Name of Bidder] with office address at [address of
Bidder];
2. Select one, delete the other:
If a sole proprietorship: As the owner and sole proprietor or authorized representative

of [Name of Bidder], I have full power and authority to do, execute and perform any
and all acts necessary to participate, submit the bid, and to sign and execute the
ensuing contract for [Name of the Project] of the [Name of the Procuring Entity]
[insert “as shown in the attached duly notarized Special Power of Attorney” for the
authorized representative];
If a partnership, corporation, cooperative, or joint venture: I am granted full power

and authority to do, execute and perform any and all acts necessary to participate,
submit the bid, and to sign and execute the ensuing contract for [Name of the Project]
of the [Name of the Procuring Entity], accompanied by the duly notarized Special
Power of Attorney, Board/Partnership Resolution, or Secretary’s Certificate,
whichever is applicable;
3. [Name of Bidder] is not “blacklisted” or barred from bidding by the Government of

the Philippines or any of its agencies, offices, corporations, or Local Government
Units, foreign government/foreign or international financing institution whose
blacklisting rules have been recognized by the Government Procurement Policy
Board;
4. Each of the documents submitted in satisfaction of the bidding requirements is an

authentic copy of the original, complete, and all statements and information provided
therein are true and correct;
214
5. [Name of Bidder] is authorizing the Head of the Procuring Entity or its duly
authorized representative(s) to verify all the documents submitted;
6. Select one, delete the rest:
If a sole proprietorship: The owner or sole proprietor is not related to the Head of the
Procuring Entity, members of the Bids and Awards Committee (BAC), the Technical
Working Group, and the BAC Secretariat, the head of the Project Management Office
or the end-user unit, and the project consultants by consanguinity or affinity up to the
third civil degree;
If a partnership or cooperative: None of the officers and members of [Name of
Bidder] is related to the Head of the Procuring Entity, members of the Bids and
Awards Committee (BAC), the Technical Working Group, and the BAC Secretariat,
the head of the Project Management Office or the end-user unit, and the project
consultants by consanguinity or affinity up to the third civil degree;
If a corporation or joint venture: None of the officers, directors, and controlling
stockholders of [Name of Bidder] is related to the Head of the Procuring Entity,
members of the Bids and Awards Committee (BAC), the Technical Working Group,
and the BAC Secretariat, the head of the Project Management Office or the end-user
unit, and the project consultants by consanguinity or affinity up to the third civil
degree;
7. [Name of Bidder] complies with existing labor laws and standards; and
8. [Name of Bidder] is aware of and has undertaken the following responsibilities as a

Bidder:
a) Carefully examine all of the Bidding Documents;

b) Acknowledge all conditions, local or otherwise, affecting the implementation of
the Contract;
c) Made an estimate of the facilities available and needed for the contract to be bid,
if any; and
d) Inquire or secure Supplemental/Bid Bulletin(s) issued for the [Name of the
Project].
9. [Name of Bidder] did not give or pay directly or indirectly, any commission, amount,
fee, or any form of consideration, pecuniary or otherwise, to any person or official,
personnel or representative of the government in relation to any procurement project
or activity.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand this __ day of ___, 20__ at
____________, Philippines.
_____________________________________
Bidder’s Representative/Authorized Signatory
215
SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN to before me this ___ day of [month] [year] at [place
of execution], Philippines. Affiant/s is/are personally known to me and was/were identified
by me through competent evidence of identity as defined in the 2004 Rules on Notarial
Practice (A.M. No. 02-8-13-SC). Affiant/s exhibited to me his/her [insert type of government
identification card used], with his/her photograph and signature appearing thereon, with no.
________ and his/her Community Tax Certificate No. _______ issued on ____ at ______.
Witness my hand and seal this ___ day of [month] [year].
NAME OF NOTARY PUBLIC

Serial No. of Commission _______________
Notary Public for _______ until __________
Roll of Attorneys No. __________________
PTR No. ______ [date issued], [place issued]
IBP No. ______ [date issued], [place issued]
Doc. No. _____

Page No. _____
Book No. _____
Series of _____
* This form will not apply for WB funded projects.
216
Bid-Securing Declaration
(REPUBLIC OF THE PHILIPPINES)

CITY OF _______________________ ) S.S.
x-------------------------------------------------------x
Invitation to Bid [Insert reference number]
To: [Insert name and address of the Procuring Entity]
I/We, the undersigned, declare that:
1. I/We understand that, according to your conditions, bids must be supported by a Bid
Security, which may be in the form of a Bid-Securing Declaration.
2. I/We accept that: (a) I/we will be automatically disqualified from bidding for any contract
with any procuring entity for a period of two (2) years upon receipt of your Blacklisting
Order; and, (b) I/we will pay the applicable fine provided under Section 6 of the
Guidelines on the Use of Bid Securing Declaration, within fifteen (15) days from receipt
of written demand by the procuring entity for the commission of acts resulting to the
enforcement of the bid securing declaration under Sections 23.1(b), 34.2, 40.1 and 69.1,
except 69.1 (f), of the IRR of RA 9184; without prejudice to other legal action the
government may undertake.
3. I/We understand that this Bid-Securing Declaration shall cease to be valid on the
following circumstances:
a. Upon expiration of the bid validity period, or any extension thereof pursuant to your
request;
b. I am/we are declared ineligible or post-disqualified upon receipt of your notice to
such effect, and (i) I/we failed to timely file a request for reconsideration or (ii) I/we
filed a waiver to avail of said right;
c. I am/we are declared as the bidder with the Lowest Calculated Responsive Bid, and
I/we have furnished the performance security and signed the Contract.
217
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I/We have hereunto set my/our hand/s this ____ day of [month]
[year] at [place of execution].
[Insert NAME OF BIDDER’S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE]

[Insert signatory’s legal capacity]
Affiant
SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN to before me this __ day of [month] [year] at [place of

execution], Philippines. Affiant/s is/are personally known to me and was/were identified by
me through competent evidence of identity as defined in the 2004 Rules on Notarial Practice
(A.M. No. 02-8-13-SC). Affiant/s exhibited to me his/her [insert type of government
identification card used], with his/her photograph and signature appearing thereon, with no.
______.
Witness my hand and seal this ___ day of [month] [year].
NAME OF NOTARY PUBLIC
Serial No. of Commission ___________

Notary Public for ______ until _______
Roll of Attorneys No. _____
PTR No. __, [date issued], [place issued]
IBP No. __, [date issued], [place issued]
Doc. No. ___
Page No. ___
Book No. ___
Series of ____.
218
219

PBD Nia 2024

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PBD Nia 2024

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PHILIPPINE BIDDING DOCUMENTS

Opening of Bids Date: February 7, 2024

FUND: REPAIR PIS CY 2024

d. The cover should be modified as required to identify the Bidding Documents

e. Modifications for specific Procurement Project details should be provided in

ABC – Approved Budget for the Contract.

ARCC – Allowable Range of Contract Cost.

BAC – Bids and Awards Committee.

Bid – A signed offer or proposal to undertake a contract submitted by a bidder in response to

Bidder – Refers to a contractor, manufacturer, supplier, distributor and/or consultant who

BIR – Bureau of Internal Revenue.

BSP – Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas.

CDA – Cooperative Development Authority.

CPI – Consumer Price Index.

DTI – Department of Trade and Industry.

Foreign-funded Procurement or Foreign-Assisted Project – Refers to procurement whose

GFI – Government Financial Institution.

GOCC – Government-owned and/or –controlled corporation.

GOP – Government of the Philippines.

Infrastructure Projects – Include the construction, improvement, rehabilitation, demolition,

LGUs – Local Government Units.

NFCC – Net Financial Contracting Capacity.

NGA – National Government Agency.

PCAB – Philippine Contractors Accreditation Board.

PhilGEPS - Philippine Government Electronic Procurement System.

Procurement Project – refers to a specific or identified procurement covering goods,

PSA – Philippine Statistics Authority.

SLCC – Single Largest Completed Contract.

TUNGAWAN PIS CY 2024

1. The National Irrigation Administration – Zamboanga Sibugay Irrigation

2. The National Irrigation Administration – Zamboanga Sibugay Irrigation

Delivery and Installation of Distribution Tanks and Pipelines,

II. Construction Safety and Health

a.) Bidding is restricted to Filipino citizens/sole proprietorships, cooperatives, and

4. Interested bidders may obtain further information from National Irrigation

5. A complete set of Bidding Documents may be acquired by interested bidders on

6. The National Irrigation Administration – Zamboanga Sibugay Irrigation

9. Bid opening shall be on February 7, 2024 at 9:00 A.M. Zamboanga Sibugay

Bidders authorized representative to this procurement process must present a Special

Equipment Type Unit Capacity

11. The National Irrigation Administration – Zamboanga Sibugay Irrigation

12. For further information, please refer to:

MARIA GERTRUDES P. GANIA

13. You may visit the following websites:

For downloading of Bidding Documents: https://notices.philgeps.gov.ph or

MARIA GERTRUDES P. GANIA (sgd)

2.1. The source of funding is:

a. GOCC and GFIs, the proposed Corporate Operating Budget.

4. Corrupt, Fraudulent, Collusive, Coercive, and Obstructive Practices

A contract is considered to be “similar” to the contract to be bid if it has the

6. Origin of Associated Goods

The Procuring Entity has prescribed that:

a. Subcontracting is not allowed.

9. Clarification and Amendment of Bidding Documents

10. Documents Comprising the Bid: Eligibility and Technical

11. Documents Comprising the Bid: Financial Component

11.3. For Foreign-funded procurement, a ceiling may be applied to bid prices

12. Alternative Bids

13. Bid Prices

14. Bid and Payment Currencies

14.2. Payment of the contract price shall be made in:

15. Bid Security

16. Sealing and Marking of Bids